Pioneer Portable Radio AVIC X930BT User Manual
Operation Manual  
MULTIMEDIA AV NAVIGATION RECEIVER  
AVIC-Z130BT  
AVIC-X930BT  
AVIC-X9310BT  
Notice to all users:  
This software requires that the navigation system is  
properly connected to your vehicle’s parking brake and  
depending on your vehicle, additional installation may  
be required. For more information, please contact your  
Authorized Pioneer Electronics retailer or call us at  
(800) 421-1404.  
Be sure to read Important Information for the User  
first!  
Important Information for the User includes the  
important information that you must understand before  
using this navigation system.  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Sudden start alert 33  
– Registering a location by  
“Favorites” 47  
– Registering a location by scroll  
mode 47  
Searching for and selecting a location  
The basic flow of creating your route 34  
Searching for a location by address 35  
– Searching for a city name first 35  
– Finding the location by specifying the  
house number 36  
Setting up a route to your home 37  
Searching for Points of Interest (POI) 37  
– Searching for POIs by preset  
categories 37  
Editing registered locations 47  
– Editing the favorite location in the  
list 47  
– Editing your home 48  
– Sorting the favorite locations in the  
list 48  
– Deleting a favorite location from the  
list 49  
– Searching for a POI directly from the  
name of the facilities 37  
– Searching for a nearby POI 38  
– Searching for POIs around the  
destination 38  
Exporting and importing favorite  
locations 49  
– Exporting favorite locations 49  
– Importing favorite locations 49  
Deleting the destination history from the  
list 50  
– Searching for POIs around the city 38  
Selecting destination from “Favorites” 39  
Searching for POIs by using the data on the  
SD memory card 40  
Selecting a location you searched for  
recently 40  
Using traffic information  
Checking all traffic information 51  
Checking traffic information on the  
route 52  
Searching for a location by coordinates 40  
How to read traffic information on the  
map 52  
Viewing the traffic flow 52  
Setting an alternative route to avoid traffic  
congestion 53  
After the location is decided  
Setting a route to your destination 42  
– Displaying multiple routes 42  
– Checking for traffic congestion  
automatically 54  
– Checking traffic information  
manually 54  
Checking and modifying the current  
route  
Displaying the route overview 43  
Modifying the route calculation  
conditions 43  
– Items that users can operate 43  
Checking the current itinerary 44  
Editing waypoints 45  
– Adding a waypoint 45  
– Deleting a waypoint 45  
– Sorting waypoints 46  
Canceling the route guidance 46  
Selecting traffic information to display 55  
Selecting preferred RDS-TMC service  
provider manually 55  
Registering and connecting a Bluetooth  
device  
Preparing communication devices 56  
Registering your Bluetooth devices 56  
– Searching for nearby Bluetooth  
devices 56  
Registering and editing locations  
Storing favorite locations 47  
3
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
– Pairing from your Bluetooth  
devices 57  
Operating list screens (e.g. iPod list  
screen) 70  
– Searching for a specified Bluetooth  
device 58  
– Deleting a registered device 59  
Connecting a registered Bluetooth device  
manually 59  
– Switching between the AV operation  
screen and the list screen 70  
– Selecting an item 71  
– Returning to the previous display 71  
Using the radio (FM)  
Starting procedure 72  
– Setting for priority connecting 60  
Using hands-free phoning  
Displaying the phone menu 61  
Making a phone call 61  
Reading the screen 72  
Using the touch panel keys 73  
– Storing and recalling broadcast  
frequencies 73  
– Direct dialing 61  
– Making a call home easily 62  
– Calling a number in the phone  
book 62  
Operating by hardware buttons 74  
Using advanced functions 74  
– Storing the strongest broadcast  
frequencies 74  
– Dialing from the history 63  
– Dialing a favorite location 63  
– Dialing a facility’s phone number 63  
– Dialing from the map 64  
Receiving a phone call 64  
– Answering an incoming call 64  
Transferring the phone book 65  
– Deleting registered contacts 66  
Changing the phone settings 66  
– Editing the device name 66  
– Editing the password 66  
– Stopping Bluetooth wave  
transmission 67  
– Tuning in strong signals 74  
Using the radio (AM)  
Starting procedure 76  
Reading the screen 76  
Using the touch panel keys 77  
– Storing and recalling broadcast  
frequencies 77  
Operating by hardware buttons 78  
Using advanced functions 78  
– Storing the strongest broadcast  
frequencies 78  
– Tuning in strong signals 78  
– Echo canceling and noise  
reduction 67  
– Answering a call automatically 67  
– Setting the automatic rejection  
function 67  
– Clearing memory 68  
– Updating the Bluetooth wireless  
technology software 68  
HD Radio™ reception  
HD Radio broadcasting 80  
Starting procedure 80  
Reading the screen 81  
Using the touch panel keys 82  
– Storing and recalling broadcast  
frequencies 83  
Operating by hardware buttons 83  
Switching the display 83  
– Scrolling the detailed information 84  
Storing song information to an iPod (iTunes  
Tagging) 84  
Notes for hands-free phoning 69  
Basic operations of the AV source  
Displaying the AV operation screen 70  
– Selecting a source 70  
4
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Using advanced functions 84  
– Storing the strongest broadcast  
frequencies 85  
– Starting playback from a specified  
time 104  
Operating by hardware buttons 104  
Using advanced functions 104  
– Switching the seek mode 85  
– Tuning in strong signals 85  
– Switching the reception mode 85  
DVD-Video or DivX setup  
Displaying DVD/DivX® Setup menu 105  
Setting the top-priority languages 105  
Setting the angle icon display 105  
Setting the aspect ratio 106  
Setting the parental lock 106  
– Setting the code number and  
level 106  
Playing audio CDs  
Starting procedure 87  
Reading the screen 87  
Using the touch panel keys 88  
Operating by hardware buttons 89  
Using advanced functions 89  
Setting the auto play 107  
Setting the subtitle file for DivX 107  
Language code chart for DVDs 108  
Playing music files on ROM  
Starting procedure 90  
Reading the screen 90  
Playing music files (from USB or SD)  
Starting procedure 109  
Reading the screen 109  
Using the touch panel keys 92  
Operating by hardware buttons 93  
Using advanced functions 93  
Using the touch panel keys (Music) 111  
Operating by hardware buttons 112  
Using advanced functions 112  
Playing a DVD-Video  
Starting procedure 95  
Reading the screen 95  
Playing video files (from USB or SD)  
Starting procedure 113  
Reading the screen 113  
Using the touch panel keys (Video) 114  
– Searching for a specific scene and  
starting playback from a specified  
time 115  
Operating by hardware buttons 115  
Using advanced functions 115  
Using the touch panel keys 96  
– Resuming playback (Bookmark) 97  
– Searching for a specific scene and  
starting playback from a specified  
time 98  
– Direct number search 98  
– Operating the DVD menu 98  
– Using DVD menu by touch panel  
keys 98  
– Frame-by-frame playback 99  
– Slow motion playback 99  
Operating by hardware buttons 99  
Using advanced functions 99  
Using an iPod (iPod)  
Starting procedure 116  
Reading the screen 116  
Using the touch panel keys 118  
Operating by hardware buttons 120  
Starting the video playback 120  
Narrowing down a song or video with the  
list 120  
Playing a DivX video  
Starting procedure 101  
Reading the screen 101  
Using the touch panel keys 102  
– Frame-by-frame playback 103  
– Slow motion playback 103  
Operating the functions from your iPod 121  
Playing MusicSphere 122  
5
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
– Starting procedure 122  
Using the touch panel keys 142  
– Selecting a SIRIUS channel  
directly 143  
– Reading the screen 122  
– Using the touch panel keys 122  
Using advanced functions 122  
– Display the Radio ID 143  
– Storing and recalling broadcast  
stations 143  
– Using the song alert function 144  
– Using the “Instant Replay”  
function 144  
Using Pandora®  
Starting procedure 124  
Reading the screen 124  
Using the touch panel keys 126  
Operating by hardware buttons 126  
Operating by hardware buttons 145  
Using advanced functions 145  
– Setting the memorized songs 145  
– Using the Game Alert function 145  
– Displaying Game Information 146  
Using Aha Radio  
Starting procedure 127  
Reading the screen 128  
Using the touch panel keys 129  
Functions coupled with Aha Radio and the  
navigation system 130  
Using AV input  
Reading the screen 147  
Using AV1 147  
– Displaying POIs obtained with Aha  
Radio 130  
Using AV2 147  
Using the touch panel keys 147  
Using the Bluetooth audio player  
Starting procedure 131  
Reading the screen 131  
Using the touch panel keys 133  
Operating by hardware buttons 133  
Using advanced functions 134  
Using the external unit (EXT1, EXT2)  
Starting procedure 148  
Reading the screen 148  
Using the touch panel keys 149  
Customizing preferences  
Displaying the screen for navigation  
settings 150  
Checking the connections of leads 150  
Checking sensor learning status and driving  
status 151  
Using the XM tuner  
Starting procedure 135  
Reading the screen 135  
Using the touch panel keys 137  
– Selecting an XM channel directly 138  
– Displaying the Radio ID 138  
– Storing and recalling broadcast  
stations 139  
– Selecting a channel from the list 139  
– Using “MyMix” function 139  
Operating by hardware buttons 140  
Using advanced functions 140  
– Setting the memorized songs 140  
– Clearing status 151  
Using the fuel consumption function 152  
– Inputting the fuel consumption  
information for calculating the fuel  
cost 152  
– Calculating the fuel consumption 152  
– Exporting the data of fuel cost  
information 153  
Recording your travel history 154  
Using the demonstration guidance 154  
Registering your home 154  
Using the SIRIUS tuner  
Starting procedure 141  
Reading the screen 141  
6
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Correcting the current location 155  
Changing the eco-function setting 155  
Displaying the screen for map settings 156  
Setting the auto-zoom display 156  
Setting the detailed city map 156  
Setting the barrier graphic for city map 157  
Displaying the traffic notification icon 157  
Displaying the Bluetooth connection  
icon 158  
Selecting the video for rear display 168  
Adjusting the picture 169  
Displaying the screen for AV system  
settings 170  
– Setting video input 1 (AV1) 170  
– Setting video input 2 (AV2) 171  
– Changing the wide screen mode 171  
– Setting the rear output 171  
– Switching the muting/attenuation  
timing 172  
Setting the current street name display 158  
Setting the display of icons of favorite  
locations 158  
– Switching the muting/attenuation  
level 172  
Displaying the 3D landmarks 158  
Displaying maneuvers 159  
– Acquiring/Cataloging iPod music  
information 173  
Displaying the fuel consumption  
information 159  
– Displaying your DivX VOD registration  
code 174  
Displaying POI on the map 159  
– Displaying preinstalled POIs on the  
map 159  
– Displaying the customized POIs 160  
Changing the view mode 161  
Setting the map color change between day  
and night 161  
Changing the road color 161  
Changing the setting of navigation  
interruption screen 161  
Selecting the “Quick Access” menu 162  
Displaying the screen for system  
settings 162  
– Displaying your DivX VOD  
deregistration code 174  
Displaying the screen for AV sound  
settings 174  
– Using balance adjustment 175  
– Using the equalizer 175  
– Adjusting the equalizer curve  
automatically (Auto EQ) 177  
– Using sonic center control 179  
– Adjusting loudness 180  
– Using subwoofer output 180  
– Using the high pass filter 180  
– Adjusting source levels 180  
– Enhancing bass (Bass Booster) 181  
Replicating the settings 181  
Turning off the screen 181  
– Customizing the regional settings 163  
– Setting the Volume for Guidance and  
Phone 165  
– Changing the preinstalled splash  
screen 165  
Operating your navigation system with  
voice  
To Ensure Safe Driving 182  
Basics of the voice operation 182  
– Flow of the voice operation 182  
– Starting the voice operation 182  
– How to use the voice operation 183  
Available basic voice commands 185  
– Basic commands 185  
– Changing to the splash screen stored  
in the SD memory card 165  
– Setting for rear view camera 166  
– Adjusting the response positions of the  
touch panel (touch panel  
calibration) 167  
– Setting the illumination color 167  
– Checking the version information 168  
7
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
– Voice operation for the iPod 185  
– Voice operation for AV source (other  
than iPod) 186  
– Voice commands related to hands-free  
phoning 187  
– Playing DualDisc 208  
– Dolby Digital 208  
Detailed information for playable media 208  
– Compatibility 208  
– Media compatibility chart 211  
Bluetooth 215  
Tips for the voice operation 188  
About the SAT RADIO READY Logo 215  
HD Radio™ Technology 216  
SD and SDHC logo 216  
WMA/WMV 216  
DivX 216  
AAC 217  
Detailed information regarding connected  
iPod devices 217  
– iPod and iPhone 217  
– iTunes 217  
Using App-based Connected Contents 217  
– Pandora 218  
Other functions  
Setting the anti-theft function 189  
– Setting the password 189  
– Entering the password 189  
– Deleting the password 189  
– Forgotten password 189  
Returning the navigation system to the  
default or factory settings 190  
– Restoring the default setting 190  
– Returning the navigation system to the  
initial state 190  
– Setting items to be deleted 191  
– Aha Radio 218  
Using the LCD screen correctly 218  
– Handling the LCD screen 218  
– Liquid crystal display (LCD)  
screen 218  
Appendix  
Troubleshooting 193  
Messages and how to react to them 198  
Messages for audio functions 200  
Positioning technology 202  
– Positioning by GPS 202  
– Positioning by dead reckoning 202  
– How do GPS and dead reckoning work  
together? 202  
Handling large errors 203  
– When positioning by GPS is  
impossible 203  
– Maintaining the LCD screen 218  
– LED (light-emitting diode)  
backlight 219  
Display information 220  
– Destination Menu 220  
– Phone Menu 220  
– Settings Menu 221  
– Navi Settings menu 221  
– System Settings menu 222  
– Map Settings menu 222  
– Bluetooth Settings menu 223  
– AV System Settings menu 223  
– AV Sound Settings menu 224  
Glossary 225  
– Conditions likely to cause noticeable  
positioning errors 204  
Route setting information 206  
– Route search specifications 206  
Handling and care of discs 206  
– Built-in drive and care 207  
– Ambient conditions for playing a  
disc 207  
Specifications 228  
Playable discs 207  
– DVD-Video and CD 207  
– AVCHD recorded discs 208  
8
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
Introduction  
01  
e.g.)  
Manual overview  
“Destination Menu” screen or “AV  
Source” screen  
Touch panel keys that are available on the  
screen are described in bold in brackets [ ]:  
e.g.)  
[Destination], [Settings].  
Extra information, alternatives and other  
notes are presented in the following for-  
mat:  
Before using this product, be sure to read Im-  
portant Information for the User (a separate  
manual) which contains warnings, cautions,  
and other important information that you  
should note.  
!
!
The screen examples shown in this manual  
are the ones for AVIC-Z130BT. If you use a dif-  
ferent model, the screens that appear may dif-  
fer from the examples in the manual.  
e.g.)  
p If the home location has not been stored  
yet, set the location first.  
Functions of other keys on the same screen  
are indicated with # at the beginning of the  
description:  
!
!
How to use this manual  
Finding the operation procedure for  
what you want to do  
When you have decided what you want to do,  
you can find the page you need from the Con-  
tents.  
e.g.)  
# If you touch [OK], the entry is deleted.  
References are indicated like this:  
e.g.)  
= For details of the operations, refer to  
Screen switching overview on page 22.  
Finding the operation procedure from  
a menu name  
If you want to check the meaning of an item  
displayed on the screen, you will find the ne-  
cessary page from the Display information at  
the end of the manual.  
Terms used in this manual  
“Front display” and “Rear display”  
In this manual, the screen that is attached to  
the body of this navigation unit will be referred  
to as the “Front display”. Any additional screen  
that is commercially available and can be con-  
nected to this navigation unit will be referred  
to as the “Rear display”.  
Glossary  
Use the glossary to find the meanings of  
terms.  
Conventions used in this manual  
“Video image”  
Before moving on, take a few minutes to read  
the following information about the conven-  
tions used in this manual. Familiarity with  
these conventions will help you greatly as you  
learn how to use your new equipment.  
“Video image” in this manual indicates mov-  
ing images of DVD-Video, DivX®, iPod, and any  
equipment that is connected to this system  
with an RCA cable, such as general-purpose  
AV equipment.  
!
Buttons on your navigation system are de-  
scribed in ALL CAPITAL, BOLD lettering:  
e.g.)  
HOME button, MODE button.  
Menu items, screen titles, and functional  
components are described in bold with  
double quotation marks “ ”:  
!
9
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
01  
Introduction  
as pay-audio or audio-on-demand applica-  
tions. An independent license for such use is  
required. For details, please visit  
“External storage device (USB, SD)”  
The SD memory card, SDHC memory card,  
microSD card, microSDHC card and USB  
memory device are collectively referred to as  
the “external storage device (USB, SD)”. If it in-  
dicates the USB memory only, it is referred to  
as the “USB storage device”.  
http://www.mp3licensing.com.  
iPod compatibility  
This product supports only the following iPod  
models and iPod software versions. Others  
may not work correctly.  
“SD memory card”  
The SD memory card, SDHC memory card,  
microSD card and microSDHC card are col-  
lectively referred to as the “SD memory  
card”.  
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
iPod touch fourth generation: Ver. 4.1  
iPod touch third generation: Ver. 4.1  
iPod touch second generation: Ver. 4.1  
iPod touch first generation: Ver. 3.1.3  
iPod classic 120GB: Ver. 2.0.1  
iPod classic 160GB (2009): Ver. 2.0.4  
iPod classic 80GB: Ver. 1.1.2  
Notice regarding video  
viewing  
Remember that use of this system for com-  
mercial or public viewing purposes may con-  
stitute an infringement on the author’s rights  
as protected by the Copyright Law.  
iPod classic 160GB (2007): Ver. 1.1.2  
iPod with video: Ver. 1.3  
iPod nano sixth generation: Ver. 1.0  
iPod nano fifth generation: Ver. 1.0.2  
iPod nano fourth generation: Ver. 1.0.4  
iPod nano third generation: Ver. 1.1.3  
iPod nano second generation: Ver. 1.1.3  
iPod nano first generation: Ver. 1.3.1  
iPhone 4: Ver. 4.1  
iPhone 3GS: Ver. 4.1  
iPhone 3G: Ver. 4.1  
iPhone: Ver. 3.1.3  
Notice regarding DVD-  
Video viewing  
This item incorporates copy protection tech-  
nology that is protected by U.S. patents and  
other intellectual property rights of Rovi  
Corporation. Reverse engineering and disas-  
sembly are prohibited.  
p In this manual, iPod and iPhone will be re-  
ferred to as iPod.  
p When you use this navigation system with  
a Pioneer USB interface cable for iPod (CD-  
IU51V) (sold separately), you can control an  
iPod compatible with this navigation sys-  
tem.  
p Operation methods may vary depending on  
the iPod models and the software version  
of iPod.  
Notice regarding MP3 file  
usage  
Supply of this navigation system conveys only  
a license for private, non-commercial use and  
does not convey a license nor imply any right  
to use this product in any commercial (i.e. rev-  
enue-generating), real time broadcasting (ter-  
restrial, satellite, cable and/or any other  
p Depending on the software version of the  
iPod, it may not be compatible with this  
equipment.  
For details about iPod compatibility with  
this navigation system, refer to the informa-  
tion on our website.  
media), broadcasting/streaming via internet,  
intranets and/or other networks or in other  
electronic content distribution systems, such  
10  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Introduction  
01  
Map coverage  
For details about the map coverage of this na-  
vigation system, refer to the information on  
our website.  
Protecting the LCD panel  
and screen  
p Do not allow direct sunlight to fall on the  
LCD screen when this product is not being  
used. Extended exposure to direct sunlight  
can result in LCD screen malfunction due  
to the resulting high temperatures.  
p When using a cellular phone, keep the an-  
tenna of the cellular phone away from the  
LCD screen to prevent disruption of the  
video in the form of spots, colored stripes,  
etc.  
p To protect the LCD screen from damage, be  
sure to touch the touch panel keys with  
your finger only and gently touch the  
screen.  
Notes on internal memory  
Before removing the vehicle  
battery  
If the battery is disconnected or discharged,  
the memory will be erased and must be repro-  
grammed.  
p Some data remains. Be sure to read Setting  
items to be deleted first.  
= For details, refer to Setting items to be  
deleted on page 191.  
Data subject to erasure  
The information is erased by disconnecting  
the yellow lead from the battery (or removing  
the battery itself).  
p Some data remains. Be sure to read Setting  
items to be deleted first.  
= For details, refer to Setting items to be  
deleted on page 191.  
11  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
02  
Basic operation  
Checking part names and functions  
This chapter gives information about the names of the parts and the main features using the buttons.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
AVIC-Z130BT (with the LCD panel closed)  
8
9
AVIC-Z130BT (with the LCD panel open)  
12  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Basic operation  
02  
6
8
9
3
a
7
4
5
b
c
AVIC-X930BT, AVIC-X9310BT  
1
button  
Press the  
erations.  
= For details, refer to Chapter 33.  
Press and hold the  
!
!
Press to display the map screen while  
the navigation function screen is dis-  
played.  
Press and hold to display the “Picture  
Adjustment” screen.  
!
!
button to activate voice op-  
button to switch  
the AV source to mute.  
To cancel the muting, press and hold it  
again.  
= For details, refer to Adjusting the pic-  
ture on page 169.  
5 TRK button  
2 VOL (+/–) button  
Press to adjust the AV (Audio and Video)  
source volume.  
Press to perform manual seek tuning, fast  
forward, reverse and track search controls.  
= For details, refer to the descriptions from  
Chapter 14 to Chapter 31.  
3 HOME button  
!
Press the HOME button to display the  
“Top Menu” screen.  
Press to switch between the Classic  
Menu and the Shortcut Menu while the  
“Top Menu” is displayed.  
= For details, refer to What you can do  
on each menu on page 23.  
Press and hold to turn off the screen dis-  
play.  
6 h button  
7 LCD screen  
!
8 Disc-loading slot  
Insert a disc to play.  
= For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting  
a disc on page 15.  
!
9 SD card slot  
= For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting  
an SD memory card on page 16.  
4 MODE button  
Press to switch between the map screen  
and the AV operation screen.  
!
13  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
02  
Basic operation  
a Multi-control (Volume knob/  
/MUTE)  
1
Press and hold the Detach button, and  
!
!
!
Rotate to adjust the AV (Audio and  
Video) source volume.  
slide it down.  
Press the center of Multi-control to hear  
the route guidance.  
Press and hold the center of Multi-con-  
trol to mute the AV (Audio and Video)  
source. To cancel the muting, press and  
hold it again.  
b Front panel  
When you release your finger, the bottom of  
the front panel separates slightly from the na-  
vigation system.  
c Detach button  
Press to remove the front panel from the na-  
vigation system.  
= For details, refer to Removing the front  
panel on this page.  
2
Gently grip the bottom of the front  
panel and slowly pull it outward.  
Protecting your product from theft  
p This function is available for AVIC-X930BT  
and AVIC-X9310BT.  
The front panel can be detached from the navi-  
gation system to discourage theft, as de-  
scribed below.  
CAUTION  
Do not expose the front panel to excessive  
shock or disassemble it.  
Never grip the buttons tightly or use force  
when removing or attaching.  
Keep the front panel out of reach of small chil-  
dren to prevent them from putting it in their  
mouths.  
After removing the front panel, keep it in a  
safe place so it is not scratched or damaged.  
Keep the front panel out of direct sunlight and  
high temperatures.  
When removing or attaching the front panel,  
do so after turning the ignition switch off  
(ACC OFF).  
Front panel  
!
!
!
Attaching the front panel  
1
Slide the front panel all the way into  
the navigation system.  
Make sure the front panel is securely con-  
nected to the mounting hooks of the naviga-  
tion system.  
!
!
!
2
Push the lower part of the front panel  
until you hear a click.  
If you fail to successfully attach the front panel  
to the navigation system, try again but be care-  
ful not to force it as the panel could be  
damaged.  
Removing the front panel  
p The navigation system cannot be operated  
while the front panel is removed from the  
navigation system.  
14  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Basic operation  
02  
Adjusting the LCD panel angle  
p This function is available for AVIC-Z130BT  
CAUTION  
Do not open or close the LCD panel by force.  
This may cause malfunction.  
!
!
only.  
Do not operate this navigation system until  
the LCD panel completely opens or closes. If  
this navigation system is operated while the  
LCD panel is opening or closing, the LCD  
panel may stop at that angle for safety.  
Do not place a glass or a can on the open  
LCD panel. Doing so may break this naviga-  
tion system.  
WARNING  
When opening, closing and adjusting the angle  
of the LCD panel, be careful not to get your fin-  
gers caught.  
!
CAUTION  
Do not open or close the LCD panel by force. This  
may cause malfunction.  
!
Do not insert anything other than a disc into  
the disc-loading slot.  
1
Press the h button.  
1
Press the h button.  
The “Monitor Setup” screen appears.  
The “Monitor Setup” screen appears.  
2 Touch or to adjust the angle.  
2
Touch [Open].  
The LCD panel opens, and the disc-loading  
slot appears.  
3
Touch  
.
p The adjusted angle of the LCD panel will be  
memorized and the LCD panel will automa-  
tically return to that angle the next time the  
LCD panel is opened or closed.  
3
Insert a disc into the disc-loading slot.  
Inserting and ejecting a disc  
Inserting a disc (for AVIC-Z130BT)  
WARNING  
!
When opening, closing and adjusting the  
angle of the LCD panel, be careful not to get  
your fingers caught.  
The disc is loaded, and the LCD panel closes.  
!
Do not use with the LCD panel left open. If  
LCD panel is left open, it may result in injury  
in the event of an accident.  
15  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
02  
Basic operation  
2
Touch [Disc Eject].  
Ejecting a disc (for AVIC-Z130BT)  
1
Press the h button.  
The “Monitor Setup” screen appears.  
2
Touch [Disc Eject].  
The disc is ejected.  
Inserting and ejecting an  
SD memory card  
The LCD panel opens, and the disc is ejected.  
Remove the disc, and press the h but-  
3
CAUTION  
ton.  
!
Ejecting an SD memory card during data  
transfer can damage the SD memory card. Be  
sure to eject the SD memory card by the pro-  
cedure described in this manual.  
The LCD panel closes.  
Inserting a disc (for AVIC-  
X930BT and AVIC-X9310BT)  
!
If data loss or corruption occurs on the sto-  
rage device for any reason, it is usually not  
possible to recover the data. Pioneer accepts  
no liability for damages, costs or expenses  
arising from data loss or corruption.  
Do not insert anything other than SD memory  
cards.  
%
Insert a disc into the disc-loading slot.  
!
p This system is not compatible with Multi  
Media Card (MMC).  
p Compatibility with all SD memory cards is  
not guaranteed.  
p This unit may not achieve optimum perfor-  
mance with some SD memory cards.  
p Do not insert anything other than a disc  
into the disc-loading slot.  
Inserting an SD memory card  
(for AVIC-Z130BT)  
Ejecting a disc (for AVIC-X930BT  
and AVIC-X9310BT)  
CAUTION  
1
Press the h button.  
!
!
Do not press the h button when an SD mem-  
ory card is not fully inserted. Doing so may da-  
mage the card.  
The touch panel keys for ejecting the media  
appear.  
Do not press the h button before an SD mem-  
ory card has been completely removed. Doing  
so may damage the card.  
16  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Basic operation  
02  
1
Press the h button.  
2
Touch [Eject SD].  
The “Monitor Setup” screen appears.  
2
Touch [SD Insert].  
The LCD panel opens.  
Press the middle of the SD memory  
3
The LCD panel opens, and the SD card slot ap-  
pears.  
card gently until it clicks.  
3
Insert an SD memory card into the SD  
card slot.  
Insert it with the label surface facing to the up-  
side and press the card until it clicks and com-  
pletely locks.  
4
Pull the SD memory card out straight.  
5
Press the h button.  
The LCD panel closes.  
p When you eject the SD memory card by  
touching [Eject SD], the model information  
that you are using will be automatically  
stored into the SD memory card.  
The utility program AVIC FEEDS will use  
this information to recognize the model  
that you use.  
4
Press the h button.  
The LCD panel closes.  
p If data related to map data, such as custo-  
mized POI data, is stored on the SD mem-  
ory card, the navigation system restarts.  
Ejecting an SD memory card  
(for AVIC-Z130BT)  
When the data related to map data is  
stored  
p This description is for AVIC-Z130BT.  
1
Press the h button.  
The “Monitor Setup” screen appears.  
17  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
02  
Basic operation  
If data related to map data, such as custo-  
mized POI data, is stored on the SD memory  
card, operating procedures are slightly differ-  
ent.  
Ejecting an SD memory card (for  
AVIC-X930BT and AVIC-X9310BT)  
1
Press the h button.  
The touch panel keys for ejecting the media  
appear.  
1
Press the h button and then touch  
[Eject SD].  
2
Touch [Eject SD].  
2
Touch [Yes].  
A message prompting you to remove the SD  
memory card appears.  
The navigation system restarts, and then the  
LCD panel opens.  
3
Eject the SD memory card.  
4
Press the h button.  
The LCD panel closes.  
Inserting an SD memory card (for  
AVIC-X930BT and AVIC-X9310BT)  
3
Press the middle of the SD memory  
%
Insert an SD memory card into the SD  
card gently until it clicks.  
card slot.  
Insert the SD memory card with the terminal  
contacts facing down, and press the card until  
it clicks and locks completely.  
4
Pull the SD memory card out straight.  
p If data related to map data, such as custo-  
mized POI data, is stored on the SD mem-  
ory card, the navigation system restarts.  
When the data related to map data is  
stored  
p This description is for AVIC-X930BT and  
AVIC-X9310BT.  
18  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Basic operation  
02  
possible to recover the data. Pioneer accepts  
no liability for damages, costs or expenses  
arising from data loss or corruption.  
If data related to map data, such as custo-  
mized POI data, is stored on the SD memory  
card, operating procedures are slightly differ-  
ent.  
Plugging in a USB storage device  
1
Press the h button and then touch  
[Eject SD].  
%
Plug a USB storage device into the USB  
and mini-jack connector.  
2
Touch [Yes].  
USB and mini-jack connector  
The navigation system restarts, and a message  
prompting you to remove the SD memory card  
appears.  
USB storage device  
p Compatibility with all USB storage devices  
is not guaranteed.  
This navigation system may not achieve op-  
timum performance with some USB sto-  
rage devices.  
p Connection via a USB hub is not possible.  
Unplugging a USB storage device  
3
Eject the SD memory card while the  
%
Pull out the USB storage device after  
message is displayed.  
Eject the SD memory card before touching  
[OK].  
checking that no data is being accessed.  
Connecting and  
disconnecting an iPod  
4
Touch [OK].  
The navigation system restarts.  
CAUTION  
!
!
To prevent data loss and damage to the sto-  
rage device, never remove it from this naviga-  
tion system while data is being transferred.  
If data loss or corruption occurs on the sto-  
rage device for any reason, it is usually not  
possible to recover the data. Pioneer accepts  
no liability for damages, costs or expenses  
arising from data loss or corruption.  
Plugging and unplugging a  
USB storage device  
CAUTION  
!
!
To prevent data loss and damage to the sto-  
rage device, never remove it from this naviga-  
tion system while data is being transferred.  
If data loss or corruption occurs on the sto-  
rage device for any reason, it is usually not  
19  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
02  
Basic operation  
Connecting your iPod  
Using the USB interface cable for iPod en-  
ables you to connect your iPod to the naviga-  
tion system.  
p A USB interface cable for iPod (CD-IU51V)  
(sold separately) is required for connection.  
p For details about iPod compatibility with  
this navigation system, refer to the informa-  
tion on our website.  
Startup and termination  
1
Start the engine to boot up the system.  
After a short pause, the splash screen comes  
on for a few seconds.  
p To protect the LCD screen from damage, be  
sure to touch the touch panel keys with  
your finger only and gently touch the  
screen.  
p Connection via a USB hub is not possible.  
2
Turn off the vehicle engine to termi-  
nate the system.  
The navigation system is also turned off.  
1
Check that no USB storage device is  
connected.  
2
Connect your iPod.  
On first-time startup  
When you use the navigation system for the  
first time, select the language that you want to  
use.  
1
Start the engine to boot up the system.  
After a short pause, the splash screen comes  
on for a few seconds.  
2
Touch the language that you want to  
use on the screen.  
USB and mini-jack con-  
nector  
USB interface cable for  
iPod  
Disconnecting your iPod  
%
Pull out the USB interface cable for iPod  
3
Touch the language that you want to  
after checking that no data is being ac-  
cessed.  
use for the voice guidance.  
The navigation system will now restart.  
20  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Basic operation  
02  
4
Read the disclaimer carefully, checking  
its details, and then touch [OK] if you  
agree to the conditions.  
The map screen appears.  
Regular startup  
%
Start the engine to boot up the system.  
After a short pause, the splash screen comes  
on for a few seconds.  
p The screen shown will differ depending on  
the previous conditions.  
p When there is no route, the disclaimer ap-  
pears after the navigation system reboots.  
Read the disclaimer carefully, checking its  
details, and then touch [OK] if you agree to  
the conditions.  
p If the anti-theft function is activated, you  
must enter your password.  
Read the disclaimer carefully, checking its  
details, and then touch [OK] if you agree to  
the conditions.  
21  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
03  
How to use the navigation menu screens  
Screen switching overview  
2
1
4
3
1
5
6
22  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
How to use the navigation menu screens  
03  
What you can do on each  
menu  
Shortcut Menu  
Registering your favorite menu items in short-  
cuts allows you to quickly jump to the regis-  
tered menu screen by a simple touch on the  
Shortcut Menu screen.  
1 Top Menu  
Press the HOME button to display the “Top  
Menu” screen.  
This is the starting menu to access the desired  
screens and operate the various functions.  
There are two types of the “Top Menu” screen.  
Selecting the shortcut  
p Up to 15 menu items can be registered in  
shortcuts.  
1
Press the HOME button repeatedly to  
display the Shortcut Menu screen.  
p When you use the navigation system for the  
first time or no items are set on shortcut, a  
message will appear. Touch [Yes] to pro-  
ceed to next step.  
Classic Menu  
2
Touch [Shortcut].  
Shortcut Menu  
The Shortcut selection screen appears.  
Touch the tab on the right edge or scroll  
the bar to display the icon that you want  
to set to shortcut.  
p In this manual, Classic Menu will be re-  
ferred to as “Top Menu”.  
2 Destination Menu  
3
You can search for your destination on this  
menu. You can also check or cancel your set  
route from this menu.  
3 Phone Menu  
You can access the screen that is related to  
hands-free phoning.  
4 AV operation screen  
This is the screen that normally appears when  
you play the AV source.  
5 Settings Menu  
Scroll bar  
You can access the screen to customize set-  
tings.  
6 Map screen  
4
Touch and hold the icon that you want  
to add to shortcut.  
You can use this screen to check the current  
vehicle position information and route to the  
destination.  
23  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
03  
How to use the navigation menu screens  
If all of the characters cannot be displayed  
5
Move the icon to the left side of the  
within the displayed area, touching the key to  
the right of the item allows you to see remain-  
ing characters.  
screen, and then release it.  
The selected item is added to shortcut.  
Operating the on-screen  
keyboard  
1
8
2
3
Removing a shortcut  
4
1
Touch and hold the icon of the shortcut  
you want to remove.  
5
6
7
1 Screen title  
2
Move the icon to the right side of the  
The screen title appears.  
2 Text box  
screen, and then release it.  
Operating list screens (e.g.  
POI list)  
Displays the characters that are entered. If  
there is no text in the box, an informative  
guide with text appears.  
4
5
6
3 Keyboard  
1
2
Touch the keys to enter the characters.  
4
The previous screen returns.  
5 Keys  
Switches the on-screen keyboard layout.  
6 Sym., Others, 0-9  
You can enter other characters of alphabet.  
3
You can also enter text with marks such as [&]  
or [+] or numbers.  
Touch to toggle the selection.  
1 Screen title  
2
Touching or on the scroll bar scrolls  
through the list and allows you to view the re-  
maining items.  
p Even if you use any of “A”, “Ä”, “Å”, “Æ”,  
the displayed result is the same.  
7 OK  
3
Confirms the entry and allows you to proceed  
to the next step.  
The previous screen returns.  
4 Listed items  
8
Touching an item on the list allows you to nar-  
row down the options and proceed to the next  
operation.  
Deletes the input text one letter at a time, be-  
ginning at the end of the text. Continuing to  
touch the button deletes all of the text.  
5 Number of possible choices  
p If there are 10 000 or more possible  
choices, “****” is displayed.  
6
24  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
How to use the map  
04  
Most of the information provided by your navigation system can be seen on the map. You need to be-  
come familiar with how information appears on the map.  
How to read the map screen  
This example shows an example of a 2D map screen.  
1
2
g
f
e
d
c
3
4
5
6
b
7
8
9
a
p Information with an asterisk (*) appears  
only when the route is set.  
p Depending on the conditions and settings,  
some items may not be displayed.  
1 Name of the street to be used (or next gui-  
dance point)*  
Shows the turning direction after next gui-  
dance point and the distance to there.  
= For details, refer to Displaying maneu-  
vers on page 159.  
5 Map control  
Touching  
displays touch panel keys for  
2 Next direction of travel*  
changing the map scale and the map orienta-  
tion.  
6 Current position  
As you get closer to the guidance point, the  
color of the item changes to green.  
p Touching this item enables you to hear  
the next guidance again.  
p You can select between display and  
non-display.  
Indicates the current location of your vehicle.  
The apex of the triangular mark indicates your  
orientation and the display moves automati-  
cally as you drive.  
= For details, refer to Displaying man-  
euvers on page 159.  
3 Distance to the guidance point*  
Shows the distance to the next guidance  
point.  
p Touching this item enables you to hear  
the next guidance again.  
4 Second Maneuver Arrow*  
p The apex of the triangular mark is the  
proper current position of the vehicle.  
7 Eco-Meter  
Displays a graph comparing the past average  
fuel mileage and the average fuel mileage  
since the navigation system was last started.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the fuel  
consumption information on page 159.  
25  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
04  
How to use the map  
8 Street name (or city name) that your vehi-  
cle is traveling along  
rival is only a reference value, and does  
not guarantee arrival at that time.  
Travel time to your destination or  
waypoint*  
= For details, refer to Setting the current  
street name display on page 158.  
9 Extension tab for the AV information bar  
Touching this tab opens the AV information  
bar and enables you to briefly view the current  
status on the AV source. Touching it again re-  
tracts the bar.  
!
g Current time  
Meaning of guidance flags  
Destination  
The checkered flag indicates your  
destination.  
Waypoint  
The blue flags indicate your way-  
points.  
Guidance point  
The next guidance point (next turn-  
ing point, etc.) is shown by a yel-  
low flag.  
a Shortcut to the AV operation screen  
The AV source currently selected is shown.  
Touching the indicator displays the AV opera-  
tion screen of the current source directly.  
p Depending on the source currently cho-  
sen, an image is displayed.  
b Quick Access icon  
Displays the “Quick Access” menu.  
= For details, refer to Using shortcut  
menus on the map on page 29.  
Enlarged map of the intersection  
When “Close Up View” in the “Map Settings”  
screen is “On”, an enlarged map of the inter-  
section appears.  
c Map orientation indicator  
!
When “North up” is selected,  
played.  
When “Heading up” is selected,  
displayed.  
is dis-  
is  
!
p The red arrow indicates north.  
= For details, refer to Switching the map or-  
ientation on page 28.  
d Current route*  
The route currently set is highlighted in color  
on the map. If a waypoint is set on the route,  
the route after the next waypoint is high-  
lighted in another color.  
= For details, refer to Setting the auto-zoom  
display on page 156.  
e Direction line*  
The direction towards your destination (next  
waypoint, or the position of a cursor) is indi-  
cated with a straight line.  
f Multi-Info window  
Each touch of Multi-Info window changes the  
display information as follows.  
!
Distance to the destination (or dis-  
tance to waypoint)*  
!
Estimated time of arrival at your des-  
tination or waypoint*  
The estimated time of arrival is an ideal  
value calculated based on the value set  
for “Average Speed” and the actual  
driving speed. The estimated time of ar-  
26  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
How to use the map  
04  
route guidance, including turn-by-turn voice  
directions and arrow icons.  
Display during freeway driving  
In certain locations of the freeway, lane infor-  
mation is available. The map indicates the re-  
commended lane to be in to easily maneuver  
the next guidance.  
Roads without turn-by-turn  
instructions  
Routable roads (the route displayed and high-  
lighted in violet) have only basic data and can  
only be used to plot a navigable route. Pioneer  
Navigation will only display a navigable route  
on the map (only the arrival guidance for the  
destination or a waypoint is available). Please  
review and obey all local traffic rules along the  
highlighted route for your safety.  
1
No turn-by-turn directions will be displayed on  
these roads.  
While driving on the freeway, freeway exit  
numbers and freeway signs may be displayed  
in the vicinity of interchanges and exits.  
Non routable roads (pink color road)  
Map display is possible, but it cannot be used  
for route calculation. Please review and obey  
all local traffic rules along this route. (For your  
safety.)  
2
3
Operating the map screen  
Changing the scale of the map  
You can change the map scale between 25  
yards and 1 000 miles (25 meters and 2 000  
kilometers).  
1 Lane information  
2 Freeway exit information  
Displays the freeway exit.  
1
2
Display the map screen.  
3 Freeway signs  
Touch  
on the map screen.  
with the map scale appear.  
These show the road number and give direc-  
tional information.  
and  
p If the data for these items is not contained  
in the built-in memory, the information is  
not available even if there are the signs on  
the actual road.  
Types of the road stored in  
the map database  
Roads included in the route guidance  
Turn by Turn Routable Roads contain full attri-  
bute data and can be used for full Route Gui-  
dance. Pioneer Navigation will display full  
27  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
04  
How to use the map  
3
Touch  
or  
to change the map  
Scrolling the map to the  
position you want to see  
scale.  
p If you do not operate the function for a few  
seconds, the touch panel keys for map dis-  
play control disappear.  
1
Display the map screen.  
2
Touch and drag the map in the desired  
#
If you touch the direct scale key, the map is  
direction to scroll.  
changed to the selected scale directly.  
Switching the map orientation  
You can switch how the map shows your vehi-  
cle’s direction between “Heading up” and  
“North up”.  
1
!
Heading up:  
2
The map display always shows the vehicle’s  
direction as proceeding toward the top of  
the screen.  
1 Cursor  
2 Distance from the current position  
Positioning the cursor to the desired location  
results displaying in a brief informational over-  
view about the location at the bottom of  
screen, with the street name and other infor-  
mation for this location. (The information  
shown varies depending on the position.)  
p The scrolling increment depends on your  
dragging length.  
!
North up:  
The map display always has north at the  
top of the screen.  
p The map orientation is fixed at “North up”  
when the map scale is 25 miles (50 kilo-  
meters) or more.  
p The map orientation is fixed at “Heading  
up” when the 3D map screen is displayed.  
#
If you touch  
, the map returns to the cur-  
1
2
Display the map screen.  
rent position.  
p Pressing MODE button returns the map to  
Touch  
on the map screen.  
the current position.  
or  
appears.  
Viewing information about a  
specified location  
An icon appears at registered places (home lo-  
cation, specific places, Favorites entries) and  
places where there is a POI icon or traffic in-  
formation icon. Place the scroll cursor over  
the icon to view detailed information.  
3
Touch  
or  
to switch the vehicle’s  
1
Scroll the map and move the scroll cur-  
direction.  
sor to the icon you want to view.  
Each time you touch the key changes the set-  
ting.  
p If you do not operate the function for a few  
seconds, the touch panel keys for map dis-  
play control disappear.  
28  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
How to use the map  
04  
2
Touch  
.
You can customize “Quick Access” displayed  
on screen. The “Quick Access” described here  
are prepared as the default setting.  
= For details, refer to Selecting the “Quick Ac-  
cess” menu on page 162.  
p Items marked with an asterisk (*) cannot  
be removed from the “Quick Access”  
menu.  
%
When the map is displayed, touch  
.
The “Information List” screen appears.  
Touch the item that you want to check  
3
the detailed information.  
Information for a specified location appears.  
Quick Access menu  
: Route Options*  
Displayed when the map is not scrolled. This  
item can be selected only during route gui-  
dance.  
You can modify the conditions for route calcu-  
lation and recalculate the current route.  
= For details, refer to Modifying the route cal-  
culation conditions on page 43.  
: Destination*  
The information shown varies according to the  
location. (There may be no information for that  
location.)  
= For details, refer to Setting the display of  
icons of favorite locations on page 158.  
= For details, refer to Displaying POI on the  
map on page 159.  
Displayed when the map is scrolled. Set the  
route to the place specified with the cursor.  
: Registration  
= For details, refer to How to read traffic infor-  
mation on the map on page 52.  
Register information on the location indicated  
by the cursor to “Favorites”.  
= For details, refer to Registering a location by  
scroll mode on page 47.  
: Vicinity Search  
Find POIs (Points Of Interest) in the vicinity of  
the cursor.  
p Touching [Call] enables you to call the posi-  
tion if a telephone number is available.  
(Pairing with cellular phone featuring  
Bluetooth wireless technology is required.)  
= For details, refer to Dialing from the map  
on page 64.  
= For details, refer to Searching for a nearby  
POI on page 38.  
: Overlay POI  
Displays icons for surrounding facilities (POI)  
on the map.  
= For details, refer to Displaying POI on the  
map on page 159.  
Using shortcut menus on the map  
“Quick Access” menu allows you to perform  
various tasks, such as route calculation for the  
location indicated by the cursor or registering  
a location in “Favorites”, faster than using the  
navigation menu.  
: Volume  
29  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
04  
How to use the map  
!
Street View:  
Displays the “Volume Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Setting the Volume for  
Guidance and Phone on page 165.  
: Contacts  
Displays the “Contacts List” screen.  
= For details, refer to Calling a number in the  
phone book on page 62.  
Information on the next four guidance  
points closest to the current location ap-  
pear in order from top to bottom on the left  
side of the screen. The following informa-  
tion is displayed.  
Close  
Hides the “Quick Access” menu.  
Switching the view mode  
Various types of screen displays can be se-  
lected for navigation guidance.  
— Name of the next route to be taken by  
the vehicle  
— Arrow indicating the direction of the ve-  
hicle  
1
Display the “Map Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
map settings on page 156.  
— Distance to the guidance points  
p This mode is available when the route is  
set.  
2
Touch [View Mode].  
The “View Mode” screen appears.  
!
Rear View:  
3
Touch the type that you want to set.  
Displays the rear view image on the left  
side of the screen and the map on the right  
side of the screen.  
You can select the following types:  
!
2D View (default):  
Displays a normal map (2D map).  
p This mode is available when the rear  
view camera setting is set to “On”.  
= For details, refer to Setting for rear view  
camera on page 166.  
!
3D View:  
Displays a map with an antenna view (3D  
map).  
!
Eco Graph:  
Displays a graph for eco-driving on the left  
side of the screen and the map on the right  
side of the screen.  
30  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
How to use the map  
04  
= For details, refer to Checking the eco-  
friendly driving status on the next  
page.  
31  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
05  
Eco-friendly driving functions  
This navigation system is equipped with eco-  
friendly driving functions that can be used to  
estimate whether you are driving in an envir-  
onmentally friendly way.  
1
2
3
This chapter describes these functions.  
4
!
The fuel mileage calculated is based on a  
theoretical value determined from vehicle  
speed and position information from the  
navigation system. The fuel mileage dis-  
played is only a reference value, and does  
not guarantee the mileage displayed can be  
obtained.  
1 Eco Score  
The result of the comparison of your past  
average fuel mileage and current average  
fuel mileage appears as a value from  
0.0 Pts (points) to 10.0 Pts. The higher the  
value, the better the fuel mileage when  
compared to past route guidance.  
The green gauge indicates the current  
score, and the gray gauge indicates the  
best score to date.  
!
!
The eco-friendly driving functions are an es-  
timate of the real time fuel consumption to  
average fuel consumption ratio and is not  
an actual value.  
The eco-friendly driving functions and cal-  
culations take into consideration the loca-  
tion of the GPS position and speed of the  
vehicle in determining a value.  
The “Eco Score” is updated every 5 min-  
utes.  
p This is not displayed when “Eco Score”  
is set to “Off” or when no route is set.  
2 Best Score  
Displays the best score to date.  
p This is not displayed when “Eco Score”  
is set to “Off” or when no route is set.  
3 Average fuel mileage comparison graph  
Displays a comparison of the average fuel  
mileage up to the point the navigation sys-  
tem was last stopped (past average fuel  
mileage) and the current average fuel mile-  
age. The display is updated every 3 sec-  
onds. The more the value moves in the  
direction of +, the better the fuel mileage.  
There are three different graph bars.  
Checking the eco-friendly  
driving status  
This function estimates approximate fuel mile-  
age based on your driving, compares that with  
your average fuel mileage in the past, and dis-  
plays the results in a graph.  
The graph appears when the map display is  
set to “Eco Graph”.  
1
Display the “Map Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
map settings on page 156.  
!
Total  
A comparison of the past average fuel  
mileage and the average fuel mileage of  
the current drive.  
2
Touch [View Mode].  
The “View Mode” screen appears.  
!
: Ordinary Road  
A comparison of the past average fuel  
mileage and the average fuel mileage  
for 90 seconds in the past, while the ve-  
hicle is driving on an ordinary road.  
: Freeway  
3
Touch [Eco Graph].  
The “Eco Graph” screen appears.  
!
32  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Eco-friendly driving functions  
05  
A comparison of the past average fuel  
mileage and the average fuel mileage  
for 90 seconds in the past, while the ve-  
hicle is driving on a freeway.  
p This is not displayed when “Eco Drive  
Level” is set to “Off”.  
= For details of the operation, refer to Chan-  
ging the eco-function setting on page  
155.  
4 Animal icons  
The number of displayed animal icons in-  
creases or decreases according to the value  
of “Eco Score”.  
Sudden start alert  
p This is not displayed when “Eco Score”  
is set to “Off” or when no route is set.  
p Even if you use the “Eco Graph” function  
immediately after you start using the navi-  
If the speed of the vehicle exceeds 25.5 mph  
(41 km/h) within 5 seconds from the time it is  
started, a message appears and a warning  
sound beeps.  
gation system for the first time,  
may be  
displayed and the function may not be avail-  
able.  
= For details, refer to Troubleshooting on page  
193.  
p The display settings can be changed.  
= For details, refer to Changing the eco-func-  
tion setting on page 155.  
= For details of the operation, refer to Chan-  
ging the eco-function setting on page  
155.  
Displaying Eco Drive Level  
guidance  
This navigation system is equipped with the  
“Eco Drive Level” function that estimates how  
well you have driven in an environmentally  
friendly way.  
The points of “Eco Drive Level” change ac-  
cording to “Eco Score” when the vehicle  
reaches the destination. When a certain num-  
ber of points is reached, the level increases  
and a message appears.  
Tree icon  
As the level increases, a tree icon changes  
from a young tree to a big tree.  
33  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
06  
Searching for and selecting a location  
The basic flow of creating  
your route  
CAUTION  
For safety reasons, these route-setting functions  
are not available while your vehicle is in motion.  
To enable these functions, you must stop in a  
safe place and put on the parking brake before  
setting your route.  
1 Park your vehicle in a safe place and apply  
the parking brake.  
j
2 Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to  
Screen switching overview on page 22.  
p Some information regarding traffic regula-  
tions depends on the time when the route  
calculation is performed. Thus, the infor-  
mation may not correspond with a certain  
traffic regulation when your vehicle actually  
passes through the location in question.  
Also, the information on the traffic regula-  
tions provided will be for a passenger vehi-  
cle, and not for a truck or other delivery  
vehicles. Always follow the actual traffic  
regulations when driving.  
j
3 Select the method of searching for your  
destination.  
j
4 Enter the information about your destina-  
tion to calculate route.  
j
5 Confirm the location on the map.  
= For details, refer to Setting a route to  
your destination on page 42.  
j
6 The navigation system calculates the route  
to your destination, and then shows the  
route on the map.  
j
7 Check and decide the route.  
= For details, refer to Setting a route to  
your destination on page 42.  
j
8 Your navigation system sets the route to  
your destination, and the map of your sur-  
roundings appears.  
j
9 Release the parking brake, drive in accor-  
dance with navigation guidance.  
34  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Searching for and selecting a location  
06  
4
Touch the key next to “State” and  
Searching for a location by  
address  
touch the desired state, province, or terri-  
tory on the list.  
The most frequently used function is “Ad-  
dress”, in which the address is specified and  
the destination is searched.  
If the location that you want to search for is in  
another state, province, or territory, this  
changes the area setting.  
You can select the method of searching for a  
location by address.  
p Once the state, province, or territory has  
been selected, you only have to change  
states, provinces, or territories when your  
destination is outside of the state, province,  
or territory you selected.  
!
!
Searching for a city name first  
Finding the location by specifying the  
house number  
5
Touch [City].  
Searching for a city name first  
p Depending on the search results, some  
steps may be skipped.  
p When you enter characters, the system will  
automatically search the database for all  
possible options. Only the characters you  
enter are active.  
p If the search candidates number reaches  
20 or less, the screen automatically  
changes to the search result screen.  
6
Enter the city name and then touch  
[OK].  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
2
Touch [Address].  
The “Select City” screen appears.  
7
Touch the desired city name.  
The “Street Name” screen appears.  
If you touch , the geographic center of the  
city appears on the map screen.  
#
3
Touch the key next to “Country” to se-  
lect the country.  
If the destination is in another country, change  
the country setting.  
p Once the country has been selected, you  
only have to change countries when your  
destination is outside of the country you se-  
lected.  
35  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
06  
Searching for and selecting a location  
8
Enter the street name and then touch  
1
2
Display the “Address Search” screen.  
[OK].  
Touch [House#].  
The “Enter House Number” screen appears.  
3
Enter the house number and then  
touch [OK].  
The “Street Selection” screen appears.  
9
Touch the street you want.  
10 Enter the house number and then  
touch [OK].  
The “Enter Street Name” screen appears.  
4
Enter the street name and then touch  
[OK].  
The “House Number Selection” screen ap-  
pears.  
11 Touch the desired house number range.  
The searched location appears on the map  
screen.  
= For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-  
ting a route to your destination on page 42.  
The “Street Selection” screen appears.  
5
Touch the street you want.  
The “Enter City Name” screen appears.  
6
Enter the city name and then touch  
[OK].  
Finding the location by  
specifying the house number  
p Depending on the search results, some  
steps may be skipped.  
p When you enter characters, the system will  
automatically search the database for all  
possible options. Only the characters you  
enter are active.  
p If the search candidates number reaches  
20 or less, the screen automatically  
changes to the search result screen.  
The “Select City” screen appears.  
7
Touch the desired city name.  
The “House Number Selection” screen ap-  
pears.  
36  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Searching for and selecting a location  
06  
If the house number you have entered is not  
Searching for POIs by preset  
categories  
You can search for POIs with a single touch  
from the preset category.  
found, a message appears. In that case, all  
house number ranges are listed after touching  
[Yes].  
#
If you touch  
, the geographic center of the  
city appears on the map screen.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
8
Touch the desired house number range.  
The searched location appears on the map  
screen.  
2
3
Touch [POI].  
= For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-  
ting a route to your destination on page  
42.  
Touch the desired category.  
Preset categories  
Setting up a route to your  
home  
If your home location is stored, the route to  
your home can be calculated by touching a  
single key.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
The “POI List” screen appears.  
Touch the POI you want.  
4
The searched location appears on the map  
screen.  
= For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-  
ting a route to your destination on page 42.  
2
Touch [Return Home].  
p If you have not registered your home loca-  
tion, a message appears. Touch [Register]  
to start registration.  
= For details, refer to Registering your  
home on page 154.  
Searching for a POI directly  
from the name of the facilities  
p If the search candidates number reaches  
20 or less, the screen automatically  
changes to the search result screen.  
Searching for Points of  
Interest (POI)  
Information about various facilities (Points Of  
Interest – POI), such as gas stations, parking  
lots or restaurants, is available. You can  
search for a POI by selecting the category (or  
entering the POI Name).  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
2
Touch [POI].  
The “POI Search” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Spell Name].  
37  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
06  
Searching for and selecting a location  
4
Enter the POI name and then touch  
3
Touch [Near Me].  
[OK].  
POIs are divided into several categories.  
The “POI List” screen appears.  
4
Touch the category you want.  
#
If you change the region to search, touch the  
The “POI List” screen appears.  
state code key and display the “State List” screen  
to change the setting.  
p If there are more detailed categories within  
the selected category, repeat this step as  
many times as necessary.  
State code key  
5
Touch the POI you want.  
The searched location appears on the map  
screen.  
= For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-  
ting a route to your destination on page 42.  
Searching for POIs around the  
destination  
p This function is available when the route is  
If the destination is in another country, touch  
[Country] to change the country setting when  
the “State List” screen is displayed.  
p Once the region has been selected, you  
only have to change it when your destina-  
tion is outside of the region you selected.  
set.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
5
Touch the POI you want.  
The searched location appears on the map  
screen.  
2
Touch [POI].  
The “POI Search” screen appears.  
#
If you touch [Sort], the order of POI can be  
sorted.  
p Current order is indicated on the upper  
3
Touch [Near Destination].  
POIs are divided into several categories.  
right of the screen.  
4
Touch the category you want.  
!
!
:
The “POI List” screen appears.  
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-  
tance from the vehicle position.  
:
p If there are more detailed categories within  
the selected category, repeat this step as  
many times as necessary.  
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.  
= For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-  
5
Touch the POI you want.  
ting a route to your destination on page 42.  
The searched location appears on the map  
screen.  
= For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-  
ting a route to your destination on page 42.  
Searching for a nearby POI  
You can search for POIs in your surroundings.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
Searching for POIs around the city  
You can search for POIs around a specified  
city.  
2
Touch [POI].  
The “POI Search” screen appears.  
38  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Searching for and selecting a location  
06  
= For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-  
p If the search candidates number reaches  
20 or less, the screen automatically  
changes to the search result screen.  
ting a route to your destination on page  
42.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
Selecting destination from  
“Favorites”  
Storing locations you visit frequently saves  
time and effort.  
2
Touch [POI].  
The “POI Search” screen appears.  
Selecting an item from the list provides an  
easy way to specify the position.  
p This function is not available if no locations  
have been registered in “Favorites”.  
= For details, refer to Storing favorite locations  
on page 47.  
3
Touch [Around City].  
4
Enter the city name and then touch  
[OK].  
The “Select City” screen appears.  
#
state code key and display the “State List” screen  
to change the setting.  
If you change the region to search, touch the  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
State code key  
2
3
Touch [Favorites].  
Touch the entry you want.  
If the destination is in another country, touch  
[Country] to change the country setting when  
the “State List” screen is displayed.  
p Once the region has been selected, you  
only have to change it when your destina-  
tion is outside of the region you selected.  
The searched location appears on the map  
screen.  
= For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-  
ting a route to your destination on page  
42.  
5
Touch the desired city name.  
The “POI List” screen appears.  
If you touch , the geographic center of the  
city appears on the map screen.  
#
6
Touch the category you want.  
POIs are divided into several categories.  
7
Touch the POI you want.  
The searched location appears on the map  
screen.  
39  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
06  
Searching for and selecting a location  
p “History” can store up to 100 locations. If  
Searching for POIs by using  
the data on the SD memory  
card  
Creating a customized POI is possible by  
using the utility program AVIC FEEDS which is  
available separately, on your PC. (AVIC FEEDS  
will be available on our website.) Storing the  
customized POI properly and inserting the SD  
memory card enables the system to use the  
data for searches.  
the entries reach the maximum, the new  
entry overwrites the oldest one.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
2
3
Touch [History].  
Touch the entry you want.  
1
Store the item into the SD memory card  
by using the AVIC FEEDS.  
2
Insert an SD memory card into the SD  
card slot.  
= For details of the operation, refer to Insert-  
ing and ejecting an SD memory card on  
page 16.  
The searched location appears on the map  
screen.  
3
4
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
= For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-  
ting a route to your destination on page  
42.  
Touch [AVIC FEEDS].  
The “Select POI” screen appears.  
Searching for a location by  
coordinates  
Entering a latitude and longitude pinpoints  
the location.  
5
Touch the item you want.  
6
Touch the POI you want.  
The searched location appears on the map  
screen.  
1
2
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
= For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-  
ting a route to your destination on page  
42.  
Touch [Coordinates].  
Selecting a location you  
searched for recently  
The places that you have set as destination or  
waypoint in the past are automatically stored  
in “History”.  
p If no location is stored in Destination His-  
tory, you cannot select [History]. (If you  
perform a route calculation, you can select  
[History].)  
40  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Searching for and selecting a location  
06  
3
Touch [East] or [West], and then enter  
the longitude.  
To enter W 50°1’2.5” for example, touch  
[West], [0], [5], [0], [0], [1], [0], [2], and [5].  
4
Touch [North] or [South], and then  
enter the latitude.  
To enter N 5°1’2.5” for example, touch [North],  
[0], [5], [0], [1], [0], [2], and [5].  
5
Touch [OK].  
The searched location appears on the map  
screen.  
= For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-  
ting a route to your destination on the next  
page.  
41  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
07  
After the location is decided  
2 Distance to the destination  
Setting a route to your  
destination  
3 Estimated fuel cost to your destination  
= For details, refer to Inputting the fuel  
consumption information for calculating  
the fuel cost on page 152.  
4 Route calculation condition  
If you touch , the message confirming  
whether to cancel the calculated route appears.  
If you touch [Yes], the calculated route is can-  
celed and the map screen appears.  
1
Search for a location.  
= For details, refer to Chapter 6.  
After searching for the destination, the Loca-  
tion confirmation screen appears.  
#
2
Touch [OK].  
Location confirmation screen  
1
2
3
4
The destination is set, and then route calcula-  
tion starts.  
When the route calculation is completed,  
Route confirmation screen appears.  
1 Multiple Route  
= For details, refer to Displaying multiple  
routes on this page.  
2 Options  
= For details, refer to Modifying the route  
calculation conditions on the next page.  
3 Profile  
= For details, refer to Checking the current  
itinerary on page 44.  
4 Waypoints  
#
If you press the MODE button during route  
calculation, the calculation is canceled and the  
map screen appears.  
#
If you touch [Scroll], the map display is chan-  
ged to the scroll mode. In the scroll mode, you  
can display the location more precisely to register  
it, or make settings.  
= For details, refer to Editing waypoints on  
page 45.  
#
If you touch [Waypoint], the location is added  
to the “Waypoints List” screen.  
p If a destination is not set, [Waypoint] is not  
available.  
Displaying multiple routes  
You can select a desired route from multiple  
route options. Calculated routes are shown in  
different colors.  
3
Touch [OK].  
Route confirmation screen  
p If you set waypoints, you cannot display  
multiple routes.  
1
Touch [Multiple Route] on the Route  
confirmation screen.  
Multiple route options appear.  
2
Touch  
to  
.
Another route is displayed.  
1
2
3
4
3
Touch [OK].  
Sets the displayed route as your route, and  
starts the route guidance.  
Route confirmation screen appears.  
1 Travel time to your destination  
42  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Checking and modifying the current route  
08  
1
Display the “Route Overview” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the route  
Displaying the route overview  
1
Press the HOME button to display the  
overview on this page.  
“Top Menu” screen.  
2
3
Touch [Options].  
2
Touch [Destination].  
The “Destination Menu” screen appears.  
Touch the desired items to change the  
route calculation conditions and then  
touch [OK].  
3 Touch [Route Overview].  
The route is recalculated, and the Route con-  
firmation screen appears.  
1
2
3
Items that users can operate  
Settings marked with an asterisk (*) show that  
these are default or factory settings.  
Route Condition  
This setting controls how the route should be  
calculated by taking into account the time, dis-  
tance or main road.  
Determines which condition takes priority for  
route calculation.  
1 Options  
= For details, refer to Modifying the route  
calculation conditions on this page.  
2 Profile  
= For details, refer to Checking the current  
itinerary on the next page.  
3 Waypoints  
= For details, refer to Editing waypoints on  
page 45.  
p “Route Overview” is active only when the  
route is set.  
Fast*:  
Calculates a route with the shortest travel time  
to your destination as a priority.  
Short:  
Calculates a route with the shortest distance  
to your destination as a priority.  
Main Road:  
Calculates a route that passes major arterial  
roads as a priority.  
4
Touch [OK].  
Avoid Toll Road  
This setting controls whether toll roads (in-  
cluding toll areas) should be taken into ac-  
count.  
Modifying the route  
calculation conditions  
Off*:  
You can modify the conditions for route calcu-  
lation and recalculate the current route.  
43  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
08  
Checking and modifying the current route  
Calculates a route that may include toll roads  
(including toll areas).  
CAUTION  
If the time difference is not set correctly, the navi-  
gation system cannot consider traffic regulations  
correctly. Set the time difference correctly.  
= For details, refer to Setting the time difference  
on page 163.  
On:  
Calculates a route that avoids toll roads (in-  
cluding toll areas).  
p The system may calculate a route that in-  
cludes toll roads even if “On” is selected.  
Learning Route  
Avoid Ferry  
The system learns the travel history of your ve-  
hicle for each road.  
This setting controls whether or not the travel  
history should be taken into account.  
On*:  
This setting controls whether ferry crossings  
should be taken into account.  
Off*:  
Calculates a route that may include ferries.  
On:  
Calculates a route that avoids ferries.  
p The system may calculate a route that in-  
cludes ferries even if “On” is selected.  
Calculates a route with the travel history taken  
into account.  
Off:  
Calculates a route without the travel history  
taken into account.  
Avoid Freeway  
This setting controls whether freeways may be  
included in the route calculation.  
Off*:  
Clear:  
Clears the current travel history.  
Calculates a route that may include freeways.  
On:  
Calculates a route that avoids freeways.  
p The system may calculate a route that in-  
cludes freeways even if “On” is selected.  
Checking the current itinerary  
You can check the route details.  
1
Display the “Route Overview” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the route  
overview on the previous page.  
Time restrictions  
This setting controls whether streets or  
bridges that have traffic restrictions during a  
certain time should be taken into account.  
p If you want to set your route to avoid raised  
draw bridges, select “On”.  
2
Touch [Profile].  
The “Route Profile” screen appears.  
On*:  
Calculates a route while avoiding streets or  
bridges with traffic restrictions during a cer-  
tain time.  
Off:  
Calculates a route while ignoring traffic re-  
strictions.  
p The system may calculate a route that in-  
cludes streets or bridges that are subject to  
traffic restrictions during a certain time  
even if “On” is selected.  
44  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Checking and modifying the current route  
08  
5
Touch [OK].  
Editing waypoints  
You can edit waypoints (locations you want to  
visit on the way to your destination) and recal-  
culate the route so that it passes through  
these locations.  
Adding a waypoint  
Up to 5 waypoints can be set, and waypoints  
and final destination can be sorted automati-  
cally or manually.  
6
Touch [OK] on the “Waypoints List”  
screen.  
1
Display the “Route Overview” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the route  
overview on page 43.  
2
Touch [Waypoints].  
The “Waypoints List” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Add].  
The route is recalculated, and the Route con-  
firmation screen appears.  
p If you set waypoints, you cannot display  
multiple routes.  
Deleting a waypoint  
You can delete waypoints from the route and  
then recalculate the route. (You can delete  
successive waypoints.)  
The “Select Search method” screen appears.  
4
Search for a location.  
1
Display the “Route Overview” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the route  
overview on page 43.  
2
Touch [Waypoints].  
The “Waypoints List” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Delete] next to the waypoint  
that you want to delete.  
The touched waypoint will be deleted from the  
list.  
= For details, refer to Chapter 6.  
4
Touch [OK] on the “Waypoints List”  
screen.  
The route is recalculated, and the Route con-  
firmation screen appears.  
5
Touch [OK].  
The map of the current position appears.  
45  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
08  
Checking and modifying the current route  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
Sorting waypoints  
You can sort waypoints and recalculate the  
route.  
switching overview on page 22.  
p You cannot sort waypoints that you have al-  
ready passed.  
2
Touch [Cancel Route].  
A message confirming the cancellation of the  
current route appears.  
1
Display the “Route Overview” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the route  
overview on page 43.  
3
Touch [Yes].  
2
Touch [Waypoints].  
The “Waypoints List” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Sort].  
The “Sort Waypoints” screen appears.  
4
Touch the waypoint or destination.  
The current route is deleted, and a map of  
your surroundings reappears.  
#
If you touch [Skip], the next waypoint is  
skipped and a new route is calculated. All other  
waypoints remain.  
When the route calculation is completed, Route  
confirmation screen appears.  
p [Skip] is available only when a waypoint is  
set.  
Put them in the desired order.  
If you touch [Automatic], the destination and  
waypoints are sorted in the order of a nearest  
waypoint from the current location in the direct  
antenna path.  
#
#
If you touch [No], the previous screen returns  
without deleting the route.  
#
If you touch [Clear], waypoint sort is canceled.  
5
Touch [OK].  
The “Waypoints List” screen appears.  
6
Touch [OK] on the “Waypoints List”  
screen.  
The route is recalculated, and the Route con-  
firmation screen appears.  
7
Touch [OK].  
The map of the current position appears.  
Canceling the route guidance  
If you no longer need to travel to your destina-  
tion, follow the steps below to cancel the route  
guidance.  
46  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Registering and editing locations  
09  
1
Touch and drag the screen to scroll the  
Storing favorite locations  
map to the position that you want to regis-  
ter.  
Storing your favorite locations as “Favorites”  
provides you with the opportunity to save the  
time and effort of re-entering this information.  
Stored items can be made available on “Fa-  
vorites” later.  
Registering a location by  
“Favorites”  
“Favorites” can store up to 400 locations.  
Home location is counted as one of the items  
in “Favorites”.  
2
Touch  
to display the “Quick Access”  
menu.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
3
Touch  
.
The location is registered, and then the “Edit  
Favorite” screen appears.  
= For details, refer to Editing the favorite loca-  
tion in the list on this page.  
2
Touch [Favorites].  
The “Favorites” screen appears.  
4
Touch [OK].  
3
Touch [Add].  
The registration is complete.  
The “Select Search method” screen appears.  
4
Search for a location.  
= For details about the search methods, refer  
to Chapter 6.  
Editing registered locations  
Editing the favorite location in  
the list  
5
When the map of the location you  
want to register is displayed, touch [OK].  
The location is registered, and then the “Edit  
Favorite” screen appears.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
= For details, refer to Editing the favorite loca-  
tion in the list on this page.  
2
Touch [Favorites].  
6
Touch [OK].  
The “Favorites” screen appears.  
The registration is complete.  
3
Touch next to the location that you  
want to edit.  
The “Edit Favorite” screen appears.  
Registering a location by scroll  
mode  
p This function is available when “Registra-  
tion” is set in the “Quick Access” menu.  
= For details, refer to Selecting the “Quick  
Access” menu on page 162.  
4
Touch the item that you want to  
change the setting.  
1
2
3
4
47  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
09  
Registering and editing locations  
1 Name  
You can enter the desired name.  
4
Touch the item that you want to  
change the setting.  
p Up to 17 characters can be input for the  
name.  
2 Phone#  
1
2
You can edit the registered phone number.  
To dial the number, touch [Call].  
The maximum digits you can enter for the  
phone number is 15.  
3 Icon  
You can change the symbol displayed on  
the map and “Favorites”.  
4 Modify Location  
1 Phone#  
To dial the number, touch [Call].  
2 Modify Location  
You can change the registered location by  
scrolling the map.  
p For home information, [Name] and [Icon]  
are not editable.  
You can change the registered location by  
scrolling the map.  
5
Touch [OK].  
The registration is complete.  
5
Touch [OK].  
Editing your home  
When you have already registered your home,  
The registration is complete.  
you can edit the information of your home.  
Sorting the favorite locations  
in the list  
1
2
3
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
Touch [Favorites].  
p Home location is displayed on the top of  
the list.  
2
Touch [Favorites].  
The “Favorites” screen appears.  
Touch  
next to the home location.  
3
Touch [Sort].  
Each time you touch [Sort] changes the sort  
order.  
p Current order is indicated on the upper  
right of the screen.  
!
!
!
:
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-  
tance from the vehicle position.  
:
Sorts the items in the list in order of the re-  
cently used items.  
The “Edit Favorite” screen appears.  
:
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.  
48  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Registering and editing locations  
09  
Deleting a favorite location  
from the list  
Exporting and importing  
favorite locations  
Exporting favorite locations  
You can export the “Favorites” data to an SD  
memory card for editing by using the utility  
program AVIC FEEDS which is available sepa-  
rately, on your PC.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
2
Touch [Favorites].  
The “Favorites” screen appears.  
p If there is previous data in the SD memory  
card, the data is overwritten with new data.  
3
4
Touch [Delete].  
Select the location you want to delete.  
1
Insert an SD memory card into the SD  
card slot.  
= For details of the operation, refer to Insert-  
ing and ejecting an SD memory card on  
page 16.  
2
3
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
Touch [Favorites].  
A check mark appears next to the selected lo-  
cation.  
The “Favorites” screen appears.  
#
If you touch [All], you can select all entries. If  
4
Touch  
.
you want to deselect all entries, touch [None].  
Data export starts.  
After the data is exported, the completion mes-  
sage appears.  
5
Touch [Delete].  
A message will appear asking you to confirm  
the deletion.  
5
Touch [OK].  
The “Favorites” screen appears.  
6
Touch [Yes].  
Importing favorite locations  
You can import the locations that you have edi-  
ted on the utility program AVIC FEEDS to “Fa-  
vorites”.  
p When a location that is already registered  
in “Favorites” is imported, the location is  
overwritten.  
1
Store the item into the SD memory card  
The data you selected is deleted.  
If you touch [No], the deletion is canceled.  
by using the AVIC FEEDS.  
#
49  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
09  
Registering and editing locations  
2
Insert an SD memory card into the SD  
4
Select the location you want to delete.  
card slot.  
= For details of the operation, refer to Insert-  
ing and ejecting an SD memory card on  
page 16.  
3
4
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
Touch [Favorites].  
The “Favorites” screen appears.  
A check mark appears next to the selected lo-  
cation.  
5
Touch  
.
#
If you touch [All], you can select all entries. If  
you want to deselect all entries, touch [None].  
The message confirming whether to replace  
the stored items appears.  
5
Touch [Delete].  
6
Touch [Yes].  
A message will appear asking you to confirm  
the deletion.  
Data import starts.  
After importing the data is finished, the “Fa-  
vorites” screen appears.  
6
Touch [Yes].  
The data you selected is deleted.  
If you touch [No], the deletion is canceled.  
#
Deleting the destination  
history from the list  
Items in “History” can be deleted. All entries  
in “History” can be deleted at once.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
2
Touch [History].  
The “Destination History List” screen ap-  
pears.  
3
Touch [Delete].  
The “Delete from History” screen appears.  
50  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using traffic information  
10  
p Please note that use of the traffic informa-  
tion function on AVIC-X930BT or AVIC-  
X9310BT will require that a separately sold  
Traffic tuner (ND-TMC10) be connected.  
You can check real-time traffic information  
transmitted by the Traffic Management Chan-  
nel (TMC) of the receive data services (RDS)  
on the screen. Such traffic information is up-  
dated periodically. When the navigation sys-  
tem receives updated traffic information, the  
navigation system will overlay the traffic infor-  
mation on your map and also display detailed  
text information when available. When you are  
traveling along a route and there is traffic in-  
formation on your current route, the system  
will detect it and ask you if you would like to  
be rerouted, or suggest another route automa-  
tically.  
Checking all traffic  
information  
Traffic information except traffic flow informa-  
tion is listed on screen.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
2
Touch [Traffic].  
The “Traffic Menu” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Traffic Events].  
The “Traffic Event List” screen appears.  
The list with received traffic information is  
shown.  
4
Select an incident you want to view in  
detail.  
p When used in North America, this product  
receives traffic information provided by  
Clear Channel Broadcasting, Inc.  
© Clear Channel Broadcasting, Inc.  
p The system acquires the traffic information  
up to 100 miles in radius from the vehicle  
position. (If there is a lot of traffic informa-  
tion around your vehicle, the radius will be  
shorter than 100 miles.)  
p The navigation system provides the follow-  
ing functions by using the information  
from RDS-TMC service:  
The details of the selected incident are dis-  
played.  
p Touching an incident you want to see allows  
you to view the detailed information of the  
incident. If the information cannot be dis-  
played on one screen, touch or to view  
the remaining information.  
!
!
!
Displaying a list of traffic information  
Displaying traffic information on a map  
Suggesting a route to avoid traffic con-  
gestion by using traffic information  
p The term “traffic congestion” in this section  
indicates the following types of traffic infor-  
mation: stop and go, stopped traffic,  
closed/blocked roads. This information is  
always taken into consideration when  
checking your route, and the information  
related with these events cannot be turned  
off. If you select other traffic information in  
[Traffic Settings], the information can be  
displayed in a list or on a map.  
p Touching  
allows you to check the loca-  
tion on a map. (Traffic information without  
positional information cannot be checked  
on a map.)  
#
If you touch [Sort], the traffic information can  
be sorted.  
Each time you touch the key changes the setting.  
!
:
You can sort the traffic information by dis-  
tance from your current position.  
When you touch [Traffic Events], the list  
displayed will be sorted according to the lin-  
ear distance from the vehicle position to the  
traffic information.  
= For details, refer to Selecting traffic infor-  
mation to display on page 55.  
51  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
10  
Using traffic information  
When you touch [Traffic on Route], the list  
displayed will be sorted according to the  
distance from the vehicle position to the  
traffic information.  
p A line is displayed only when the map scale  
is 2.5 miles (5 km) or lower.  
p Icon appears only when the scale on the  
map is 10 miles (20 km) or lower. If the  
scale is changed, the icons are resized ac-  
cording to the selected scale.  
!
!
:
You can sort the traffic information in alpha-  
betical order.  
Traffic event icon  
:
You can sort the traffic information accord-  
ing to the incident.  
The list will be sorted in the order of closed/  
blocked roads, traffic congestion, acci-  
dents, road works and others.  
Current order is indicated on the upper right of  
the screen.  
#
If you touch [Refresh] while new traffic infor-  
mation is received, current information is chan-  
ged and old information is removed. The traffic  
information list is updated to reflect the new si-  
tuation.  
!
!
!
!
with yellow line:  
Stop-and-go traffic  
with red line:  
Stopped traffic  
5
Touch  
.
with black line:  
Closed/blocked roads  
etc.:  
The previous screen returns.  
Accidents, constructions, etc.  
Checking traffic  
information on the route  
All traffic information on the current route is  
displayed on screen in a list.  
p For meanings of other icons, check them  
the “Traffic Type Settings” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Select-  
ing traffic information to display on page  
55.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
Viewing the traffic flow  
All traffic flow information is displayed on  
screen in a list.  
2
Touch [Traffic].  
The “Traffic Menu” screen appears.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
3
Touch [Traffic on Route].  
The “Traffic on Route” screen appears.  
The method for checking the content dis-  
played on the screen is the same as “Traffic  
Event List” screen.  
2
Touch [Traffic].  
The “Traffic Menu” screen appears.  
= For details, refer to Checking all traffic infor-  
mation on the previous page.  
3
Touch [Traffic Flow].  
A list with traffic flow information that has  
been received is shown. The list is sorted by  
distance from your current position.  
How to read traffic  
information on the map  
Places (street names) where incidents have  
occurred are displayed on the list.  
The traffic event information displayed on the  
map is as follows.  
52  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using traffic information  
10  
!
!
Yellow: average speed in this area is be-  
tween 15 mph to 45 mph (24 km/h to 72 km/  
h)  
Green: average speed in this area is faster  
than 45 mph (72 km/h) (An icon without a  
line will be displayed)  
4
Select an incident you want to view in  
detail.  
The details of the selected incident are dis-  
played.  
p Touching an incident you want to see allows  
you to view the detailed information of the  
incident. If the information cannot be dis-  
played on one screen, touch or to view  
the remaining information.  
Setting an alternative route  
to avoid traffic congestion  
The navigation system checks at regular inter-  
vals whether or not there is the traffic informa-  
tion on your route. If the navigation system  
detects any traffic congestion on your current  
route, the system tries to find a better route in  
the background.  
p The following types of traffic incidents on  
the route will be checked: stop and go,  
stopped traffic and closed/blocked roads  
except for closed freeway exits/entrances.  
p Touching  
allows you to check the loca-  
tion on a map. (Traffic information without  
positional information cannot be checked  
on a map.)  
#
If you touch [Sort], the traffic information can  
be sorted.  
Each time you touch the key changes the setting.  
!
!
!
:
You can sort the traffic information by the  
linear distance from your current position.  
:
You can sort the traffic information in alpha-  
betical order.  
:
You can sort the traffic information by the  
average speed.  
The list will be sorted in the order of closed/  
blocked roads, traffic congestion, acci-  
dents, road works and others.  
Current order is indicated on the upper right of  
the screen.  
#
If you touch [Refresh] while new traffic infor-  
mation is received, current information is chan-  
ged and old information is removed. The traffic  
information list is updated to reflect the new si-  
tuation.  
#
Touch  
.
The traffic event information displayed on the  
map is as follows.  
Traffic flow icon and line  
!
Red: average speed in this area is slower  
than 15 mph (24 km/h)  
53  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
10  
Using traffic information  
gation map screen if there is any traffic infor-  
mation on your route.  
p The notification icon is not available if your  
vehicle deviates from the route.  
Checking for traffic congestion  
automatically  
If there is information about traffic congestion  
on your current route and if an alternative  
route can be found, the navigation system will  
recommend a new alternative route automati-  
cally. In such a case, the following screen will  
appear.  
1
Set [Show Traffic Incident] to “View”.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the traffic no-  
tification icon on page 157.  
2
Display the map screen.  
The icon appears when the system acquires  
traffic information on the current route.  
3
Touch the icon while the icon is dis-  
played.  
Notification icon  
1
2
1 Difference in distance and travel time between  
the existing route and new route.  
2 Distance from the current position of your ve-  
hicle to the point of entry into the new route.  
p There is no action if the system cannot find  
any traffic congestion information on your  
route or the system cannot find an alterna-  
tive.  
Traffic information on the current route is dis-  
played on the map screen.  
4
Touch [Diversion] to search for an alter-  
1
Touch [New].  
native route.  
The recommended route is displayed on the  
screen.  
#
If you touch [Current] while the recom-  
mended route is displayed, the screen switches  
to the current route display.  
2
Touch [OK].  
The displayed route is set.  
p When no selection is made, the screen re-  
turns to the previous screen.  
After touching [Diversion], the route is recal-  
culated taking all traffic congestion on your  
current route into account.  
Checking traffic information  
manually  
p [Diversion] will be available only when the  
system can find traffic congestion.  
Touching the notification icon on the map  
screen allows you to check traffic information  
on your route while the icon is displayed. The  
notification icon is only displayed on the navi-  
54  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using traffic information  
10  
p Notification icon shows the nearest traffic  
information on the route. However, if you  
touch [Diversion], the route is recalculated  
by taking into account not only this infor-  
mation, but also all traffic congestion infor-  
mation on the route.  
#
If you touch [All], you can select all entries. If  
you want to deselect all entries, touch [None].  
6
Touch [OK].  
= For details, refer to Checking for traffic con-  
gestion automatically on the previous page.  
If you touch [List], the “Traffic on Route”  
#
screen appears.  
If you touch , the message disappears and  
#
the map screen returns.  
The selected traffic information icon is added  
to the screen.  
Selecting traffic  
information to display  
7
Touch [OK].  
There are different types of traffic information  
that can be received via the RDS-TMC service,  
and you can select which types will be incor-  
porated and displayed on your navigation sys-  
tem.  
Selecting preferred RDS-TMC  
service provider manually  
A default preferred TMC service provider for  
each country has been set. The navigation sys-  
tem tunes to the radio station with good recep-  
tion among the preferred RDS-TMC service  
providers. If you want to set another preferred  
RDS-TMC service provider, you can manually  
select one from available RDS-TMC service  
providers.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
2
Touch [Traffic].  
The “Traffic Menu” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Traffic Settings].  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
The “Traffic Settings” screen appears.  
4
Touch [Displayed Traffic Info].  
2
Touch [Traffic].  
The “Traffic Menu” screen appears.  
3
Touch [TMC Provider Selection].  
4
Touch the desired service provider on  
the list.  
After touching a service provider, the system  
starts tuning to the selected RDS-TMC service  
provider. When the tuning is successful, the  
system returns to the map display.  
The “Traffic Type Settings” screen appears.  
Touch the traffic information item to  
5
display.  
A check mark appears next to the selected  
traffic information.  
55  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
11  
Registering and connecting a Bluetooth device  
If your devices feature Bluetooth® technology,  
this navigation system can be connected to  
your devices wirelessly. This section describes  
how to set up a Bluetooth connection.  
nect it for the first time. A total of 5 devices  
can be registered. Three registration methods  
are available:  
!
!
!
Searching for nearby Bluetooth devices  
Pairing from your Bluetooth devices  
Searching for a specified Bluetooth device  
For details about the connectivity with the de-  
vices featuring Bluetooth wireless technology,  
refer to the information on our website.  
p If you try to register more than 5 devices,  
the system will ask you to select one of the  
registered devices to delete.  
= For details, refer to Deleting a registered  
device on page 59.  
Preparing communication  
devices  
This navigation system has a built-in function  
to use devices featuring Bluetooth wireless  
technology.  
Searching for nearby Bluetooth  
devices  
The system searches for available Bluetooth  
devices near the navigation system, displays  
them in a list, and registers them for connec-  
tion.  
= For details, refer to Notes for hands-free  
phoning on page 69.  
You can register and use devices that feature  
the following profiles with this navigation sys-  
tem.  
1
Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-  
nology on your devices.  
For some Bluetooth devices, no specific-action  
is necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless  
technology. For details, refer to the instruction  
manual of your devices.  
!
!
HFP (Hands Free Profile)  
A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Pro-  
file)  
p If the registered device features both HFP  
and A2DP, the hands-free connection is  
made and then the Bluetooth audio con-  
nection is made.  
2
Display the “Settings Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
If the registered device features either pro-  
file, the corresponding connection is made.  
p When the navigation system is turned off,  
the Bluetooth connection is also discon-  
nected. When the system restarts, the sys-  
tem automatically attempts to reconnect  
the previously-connected device. Even  
when the connection is severed for some  
reason, the system automatically recon-  
nects the specified device (except when the  
connection is severed due to device oper-  
ation).  
3
Touch [Bluetooth Settings].  
The “Bluetooth Settings” screen appears.  
4
Touch [Registration].  
The “Nearby Device List” screen appears.  
The system searches for Bluetooth devices  
waiting for the connection and displays them  
in the list if a device is found.  
p Up to 30 devices will be listed in the order  
that the devices are found.  
Registering your Bluetooth  
devices  
You need to register your devices featuring  
Bluetooth wireless technology when you con-  
56  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Registering and connecting a Bluetooth device  
11  
#
If you touch [Search Again], the system starts  
5
Wait until your Bluetooth device ap-  
searching for Bluetooth devices waiting for con-  
nection, and displays them in the list format  
when any devices are detected.  
pears in the list.  
7
Enter the password (the default pass-  
word is “1111”) using the Bluetooth de-  
vice.  
Enter the password while the message “Please  
follow the instructions on your mobile  
phone.” appears.  
The device is registered in the navigation sys-  
tem.  
After the device is successfully registered, the  
Bluetooth connection is established from the  
navigation system.  
Pairing from your Bluetooth  
devices  
You can register the Bluetooth device by set-  
ting the navigation system to standby mode  
and requesting connection from the Bluetooth  
device.  
p If you cannot find the Bluetooth device that  
you want to connect, check that the device  
is waiting for the Bluetooth wireless tech-  
nology connection.  
1
Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-  
nology on your devices.  
6
Touch the Bluetooth device name you  
For some Bluetooth devices, no specific-action  
is necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless  
technology. For details, refer to the instruction  
manual of your devices.  
want to register.  
2
Display the “Settings Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
3
Touch [Bluetooth Settings].  
The “Bluetooth Settings” screen appears.  
4
Touch [Registration].  
The “Nearby Device List” screen appears.  
5
Touch [Register from mobile phone].  
The navigation system waits for a Bluetooth  
wireless technology connection.  
57  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
11  
Registering and connecting a Bluetooth device  
6
Touch the Bluetooth device name to be  
connected.  
6
Register the navigation system on your  
Bluetooth device.  
If your device asks you to enter a password,  
enter the password of the navigation system.  
When the device is successfully registered,  
the connection settings are made from the de-  
vice.  
The system searches for Bluetooth devices  
waiting for the connection and displays them  
in the list if a device is found.  
p If you cannot find the desired device name  
on the list, touch [Other phones] to search  
the devices available nearby.  
p If registration fails, repeat the procedure  
from the beginning.  
7
Wait until your Bluetooth device ap-  
pears in the list.  
Searching for a specified  
Bluetooth device  
If you cannot connect your Bluetooth device  
using the nearby device search and if your  
Bluetooth device is found in the list, try the fol-  
lowing method.  
1
Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-  
nology on your devices.  
For some Bluetooth devices, no specific-action  
is necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless  
technology. For details, refer to the instruction  
manual of your devices.  
2
Display the “Settings Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
3
Touch [Bluetooth Settings].  
The “Bluetooth Settings” screen appears.  
p If you cannot find the Bluetooth device that  
you want to connect, check that the device  
is waiting for the Bluetooth wireless tech-  
nology connection.  
4
Touch [Registration].  
The “Nearby Device List” screen appears.  
5
Touch [Select specific devices].  
The “Select specific devices” screen appears.  
58  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Registering and connecting a Bluetooth device  
11  
8
Touch the Bluetooth device name you  
1
Display the “Settings Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
want to register.  
2
Touch [Bluetooth Settings].  
The “Bluetooth Settings” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Registration].  
A message prompting you to delete a regis-  
tered device appears.  
4
Touch [OK].  
The “Delete from Connection List” screen  
appears.  
#
If you touch [Search Again], the system starts  
searching for Bluetooth devices waiting for con-  
nection, and displays them in the list format  
when any devices are detected.  
5
Touch the Bluetooth device name that  
you want to delete.  
9
Enter the password (the default pass-  
word is “1111”) using the Bluetooth de-  
vice.  
Enter the password while the message “Please  
follow the instructions on your mobile  
phone.” appears.  
The device is registered in the navigation sys-  
tem.  
After the device is successfully registered, the  
Bluetooth connection is established from the  
navigation system.  
The device is deleted.  
Connecting a registered  
Bluetooth device manually  
Deleting a registered device  
The navigation system automatically connects  
the Bluetooth device selected as the target of  
connection. However, connect the Bluetooth  
device manually in the following cases:  
When you have already registered 5 Bluetooth  
devices and you want to add another one, you  
must first delete one of the registered devices.  
p If a registered phone is deleted, all the  
phone book entries and call history lists  
that correspond to the phone will be also  
cleared.  
!
Two or more Bluetooth devices are regis-  
tered, and you want to manually select the  
device to be used.  
!
You want to reconnect a disconnected  
Bluetooth device.  
59  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
11  
Registering and connecting a Bluetooth device  
Connects the device as the hands-free  
phone and the Bluetooth audio player.  
!
Connection cannot be established automa-  
tically for some reason.  
!
!
Audio:  
If you start connection manually, carry out the  
following procedure. You can also connect the  
Bluetooth device by having the navigation sys-  
tem detect it automatically.  
Connects the device as Bluetooth audio  
player.  
Handsfree:  
Connects the device as the hands-free  
phone.  
Connection starts.  
When a connection is successfully estab-  
lished, a connection complete message ap-  
pears and the map screen returns by touching  
[OK].  
1
Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-  
nology on your devices.  
For some Bluetooth devices, no specific-action  
is necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless  
technology. For details, refer to the instruction  
manual of your devices.  
p To cancel the connection to your device,  
2
Display the “Settings Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
touch [Cancel].  
p If connection fails, check whether your de-  
vice is waiting for a connection and then  
retry.  
3
Touch [Bluetooth Settings].  
The “Bluetooth Settings” screen appears.  
4
Touch [Connection].  
Setting for priority connecting  
The selected device is set for priority connect-  
ing.  
And one of the following icons is indicated  
next to the device name.  
The “Connection List” screen appears.  
5
Touch the name of the device that you  
want to connect.  
!
:
Appears when the device is registered so  
that it will be preferentially paired with both  
the hands-free and Bluetooth audio con-  
nection.  
!
!
:
Appears when the device is registered so  
that it can be preferentially paired with the  
hands-free connection.  
The “Select Profile” screen appears.  
:
6
Touch the profile that you want to con-  
Appears when the device is registered so  
that it will be preferentially paired with the  
Bluetooth audio connection.  
nect.  
You can select the following profiles:  
!
Handsfree and Audio:  
60  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using hands-free phoning  
12  
3 Strength of the Bluetooth connection be-  
tween the navigation system and the device  
4 Reception status of the cellular phone  
5 Battery status of the cellular phone  
CAUTION  
For your safety, avoid talking on the phone as  
much as possible while driving.  
If your cellular phone features Bluetooth tech-  
nology, this navigation system can be con-  
nected to your cellular phone wirelessly. Using  
this hands-free function, you can operate the  
navigation system to make or receive phone  
calls. You can also transfer the phone book  
data stored in your cellular phone to the navi-  
gation system. This section describes how to  
set up a Bluetooth connection and how to op-  
erate a cellular phone featuring Bluetooth  
technology on the navigation system.  
Making a phone call  
You can make a phone call in many different  
ways.  
Direct dialing  
1
Display the “Phone Menu” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the phone  
menu on this page.  
2
Touch [Dial Pad].  
For details about the connectivity with the de-  
vices featuring Bluetooth wireless technology,  
refer to the information on our website.  
The “Dial Input” screen appears.  
3
Touch the number keys to enter the  
phone number.  
Displaying the phone menu  
Use the “Phone Menu” if you connect the cel-  
lular phone to the navigation system for utiliza-  
tion.  
= For details, refer to Chapter 11.  
1
Press the HOME button to display the  
“Top Menu” screen.  
The phone number that was input is dis-  
played.  
2
Touch [Phone].  
When the input is complete, [OK] becomes  
active.  
The “Phone Menu” screen appears.  
#
If you touch , the entered number is deleted  
1
2
3 45  
one digit at a time from the end of the number.  
Press and hold to delete all digits.  
#
If you touch , the previous screen returns.  
4
Touch [OK] to make a call.  
p To cancel the call after the system starts  
dialing, touch  
.
5
Touch to end the call.  
1 Name of connected cellular phone  
2 Network name of the cellular phone com-  
pany  
61  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
12  
Using hands-free phoning  
Making a call home easily  
3
Touch alphabet tabs.  
You can call home without taking the time to  
enter the phone number if the phone number  
has been registered.  
1
Display the “Phone Menu” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the phone  
menu on the previous page.  
2
Touch [Call Home].  
Dialing home starts.  
The screen jumps to the top of the page dis-  
playing the entries that start with the selected  
letter or number.  
p If you have not registered your home num-  
ber, a message appears. Touch [Register]  
to start registration.  
p Touching [#ABCDE] displays all entries that  
= For details, refer to Registering your  
home on page 154.  
start with symbols or numbers.  
p Touching [Others] displays the page includ-  
ing entries that are not assigned to any of  
the other tabs.  
Calling a number in the phone  
book  
You can select and call a contact from the  
phone book entries transferred to the naviga-  
tion system.  
4
Touch the desired name on the list.  
The “Contacts Type Selection” screen ap-  
pears.  
5
Touch the desired entry on the list to  
p Before using this function, you need to  
transfer the phone book entries stored in  
your cellular phone to the navigation sys-  
tem.  
make a call.  
6
Touch  
to end the call.  
= For details, refer to Transferring the phone  
Calling a number by searching by name  
book on page 65.  
1
2
Display the “Phone Menu” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the phone  
menu on the previous page.  
Searching for a contact to call on the  
alphabet tabs  
Touch [Contacts].  
1
Display the “Phone Menu” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the phone  
menu on the previous page.  
The “Contacts List” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Search].  
The “Contacts Name Search” screen appears.  
You can search by the names registered in the  
“Contacts List” screen.  
2
Touch [Contacts].  
The “Contacts List” screen appears.  
62  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using hands-free phoning  
12  
4
Enter the desired name and then touch  
Dialing starts.  
[OK].  
p To cancel the call after the system starts  
dialing, touch  
If you touch [Detail], the “Detailed Informa-  
.
#
tion” screen appears.  
The “Contacts Name Search Results” screen  
appears.  
5
Touch the desired name on the list.  
You can check the details of the party before mak-  
ing a phone call.  
The “Contacts Type Selection” screen ap-  
pears.  
4
Touch  
to end the call.  
6
Touch the desired entry on the list to  
make a call.  
Dialing a favorite location  
You can make a call to an entry stored in the  
7
Touch  
to end the call.  
“Favorites” list.  
Dialing from the history  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
The most recent calls made (dialed), received  
and missed are stored in the call history list.  
You can browse the call history list and call  
numbers from it.  
2
Touch [Favorites].  
p Each call history saves 30 calls per regis-  
tered cellular phone. If the number of calls  
exceeds 30, the oldest entry will be deleted.  
The “Favorites” screen appears.  
3
Touch next to the location that you  
want to make a call.  
1
Display the “Phone Menu” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the phone  
menu on page 61.  
The “Edit Favorite” screen appears.  
4
5
Touch [Call] to make a call.  
p To cancel the call after the system starts  
2
Touch [Received Calls], [Dialed Calls] or  
dialing, touch  
.
[Missed Calls].  
The selected call history list appears.  
Touch to end the call.  
3
Touch an entry on the list.  
Dialing a facility’s phone number  
You can make a call to facilities with phone  
number data.  
p You cannot make a call to locations or POIs  
that have no phone number data.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
63  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
12  
Using hands-free phoning  
2
Touch [POI].  
Receiving a phone call  
You can perform hands-free answering by  
The “POI Search” screen appears.  
3
Search for the POI.  
using the navigation system.  
The “POI List” screen appears.  
= For details of the operation, refer to Search-  
ing for Points of Interest (POI) on page 37.  
Answering an incoming call  
The system informs you that it is receiving a  
call by displaying a message and producing a  
ring sound.  
4
Touch  
to call.  
The “POI Information” screen appears.  
next to the POI that you want  
5
6
Touch [Call] to make a call.  
p To cancel the call after the system starts  
dialing, touch  
.
Touch to end the call.  
Dialing from the map  
You can make a call by selecting the icon of a  
registered location or a POI icon from the map  
screen.  
p You cannot make a call to locations or POIs  
that have no phone number data.  
p You can set the system to automatically an-  
swer incoming calls. If not set to automati-  
cally answer incoming calls, you will have  
to answer the calls manually.  
= For details, refer to Answering a call  
automatically on page 67.  
p If the voice on the other end of the call is  
too quiet to hear, you can adjust the volume  
of the received voice.  
1
Scroll the map, and place the cursor on  
an icon on the map.  
2
Touch  
.
= For details, refer to Setting the Volume  
for Guidance and Phone on page 165.  
p The registered name appears if the phone  
number of the received call is already regis-  
tered in “Contacts”.  
p Depending on the caller ID service, the  
phone number of the received call may not  
be displayed. “Unknown” appears instead.  
The “Information List” screen appears.  
3
Touch the POI you want.  
The “POI Information” screen appears.  
4
5
Touch [Call] to make a call.  
p To cancel the call after the system starts  
dialing, touch  
.
Touch to end the call.  
1
To answer an incoming call, touch  
The operation menu during a call appears.  
If you touch [Vol –] or [Vol +], you can adjust  
the ring tone volume.  
If you touch , an incoming call is re-  
jected.  
.
#
#
The rejected call is recorded in the missed call  
history list.  
= For details, refer to Dialing from the history  
on the previous page.  
64  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using hands-free phoning  
12  
2
Touch  
to end the call.  
p A maximum of 1 000 entries can be trans-  
ferred per cellular phone. If the entries ex-  
ceed 1 000, the extra entries will not be  
transferred. If more than one number is re-  
gistered for one person, such as work place  
and home, each number may be counted  
separately.  
p Each entry can hold up to 5 phone num-  
bers.  
p Depending on the cellular phone that is  
connected to this navigation system via  
Bluetooth technology, this navigation sys-  
tem may not be able to display the phone  
book correctly. (Some characters may be  
garbled.)  
p If the phone book in the cellular phone con-  
tains image data, the phone book may not  
be correctly transferred.  
The call ends.  
p You may hear a noise when you hang up  
the phone.  
#
If you touch [Vol –] or [Vol +], you can adjust  
the volume when talking.  
If you touch [Close Menu], the operation  
#
menu during call is minimized.  
To display the menu again, touch  
.
p The transferred data cannot be edited on  
the navigation system.  
1
Connect the cellular phone that has the  
phone book to transfer.  
= For details, refer to Connecting a registered  
Bluetooth device manually on page 59.  
2
Touch [Contacts Transfer] on the  
“Phone Menu” screen.  
3
Check that the following screen is dis-  
Transferring the phone book  
You can transfer the phone book entries from  
your cellular phone to the phone book of the  
navigation system.  
played, and operate your cellular phone to  
transfer the phone book entries.  
p Depending on the cellular phone, phone  
book may be called Contacts, Business  
Card or something else.  
p With some cellular phones, it may not be  
possible to transfer the entire phone book  
at once. In this case, transfer addresses  
one at a time from your phone book using  
your cellular phone.  
p If you connect the cellular phone featuring  
auto-synchronization function, phone book  
transfer or synchronization will be automa-  
tically performed.  
When data transfer is finished, a message ask-  
ing whether you want to transfer more data  
appears.  
Touch [Yes] to continue the transfer.  
65  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
12  
Using hands-free phoning  
4
Touch [No].  
Changing the phone settings  
Editing the device name  
You can change the device name to be dis-  
played on your cellular phone. (Default is  
“PIONEER NAVI”.)  
1
Display the “Settings Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
2
Touch [Bluetooth Settings].  
The transferred data is imported to the naviga-  
tion system.  
The “Bluetooth Settings” screen appears.  
When the data is successfully imported, an  
import complete message is displayed and the  
“Contacts List” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Device Name].  
The keyboard to enter the name appears.  
4
Touch to delete the current name,  
p It may take time depending on how many  
and enter the new name by using the key-  
board.  
entries will be transferred.  
Deleting registered contacts  
1
Display the “Phone Menu” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the phone  
menu on page 61.  
2
Touch [Contacts].  
The “Contacts List” screen appears.  
p Up to 16 characters can be entered for a de-  
3
Touch [Delete].  
vice name.  
The “Delete from Contacts” screen appears.  
5
Touch [OK].  
The name is changed.  
4
Touch the entry you want to delete.  
A check mark appears next to the entry.  
If you touch [All], you can select all entries. If  
you want to deselect all entries, touch [None].  
#
Editing the password  
You can change the password to be used for  
authentication on your cellular phone. (De-  
fault is “1111”.)  
p Four to eight characters can be entered for  
a password.  
5
Touch [Delete].  
The message confirming whether to delete the  
entry appears.  
6
Touch [Yes].  
The entry is deleted.  
If you touch [No], the deletion is canceled.  
1
Display the “Settings Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
#
2
Touch [Bluetooth Settings].  
The “Bluetooth Settings” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Password].  
The “Set Password” screen appears.  
66  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using hands-free phoning  
12  
4
Touch  
to delete the current pass-  
Answering a call automatically  
word, and enter the new password by  
using the keyboard.  
The navigation system automatically answers  
incoming calls to the cellular phone, so you  
can answer a call while driving without taking  
your hands off the steering wheel.  
5
Touch [OK].  
The password is changed.  
1
Display the “Settings Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
Stopping Bluetooth wave  
transmission  
You can stop transmission of electric waves by  
turning off the Bluetooth function. If you do  
not use the Bluetooth wireless technology, we  
recommend selecting “Off”.  
2
Touch [Bluetooth Settings].  
The “Bluetooth Settings” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Auto Answer Preference].  
The “Auto Answer Preference” screen ap-  
pears.  
1
Display the “Settings Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
4
Touch the desired option.  
2
Touch [Bluetooth Settings].  
The “Bluetooth Settings” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Bluetooth On/Off].  
Each touch of [Bluetooth On/Off] changes  
the settings as follows:  
!
!
On (default):  
Turns on Bluetooth function.  
Off:  
On this screen, you can select the following  
items:  
Turns off Bluetooth function.  
!
!
!
!
!
Off (default):  
No automatic response. Respond manually.  
Immediately:  
Answers immediately.  
After 3 seconds:  
Answers after three seconds.  
After 6 seconds:  
Answers after six seconds.  
After 10 seconds:  
Answers after ten seconds.  
Echo canceling and noise reduction  
When you are operating hands-free phoning  
in the vehicle, you may hear an undesirable  
echo. This function reduces the echo and  
noise while you are using hands-free phoning,  
and maintains a certain sound quality.  
1
Display the “Settings Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
Setting the automatic rejection  
function  
2
Touch [Bluetooth Settings].  
The “Bluetooth Settings” screen appears.  
If this function is on, the navigation system  
automatically rejects all incoming calls.  
3
Touch [Echo Cancel].  
Each touch of [Echo Cancel] changes the set-  
tings as follows:  
1
Display the “Settings Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
!
On (default):  
Activates echo canceling and noise reduc-  
tion.  
!
Off:  
2
Touch [Bluetooth Settings].  
Deactivates echo canceling and noise re-  
duction.  
The “Bluetooth Settings” screen appears.  
67  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
12  
Using hands-free phoning  
#
If you touch [Clear All], all the data is cleared  
that correspond to the connected cellular phone.  
3
Touch [Refuse All Calls].  
Each touch of [Refuse All Calls] changes the  
settings as follows:  
5
Touch [Yes].  
!
!
Off (default):  
Accepts all incoming calls.  
On:  
Data on the selected item is cleared from this  
navigation system’s memory.  
#
If you do not want to clear the memory that  
Rejects all incoming calls.  
you have selected, touch [No].  
p If both “Refuse All Calls” and “Auto An-  
swer Preference” are activated, “Refuse  
All Calls” takes priority and all incoming  
calls are automatically rejected.  
p If “Refuse All Calls” is set to “On”, rejected  
incoming calls will not be stored in the  
missed call list.  
Updating the Bluetooth  
wireless technology software  
Update files will be available for download in  
the future. You will be able to download the lat-  
est update from an appropriate website to  
your PC.  
p Before you download the files and install  
the update, read through the instructions  
on the website. Follow the instructions on  
the website for steps until [Firmware up-  
date] becomes active.  
Clearing memory  
You can clear the memory of each item that  
corresponds to the connected cellular phone:  
phone book, dialed/received/missed call his-  
tory list and preset dials.  
1
Store the updated files into the SD  
1
Display the “Settings Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
memory card.  
2
Insert an SD memory card into the SD  
card slot.  
2
Touch [Bluetooth Settings].  
= For details of the operation, refer to Insert-  
ing and ejecting an SD memory card on  
page 16.  
The “Bluetooth Settings” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Clear Memory].  
The “Clear Memory” screen appears.  
3
4
Display the “Settings Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
4
Touch the desired option.  
Touch [Bluetooth Settings].  
The “Bluetooth Settings” screen appears.  
5
Touch [Firmware update].  
The current version is displayed.  
On this screen, you can select the following  
items:  
!
!
!
!
Contacts:  
Clears the registered phone book.  
Received Calls List:  
Clears the received call history list.  
Dialed Calls List:  
Clears the dialed call history list.  
Missed Calls List:  
6
Touch [Firmware update].  
The message confirming whether or not to  
start the update will appear.  
Clears the missed call history list.  
68  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using hands-free phoning  
12  
7
Touch [Yes].  
— When the person on the other end of  
line hangs up the phone.  
Update starts.  
!
!
!
If the person on the other end of the phone  
call cannot hear the conversation due to an  
echo, decrease the volume level for hands-  
free phoning. This may reduce the echo.  
With some cellular phones, even if you  
press the accept button on the cellular  
phone when a call comes in, hands-free  
phoning may not be performed.  
The registered name appears if the phone  
number of the received call is already regis-  
tered in the phone book. When one phone  
number is registered under different  
names, the name that comes first in the  
phone book is displayed.  
8
Wait until the upgrade process is com-  
plete.  
A message will appear after the update is  
complete.  
9
Touch [OK].  
The message disappears, and the map screen  
returns.  
10 Eject the SD memory card.  
Notes for hands-free phoning  
General notes  
!
!
If the phone number of the received call is  
not registered in the phone book, the  
phone number of the received call appears.  
Connection to all cellular phones featuring  
Bluetooth wireless technology is not guar-  
anteed.  
!
The line-of-sight distance between this na-  
vigation system and your cellular phone  
must be 10 meters or less when sending  
and receiving voice and data via Bluetooth  
technology. However, the actual transmis-  
sion distance may be shorter than the esti-  
mated distance, depending on the usage  
environment.  
With some cellular phones, the ring sound  
may not be output from the speakers.  
If private mode is selected on the cellular  
phone, hands-free phoning may be dis-  
abled.  
The received call history and the dialed  
number history  
!
Calls made or editing performed only on  
your cellular phone will not be reflected to  
the dialed number history or phone book in  
the navigation system.  
You cannot make a call to the entry of an  
unknown user (no phone number) in the re-  
ceived call history.  
If calls are made by operating your cellular  
phone, no history data will be recorded in  
the navigation system.  
!
!
!
!
Phone book transfers  
Registration and connection  
!
!
If there are more than 1 000 phone book en-  
tries on your cellular phone, all entries may  
not be downloaded completely.  
Cellular phone operations vary depending  
on the type of cellular phone. Refer to the  
instruction manual that came with your cel-  
lular phone for detailed instructions.  
With cellular phones, phone book transfer  
may not work even though your phone is  
paired with the navigation system. In that  
case, disconnect your phone, perform pair-  
ing again from your phone to the naviga-  
tion system, and then perform the phone  
book transfer.  
!
With some cellular phones, it may not be  
possible to transfer all items in the phone  
book at one time. In this case, transfer  
items one by one from your cellular phone.  
Depending on the cellular phone, this navi-  
gation system may not display the phone  
book correctly. (Some characters may be  
garbled, or first and last names may be re-  
versed.)  
!
!
!
!
If the phone book in the cellular phone con-  
tains image data, the phone book may not  
be transferred correctly. (Image data can-  
not be transferred from the cellular phone.)  
Depending on the cellular phone, phone  
book transfer may not be available.  
Making and receiving calls  
!
You may hear a noise in the following situa-  
tions:  
— When you answer the phone by using  
the button on the phone.  
69  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
13  
Basic operations of the AV source  
This chapter describes the basic operations of  
the AV source.  
Selecting a source  
Source icons  
You can play or use the following sources with  
your Pioneer navigation system.  
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Tuner (HD Radio tuner) (*1)  
FM (*2)  
AM (*2)  
CD  
ROM (in MP3, AAC, WMA)  
DVD-Video  
DivX  
USB  
SD  
1
Touch, then drag any source icons up or  
down to display additional source icons.  
The AV source icons will scroll, and previously  
hidden icons will appear.  
The following sources can be played back or  
used by connecting an auxiliary device.  
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
HD Radio (HD Radio tuner) (*2)  
iPod  
Pandora  
Aha Radio  
Bluetooth audio  
XM Tuner  
SIRIUS Tuner  
AV input 1 (AV1)  
AV input 2 (AV2)  
External unit 1 (EXT1)  
External unit 2 (EXT2)  
2
Tap the icon of the source you want to  
select.  
The operation screen of the selected source  
appears.  
p The currently selected source icon is high-  
lighted.  
Operating list screens (e.g.  
iPod list screen)  
This describes the operations when a list  
screen is displayed.  
p For information on how to display the list  
screen, refer to the descriptions within the  
desired source portion of this manual.  
p (*1) A source available only on AVIC-  
Z130BT.  
p (*2) Sources available on AVIC-X930BT or  
AVIC-X9310BT.  
Displaying the AV  
operation screen  
Switching between the AV  
operation screen and the list  
screen  
The following example describes how to  
switch between the AV operation screen and  
the artist list screen of iPod.  
%
Press the MODE button when the map  
screen is displayed.  
p The AV operation screen can also be dis-  
played by touching [AV Source & Con-  
tents] on the “Top Menu”.  
70  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Basic operations of the AV source  
13  
1
Touch the appropriate key to display  
the list that you want.  
2
Touch the key on the right edge of the  
screen.  
The AV operation screen returns.  
Selecting an item  
1
Scroll the list by dragging items up or  
down to display the item you want to se-  
lect.  
p Flicking a list item enables you to quickly  
scroll through the list.  
To stop scrolling, gently touch the list.  
2
Tap the item.  
p The item currently selected is highlighted.  
Returning to the previous display  
Touch to return to the previous  
screen.  
%
71  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
14  
Using the radio (FM)  
8 Program service name or frequency indi-  
cator  
p This function is available for AVIC-X930BT  
and AVIC-X9310BT.  
Shows the frequency of the preset item. If the  
program service name can be obtained, the  
program service name is shown instead of the  
frequency.  
You can listen to the radio by using the naviga-  
tion system. This section describes operations  
for radio (FM).  
9 Preset number indicator  
Shows what preset item has been selected.  
Starting procedure  
1
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 70.  
2
Tap [FM] on the left edge of the screen  
to display the “FM” screen.  
When the tuner has been tuned in to an HD  
Radio broadcasting, [FM] cannot be selected.  
3
Use the touch panel keys on the screen  
to control the radio.  
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel  
keys on the next page.  
Reading the screen  
2 3 4 5  
6
7
1
8
9
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Band indicator  
Shows which band the radio is tuned to: FM1  
to FM3.  
3 Program service name indicator  
Shows the program service name (station  
name) of the current station.  
4 Signal level indicator  
5 Frequency indicator  
6 STEREO indicator  
Shows that the frequency selected is being  
broadcast in stereo.  
7 Current time  
72  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the radio (FM)  
14  
Using the touch panel keys  
1
6
5
2
4
3
1 Performs manual tuning  
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer  
on page 175.  
4 Displays the “Function” menu  
= For details, refer to Using advanced func-  
tions on the next page.  
To tune manually, touch [o] or [p] briefly.  
The frequencies move up or down one step at  
a time.  
Performs seek tuning  
To perform seek tuning, touch and hold [o]  
or [p] for about one second and then re-  
lease. The tuner will scan frequencies until a  
broadcast strong enough for good reception  
is found.  
p You can cancel seek tuning by touching  
either [o] or [p] briefly.  
p If you keep holding [o] or [p], you  
can skip broadcasting frequencies.  
Seek tuning will start at the time you re-  
lease the keys.  
5 Switches between the AV operation  
screen and the preset list display  
You can switch the screen display according  
to your preference.  
= For details of the operation, refer to  
Switching between the AV operation  
screen and the list screen on page 70.  
6 Selects an FM band  
Tapping the key repeatedly switches between  
the following FM bands: FM1, FM2, or FM3.  
p This function is convenient for preparing  
different preset lists for each band.  
2 Selects a preset channel  
The keys can be used to switch preset chan-  
nels.  
Scroll by dragging the keys up or down to dis-  
play the preset channel you want to select,  
and tap the channel.  
p The lower keys and the upper keys ap-  
pear only when the preset channel is se-  
lected.  
Storing and recalling broadcast  
frequencies  
With a tap of any of the preset tuning keys  
(“P1” to “P6”), you can easily store up to six  
broadcast frequencies for later recall (also  
with the tap of a key).  
3 Recalls equalizer curves  
73  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
14  
Using the radio (FM)  
1
Select a frequency that you want to  
1
2
store in memory.  
2
Display the preset channel list.  
= For details, refer to Switches between the  
AV operation screen and the preset list  
display on the previous page.  
3
Keep touching a preset tuning key [P1]  
to [P6].  
1 Stores the strongest broadcast frequen-  
cies  
Preset list display  
2 Tunes in strong signals  
= For details of each function, refer to sec-  
tions below with the relative titles.  
Storing the strongest broadcast  
frequencies  
BSM (best stations memory) lets you automa-  
tically store the six strongest broadcast fre-  
quencies under the preset tuning keys “P1” to  
“P6” and, once stored there, you can tune into  
them with the touch of a key.  
p Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM  
may replace broadcast frequencies you  
have already saved.  
Preset tuning keys  
= For details of the list operations, refer to Op-  
erating list screens (e.g. iPod list screen) on  
page 70.  
The selected radio station has been stored in  
memory.  
The next time you tap the same preset tuning  
key “P1” to “P6”, the radio station frequencies  
are recalled from memory.  
1
Touch on the “FM” screen.  
p Up to 18 FM stations, six for each of the  
three FM bands can be stored in mem-  
ory.  
The “Function” menu appears.  
2
3
Touch [BSM].  
Touch [Start] to begin a search.  
“BSM” begins to flash. While “BSM” is flash-  
ing, the six strongest broadcast frequencies  
will be stored under the preset tuning keys  
“P1” to “P6” in order of their signal strength.  
When this is complete, “BSM” stops flashing.  
Operating by hardware  
buttons  
Pressing the TRK button  
You can move preset channels up or down.  
#
If you touch [Stop], the storage process is  
canceled.  
Pressing and holding the TRK button  
You can perform seek tuning.  
Tuning in strong signals  
Local seek tuning allows you to tune in only  
those radio stations with sufficiently strong  
signals for good reception.  
Using advanced functions  
%
Touch on the “FM” screen.  
The “Function” menu appears.  
74  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the radio (FM)  
14  
1
Touch on the “FM” screen.  
The “Function” menu appears.  
2
Touch [Local].  
3
Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.  
#
If you touch [Off], local seek tuning is turned  
off.  
4
Touch [cPrev] or [Nextd] to set the sen-  
sitivity.  
There are four levels of sensitivity for FM.  
Level: 1 — 2 — 3 — 4  
p The level “4” setting allows reception of only  
the strongest stations, while lower settings  
let you receive weaker stations.  
75  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
15  
Using the radio (AM)  
p This function is available for AVIC-X930BT  
and AVIC-X9310BT.  
You can listen to the radio using this naviga-  
tion system. This section describes operations  
for radio (AM).  
Starting procedure  
1
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 70.  
2
Tap [AM] on the left edge of the screen  
to display the “AM” screen.  
When the tuner has been tuned in to an HD  
Radio broadcasting, [AM] cannot be selected.  
3
Use the touch panel keys on the screen  
to control the radio.  
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel  
keys on the next page.  
Reading the screen  
2
3
4
1
5
6
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Signal level indicator  
3 Frequency indicator  
4 Current time  
5 Frequency indicator  
Shows the frequency of the preset item.  
6 Preset number indicator  
Shows what preset item has been selected.  
76  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the radio (AM)  
15  
Using the touch panel keys  
1
2
5
4
3
1 Performs manual tuning  
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer  
on page 175.  
4 Displays the “Function” menu  
= For details, refer to Using advanced func-  
tions on the next page.  
To tune manually, touch [o] or [p] briefly.  
The frequencies move up or down one step at  
a time.  
Performs seek tuning  
To perform seek tuning, touch and hold [o]  
or [p] for about one second and then re-  
lease. The tuner will scan frequencies until a  
broadcast strong enough for good reception  
is found.  
5 Switches between the AV operation  
screen and the preset list display  
You can switch the screen display according  
to your preference.  
= For details of the operation, refer to  
Switching between the AV operation  
screen and the list screen on page 70.  
p You can cancel seek tuning by touching  
either [o] or [p] briefly.  
p If you keep holding [o] or [p], you  
can skip broadcasting frequencies.  
Seek tuning will start at the time you re-  
lease the keys.  
Storing and recalling broadcast  
frequencies  
With a tap of any of the preset tuning keys  
(“P1” to “P6”), you can easily store up to six  
broadcast frequencies for later recall (also  
with the tap of a key).  
2 Selects a preset channel  
The keys can be used to switch preset chan-  
nels.  
Scroll by dragging the keys up or down to dis-  
play the preset channel you want to select,  
and tap the channel.  
p The lower keys and the upper keys ap-  
pear only when the preset channel is se-  
lected.  
1
Select a frequency that you want to  
store in memory.  
3 Recalls equalizer curves  
77  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
15  
Using the radio (AM)  
2
3
Display the preset channel list.  
= For details, refer to Switches between the  
AV operation screen and the preset list  
display on the previous page.  
1
2
Keep touching a preset tuning key [P1]  
to [P6].  
Preset list display  
1 Stores the strongest broadcast frequen-  
cies  
2 Tunes in strong signals  
= For details of each function, refer to sec-  
tions below with the relative titles.  
Preset tuning keys  
Storing the strongest broadcast  
frequencies  
BSM (best stations memory) lets you automa-  
tically store the six strongest broadcast fre-  
quencies under the preset tuning keys “P1” to  
“P6” and, once stored there, you can tune into  
them with the touch of a key.  
p Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM  
may replace broadcast frequencies you  
have already saved.  
= For details of the list operations, refer to Op-  
erating list screens (e.g. iPod list screen) on  
page 70.  
The selected radio station has been stored in  
memory.  
The next time you tap the same preset tuning  
key “P1” to “P6”, the radio station frequencies  
are recalled from memory.  
1
Touch on the “AM” screen.  
Operating by hardware  
buttons  
Pressing the TRK button  
You can move preset channels up or down.  
The “Function” menu appears.  
2
3
Touch [BSM].  
Touch [Start] to begin a search.  
“BSM” begins to flash. While “BSM” is flash-  
ing, the six strongest broadcast frequencies  
will be stored under the preset tuning keys  
“P1” to “P6” in order of their signal strength.  
When this is complete, “BSM” stops flashing.  
Pressing and holding the TRK button  
You can perform seek tuning.  
Using advanced functions  
#
If you touch [Stop], the storage process is  
canceled.  
%
Touch on the “AM” screen.  
The “Function” menu appears.  
Tuning in strong signals  
Local seek tuning allows you to tune in only  
those radio stations with sufficiently strong  
signals for good reception.  
78  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the radio (AM)  
15  
1
Touch on the “AM” screen.  
The “Function” menu appears.  
2
Touch [Local].  
3
Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.  
#
If you touch [Off], local seek tuning is turned  
off.  
4
Touch [cPrev] or [Nextd] to set the sen-  
sitivity.  
There are two levels of sensitivity for AM.  
Level: 1 — 2  
p The level “2” setting allows reception of only  
the strongest stations, while lower settings  
let you receive weaker stations.  
79  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
™
HD Radio reception  
16  
You can listen to the radio by using the naviga-  
tion system. This section describes operations  
for HD Radio reception.  
AM band  
Analog AM  
Analog AM  
Digital AM  
Digital FM  
For AVIC-X930BTand AVIC-X9310BTusers  
™
This HD Radio Ready receiver (this navigation  
FM band  
system) is ready to receive HD Radio broad-  
casts when connected to the GEX-P20HD,  
GEX-P10HD, sold separately.  
p For details concerning operation, refer to  
the HD Radio tuner’s operation manual.  
Analog FM  
Analog FM  
Analog FM  
Digital FM-1ch  
Digital FM-2ch  
Digital FM-3ch  
p AVIC-Z130BT shows “Tuner” and AVIC-  
X930BT or AVIC-X9310BT shows “HD  
Radio” as the source icon.  
This chapter describes operation proce-  
dures for AVIC-Z130BT.  
: Main channel  
: Sub channel  
HD Radio broadcasting  
HD Radio broadcasting is high quality audio  
and data services. HD Radio broadcasting is  
brought to you by your local FM or AM sta-  
tions.  
Starting procedure  
1
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 70.  
HD Radio broadcasting features the following:  
!
!
!
High quality audio  
FM multicasting  
Data services  
2
Tap [Tuner] on the left edge of the  
screen to display the “Tuner” screen.  
3
Use the touch panel keys on the screen  
to control the radio.  
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel  
keys on page 82.  
80  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
™
HD Radio reception  
16  
Reading the screen  
Indicator  
Meaning  
The number of song information  
items stored in the navigation  
system is displayed.  
1 2 3 45 6 7  
8
9
The icon is displayed on all op-  
eration screens of AV sources.  
d
c
a
Appears when song information  
is transferred to iPod.  
The icon is displayed on all op-  
eration screens of AV sources.  
9 Current time  
b
a Preset number indicator  
Shows what preset item has been selected.  
b Seek type indicator  
1 Band indicator  
Shows which band the radio is tuned to: FM1,  
FM2, FM3 or AM.  
2 Detailed information  
= For details, refer to Switching the seek  
mode on page 85.  
c Multicasting indicator  
= For details, refer to Switching the display  
on page 83.  
3 Signal level indicator  
Shows the number of multicast channels in  
the current frequency.  
d Source icon  
4 Frequency indicator  
Shows which source has been selected.  
p Items marked with asterisk (*) appear only  
on AVIC-Z130BT.  
5 Signal type indicator  
Shows the type of signal currently being re-  
ceived. If a digital broadcasting is received,  
“D” appears. Otherwise, “A” appears.  
6 Blending mode indicator  
= For details, refer to Switching the recep-  
tion mode on page 85.  
7 Song info reception indicator*  
Shows the reception status of song informa-  
tion.  
Indicator  
Meaning  
Appears when the navigation  
system receives song informa-  
tion and can store it.  
The icon is displayed on the op-  
eration screen of the HD Radio  
receiver.  
Appears when the navigation  
system is storing song informa-  
tion.  
The icon is displayed on all op-  
eration screens of AV sources.  
8 Song info status indicator*  
Shows the status of the song information  
stored in the navigation system.  
81  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
™
HD Radio reception  
16  
Using the touch panel keys  
1
8
7
2
6
5
4
3
1 Performs manual tuning  
If a digital broadcast is not yet received,  
tuning up or down tunes into the next or  
previous analog station.  
To tune manually, touch [o] or [p] briefly.  
The frequencies move up or down one step at  
a time.  
Analog FM  
Performs seek tuning  
To perform seek tuning, touch and hold [o]  
or [p] for about one second and then re-  
lease. The tuner will scan frequencies until a  
broadcast strong enough for good reception  
is found.  
Analog FM  
Digital FM-1ch  
Digital FM-2ch  
Digital FM-3ch  
p You can cancel seek tuning by touching  
either [o] or [p] briefly.  
Analog FM  
p When an analog station is received, tun-  
ing up or down is conducted within ana-  
log broadcasts.  
2 Selects a preset channel  
The keys can be used to switch preset chan-  
nels.  
Scroll by dragging the keys up or down to dis-  
play the preset channel you want to select,  
and tap the channel.  
p The lower keys and the upper keys ap-  
pear only when the preset channel is se-  
lected.  
3 Stores song information to an iPod*  
82  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
™
HD Radio reception  
16  
Touch this key when receiving the song infor-  
mation of the song on air, and you can store  
the song information on your iPod.  
= For details, refer to Storing song informa-  
tion to an iPod (iTunes Tagging) on the  
next page.  
3
Keep touching a preset tuning key [Pre-  
set 1] to [Preset 6].  
Preset list display  
4 Switches the display  
= For details, refer to Switching the display  
on this page.  
5 Recalls equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer  
on page 175.  
6 Displays the “Function” menu  
= For details, refer to Using advanced func-  
tions on the next page.  
7 Switches between the AV operation  
screen and the preset list display  
You can switch the screen display according  
to your preference.  
= For details of the operation, refer to  
Switching between the AV operation  
screen and the list screen on page 70.  
8 Selects a band  
Preset tuning keys  
= For details, refer to Operating list screens (e.  
g. iPod list screen) on page 70.  
The selected radio station has been stored in  
memory.  
The next time you tap the same preset tuning  
key “Preset 1” to “Preset 6”, the radio station  
frequencies are recalled from memory.  
p Up to 18 FM stations, six for each of the  
three FM bands, as well as six AM stations,  
can be stored in memory.  
Tap the key repeatedly until the desired band  
is displayed: FM1, FM2, FM3, or AM.  
p This function is convenient for preparing  
different preset lists for each band.  
p Items marked with asterisk (*) appear only  
on AVIC-Z130BT.  
Operating by hardware  
buttons  
Pressing the TRK button  
You can move preset channels up or down.  
Pressing and holding the TRK button  
You can perform seek tuning.  
Storing and recalling broadcast  
frequencies  
With a tap of any of the preset tuning keys  
(“Preset 1” to “Preset 6”), you can easily store  
up to six broadcast frequencies for later recall  
(also with the tap of a key).  
Switching the display  
Desired information can be displayed.  
1
Select a frequency that you want to  
%
Touch [Disp].  
store in memory.  
AVIC-Z130BT  
Touching [Disp] repeatedly switches between  
the following settings:  
Channel name — Artist name — Song title —  
Program type  
AVIC-X930BT, AVIC-X9310BT  
The contents and order of the setting display  
depend on the HD Radio tuner.  
2
Display the preset channel list.  
= For details, refer to Switches between the  
AV operation screen and the preset list  
display on this page.  
83  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
™
HD Radio reception  
16  
p Only when the tuner has been tuned in to  
an HD Radio station, can the display be  
changed.  
p When the tuner has been tuned in to an HD  
Radio station, default display is changed  
into station name instead of frequency.  
p The version of iTunes must be 7.4 or higher.  
Tune into the digital broadcast station.  
1
When song information is received,  
displayed while the desired song is being  
broadcast, and [Tag] becomes active.  
is  
= For details, refer to Song info reception in-  
dicator* on page 81.  
Scrolling the detailed information  
You can turn the detailed information scroll  
mode on and off.  
2
Touch [Tag].  
The information on the song on air is stored in  
the navigation system.  
When completed,  
displayed.  
turns off and  
is  
%
Touch and hold [Disp].  
p The song information for up to 50 songs  
can be stored on this navigation system.  
Storing song information  
to an iPod (iTunes Tagging)  
Depending on when the song information  
is stored, information for the previous song  
or song after the current song may also be  
stored.  
p This function is available for AVIC-Z130BT  
only.  
You can store the song information to the  
iPod, when the navigation system has received  
the song information. The songs will show up  
in a playlist called “Tagged playlist” in iTunes  
next time you sync your iPod. You can directly  
buy the songs via the navigation system.  
Depending on when the song information is  
stored, information on the songs before and  
after the song on air may also be stored. Be  
sure to confirm the song before you purchase.  
p The iTunes Tagging function is available  
during reception of digital broadcasts.  
p This function can be operated with the fol-  
lowing iPod models:  
3
Connect your iPod.  
The song information stored in the navigation  
system is transferred to your iPod.  
p If the iPod is already connected, every time  
you touch [Tag], the song information will  
be transferred to your iPod.  
When the song information is stored on  
your iPod,  
disappears.  
p When transfer of song information is com-  
pleted, the information stored in the naviga-  
tion system will be automatically cleared.  
p If you turn off the navigation system or dis-  
connect the iPod while transferring song in-  
formation to it, the transfer may not  
complete.  
p While the song information is stored in the  
navigation system, transfer to iPod is not  
possible.  
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
iPod touch 4th generation  
iPod touch 3rd generation  
iPod touch 2nd generation  
iPod touch 1st generation  
iPod classic  
iPod nano 6th generation  
iPod nano 5th generation  
iPod nano 4th generation  
iPod nano 3rd generation  
iPhone 4  
Using advanced functions  
%
Touch  
on the “Tuner” screen.  
The “Function” menu appears.  
iPhone 3GS  
iPhone 3G  
iPhone  
84  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
™
HD Radio reception  
16  
1
2
Touch  
on the “Tuner” screen.  
1
2
3
4
Touch [Seek] to select the desired set-  
ting.  
!
All:  
Seeks stations from both analog and digital  
broadcasting.  
!
HD:  
Seeks from digital broadcasting only.  
p If you select “HD” on this setting while  
[Blending] is set to “Analog”, the setting  
on [Blending] turns to “D/A Auto” automa-  
tically.  
1 Stores the strongest broadcast frequen-  
cies  
2 Switches the seek mode  
3 Tunes in strong signals  
4 Switches the reception mode  
= For details of each function, refer to sec-  
tions below with the relative titles.  
Tuning in strong signals  
Local seek tuning allows you to tune in only  
those radio stations with sufficiently strong  
signals for good reception.  
Storing the strongest broadcast  
frequencies  
BSM (best stations memory) lets you automa-  
tically store the six strongest broadcast fre-  
quencies under the preset tuning keys “Preset  
1” to “Preset 6” and, once stored there, you  
can tune in to these frequencies with the  
touch of a key.  
1
2
3
Touch  
on the “Tuner” screen.  
Touch [Local].  
Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.  
To turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off].  
4
Touch [cPrev] or [Nextd] to set the sen-  
sitivity.  
1
2
3
Touch on the “Tuner” screen.  
Touch [BSM].  
There are four levels of sensitivity for FM and  
two levels for AM:  
FM: 1 — 2 — 3 — 4  
AM: 1 — 2  
Touch [Start] to begin a search.  
p The FM “4” (AM “2”) setting allows recep-  
tion of only the strongest stations, while  
lower settings let you receive weaker sta-  
tions.  
“BSM” begins to flash. While “BSM” is flash-  
ing, the six strongest broadcast frequencies  
will be stored under the preset tuning keys  
“Preset 1” to “Preset 6” in order of their signal  
strength. When this is complete, “BSM” stops  
flashing.  
Switching the reception mode  
p To cancel the storage process, touch  
If a digital broadcast reception condition gets  
poor, the tuner automatically switches to the  
analog broadcast of the same frequency level  
by default. If you want to prevent a frequent  
automatic switching, switch this setting to  
[Analog].  
[Stop].  
p Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM  
may replace broadcast frequencies you  
have already saved.  
Switching the seek mode  
You can select the method of seek tuning.  
1
Touch  
on the “Tuner” screen.  
85  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
™
HD Radio reception  
16  
2
Touch [Blending] to switch the recep-  
tion mode.  
!
Analog:  
Receives analog broadcasting only.  
D/A Auto:  
!
Automatically switches to the analog broad-  
cast of the same frequency level as the digi-  
tal broadcast.  
p If you select “Analog” on this setting while  
[Seek] is set to “HD”, the setting on [Seek]  
turns to “All” automatically.  
86  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
Playing audio CDs  
17  
Scanning tracks of a CD  
You can play a normal music CD using the  
built-in drive of the navigation system. This  
section describes how.  
Indicator  
Meaning  
Cancels the scan play.  
Plays the beginning of each  
track in the current repeat play  
range for about 10 seconds.  
Starting procedure  
1
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 70.  
Playing tracks in random order  
Indicator  
Meaning  
Does not play tracks in random  
order.  
2
Insert the disc you want to play into  
disc-loading slot.  
Plays all tracks in the current  
disc in random order.  
Playback starts from the first track of the CD.  
= For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting a  
disc on page 15.  
Setting a repeat play range  
p If the disc is already set, tap [Disc] on the  
left edge of the screen.  
Indicator  
Meaning  
= For details, refer to Selecting a source on  
page 70.  
Repeats the current disc.  
Repeats just the current track.  
3
Use the touch panel keys on the screen  
3 Current track information  
to control the disc.  
!
!
!
!
: Artist name  
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel  
keys on the next page.  
Shows the artist name of the track cur-  
rently playing (when available).  
: Album title  
Shows the title of the album of the cur-  
rent track (when available).  
: Track title  
Shows the title of the track currently  
playing (when available).  
Play time  
Shows the elapsed playing time within  
the current track.  
Reading the screen  
2
3
4
5
1
p “-------” is displayed if there is no corre-  
sponding information.  
4 Current time  
5 Track information  
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Playback condition indicator  
!
Track number indicator  
Shows the track number and the total  
number of tracks in the current repeat  
range.  
Indicates the current playback condition.  
!
Track title indicator  
87  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
17  
Playing audio CDs  
Using the touch panel keys  
1
2
3
9
8
4
7
6
5
1 Scans tracks of a CD  
6 Displays the “Function” menu  
Scan play is performed by touching only one  
key.  
= For details, refer to Using advanced func-  
tions on the next page.  
= For details of the operation, refer to  
Scans tracks of a CD on the next page.  
2 Plays tracks in random order  
All of the tracks in the disc can be played at  
random by touching only one key.  
= For details of the operation, refer to  
Plays tracks in random order on the  
next page.  
7 Playback and Pause  
Touching [f] switches between playback  
and pause.  
8 Selects a track from the list  
Touching the key displays the list which lets  
you see the list of track titles on a disc. You  
can play a track on the list by tapping it.  
3 Sets a repeat play range  
The repeat play range can be changed by  
touching only one key.  
= For details, refer to Changes the repeat  
range on the next page.  
4 Selects a track to play  
Scrolling the keys up or down displays tracks,  
and tapping a track starts playback.  
Tapping the lower key during random play-  
back skips to the next track. Tapping the  
upper key jumps to the start of the current  
track.  
p “-------” is displayed if there is no corre-  
sponding information.  
= For details, refer to Operating list screens  
(e.g. iPod list screen) on page 70.  
9 Switches the media file type played  
= For details, refer to Switches the  
media file type played on page 93.  
5 Recalls equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer  
on page 175.  
88  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing audio CDs  
17  
p If you turn the scan play on when the re-  
peat play range is set to “Track”, the re-  
peat play range changes to “Disc”  
automatically.  
Operating by hardware  
buttons  
Pressing the TRK button  
4 Uses “Sound Retriever” function  
“Sound Retriever” function automatically  
enhances compressed audio and restores  
rich sound.  
You can skip tracks forward or backward.  
Pressing and holding the TRK button  
You can perform fast reverse or fast for-  
ward.  
Each touch of [Sound Retriever] changes  
the setting as follows:  
!
!
!
MODE 1: Activates “Sound Retriever”  
function.  
MODE 2: Activates “Sound Retriever”  
function.  
Off: Deactivates “Sound Retriever”  
function.  
Using advanced functions  
%
Touch on the “CD” screen.  
The “Function” menu appears.  
1
2
3
4
p “MODE 2” has a stronger effect than  
“MODE 1” and is more effective when  
playing back highly compressed audio  
data.  
1 Changes the repeat range  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting  
as follows:  
!
!
Disc: Repeats the current disc.  
Track: Repeats just the current track.  
p If you perform track search or fast for-  
ward or reverse, track repeat playback is  
automatically canceled.  
2 Plays tracks in random order  
Each touch of [Random] turns it on or off.  
p If you turn the random play on when the  
repeat play range is set to “Track”, the  
repeat play range changes to “Disc”  
automatically.  
3 Scans tracks of a CD  
Each touch of [Scan] turns it on or off. Scan  
play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of  
each track on the CD. When you find the  
track you want, touch [Scan] to turn scan  
play off.  
p After scanning is finished, normal play-  
back of the tracks will begin again.  
89  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
18  
Playing music files on ROM  
Scanning folders and files  
You can play a disc that contains compressed  
audio files using the built-in drive of the navi-  
gation system. This section describes these  
operations.  
Indicator  
Meaning  
Cancels the scan play.  
Plays the first audio files of each  
folder for about 10 seconds  
when the repeat range is set to  
“Disc”.  
p In the following description, the MP3,  
WMA, AAC files are collectively referred to  
as “Compressed audio file”.  
Plays the beginning of each  
audio file in the current folder  
for about 10 seconds when the  
repeat range is set to “Folder”.  
Starting procedure  
1
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 70.  
Playing files in random order  
Indicator  
Meaning  
Does not play files in random  
order.  
2
Insert the disc you want to play into  
disc-loading slot.  
Plays all audio files in the cur-  
rent repeat play range in ran-  
dom order.  
Playback starts from the first file of the ROM.  
= For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting a  
disc on page 15.  
p If the disc is already set, tap [Disc] on the  
left edge of the screen.  
= For details, refer to Selecting a source on  
page 70.  
Setting a repeat play range  
Indicator  
Meaning  
Repeats all compressed audio  
files.  
3
Use the touch panel keys on the screen  
Repeats just the current file.  
Repeats the current folder.  
to control the disc.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Using the touch panel keys on page 92.  
3 Current file information  
!
!
!
!
: Folder name  
Shows the folder name currently play-  
ing.  
: Artist name  
Shows the artist name currently playing  
(when available).  
Reading the screen  
2
3
4
5
: Album title  
1
Shows the title of the album of the cur-  
rent file (when available).  
: Track title  
Shows the title of the track currently  
playing (when available).  
p If the title of a track is not available,  
the file name appears.  
Play time  
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Playback condition indicator  
!
Shows the elapsed playing time within  
the current file.  
Indicates the current playback condition.  
90  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing music files on ROM  
18  
p “-------” is displayed if there is no corre-  
sponding information.  
4 Current time  
5 File information  
!
!
!
File number indicator  
File name indicator  
File type indicator  
Shows the type of audio files.  
91  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
18  
Playing music files on ROM  
Using the touch panel keys  
1
2
3
9
8
4
7
6
5
1 Scans folders and files  
5 Recalls equalizer curves  
Scan play is performed by touching only one  
key.  
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer  
on page 175.  
= For details of the operation, refer to  
Scans folders and files on the next  
page.  
6 Displays the “Function” menu  
= For details, refer to Using advanced func-  
tions on the next page.  
2 Plays files in random order  
The files in the current repeat play range can  
be played at random by touching only one key.  
p If the disc contains a mixture of various  
media file types, all tracks or files within  
the current part (“CD” or “ROM”) are  
played randomly.  
7 Playback and Pause  
Touching [f] switches between playback  
and pause.  
8 Selects a file from the list  
Touching the key displays the list which lets  
you see the list of track titles or folder names  
on a disc.  
= For details, refer to Plays files in ran-  
dom order on the next page.  
p If the title of a track is not available, the  
file name appears.  
3 Sets a repeat play range  
Tapping a folder on the list shows its content.  
The repeat play range can be changed by  
touching only one key.  
You can play a file on the list by tapping it.  
= For details, refer to Changes the repeat  
range on the next page.  
4 Selects a file to play  
Scrolling the keys up or down displays files,  
and tapping a file starts playback.  
Tapping the lower key during random play-  
back skips to the next file. Tapping the upper  
key jumps to the start of the current file.  
92  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing music files on ROM  
18  
!
Folder: Repeats the current folder.  
= For details, refer to Operating list screens  
(e.g. iPod list screen) on page 70.  
Touching displays the content of the upper  
folder (parent folder). If the uppermost folder  
is listed, cannot be used.  
p If you select another folder during repeat  
play, the repeat play range changes to  
“Disc”.  
p If you perform fast reverse or fast for-  
ward during “Track”, the repeat play  
range changes to “Folder”.  
p When “Folder” is selected, it is not pos-  
sible to playback a subfolder of that  
folder.  
p When playing discs with compressed  
audio files and audio data (CD-DA), re-  
peat play is performed within the cur-  
rently playing data session even if “Disc”  
is selected.  
9 Switches the media file type played  
When playing a disc containing a mixture of  
various media file types, you can switch be-  
tween media file types to play.  
Tap the key repeatedly to switch between the  
following media file types:  
CD (audio data (CD-DA)) — ROM (com-  
pressed audio file) — DivX (DivX video  
files)  
2 Plays files in random order  
Each touch of [Random] turns it on or off.  
When the random play is turned on, the  
files in the current repeat play range are  
randomly played.  
Operating by hardware  
buttons  
Pressing the TRK button  
p If you turn the random play on when the  
repeat play range is set to “Track”, the  
repeat play range changes to “Folder”  
automatically.  
You can skip files forward or backward.  
Pressing and holding the TRK button  
You can perform fast reverse or fast for-  
ward.  
3 Scans folders and files  
Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds  
of each file. Scan play is performed in the  
current repeat play range.  
Each touch of [Scan] turns it on or off.  
When you find the file you want, touch  
[Scan] to turn the scan play off.  
p After completion of file or folder scan-  
ning, normal playback of the files will  
begin again.  
Using advanced functions  
%
Touch on the “ROM” screen.  
The “Function” menu appears.  
1
2
3
4
p If you turn the scan play on when the re-  
peat play range is set to “Track”, the re-  
peat play range changes to “Folder”  
automatically.  
p If you turn the scan play on while the re-  
peat play range is set to “Disc”, scan  
play is performed for only the first file of  
each folder.  
1 Changes the repeat range  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting  
as follows:  
4 Uses “Sound Retriever” function  
“Sound Retriever” function automatically  
enhances compressed audio and restores  
rich sound.  
!
Disc: Repeats all compressed audio  
files.  
!
Track: Repeats just the current file.  
93  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
18  
Playing music files on ROM  
Each touch of [Sound Retriever] changes  
the setting as follows:  
!
!
!
MODE 1: Activates “Sound Retriever”  
function.  
MODE 2: Activates “Sound Retriever”  
function.  
Off: Deactivates “Sound Retriever”  
function.  
p “MODE 2” has a stronger effect than  
“MODE 1” and is more effective when  
playing back highly compressed audio  
data.  
94  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
Playing a DVD-Video  
19  
4 Audio channel indicator  
Shows the current audio channel type, such  
as “Mch” (Multi-channel).  
You can play a DVD-Video using the built-in  
drive of the navigation system. This section de-  
scribes operations for playing a DVD-Video.  
5 Subtitle number indicator  
Shows the subtitle number currently selected.  
6 Subtitle language indicator  
Shows the subtitle language currently se-  
lected.  
7 Viewing angle indicator  
Shows what viewing angle has been selected.  
8 Current time  
9 Digital sound format indicator  
Shows which digital sound format (surround  
sound format) has been selected.  
a Play time indicator  
Starting procedure  
1
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 70.  
2
Insert the disc you want to play into  
disc-loading slot.  
The source changes and then playback will  
start.  
= For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting a  
disc on page 15.  
p If the disc is already set, tap [Disc] on the  
left edge of the screen.  
Shows the elapsed playing time within the  
current title.  
b Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
= For details, refer to Selecting a source on  
page 70.  
3
Use the touch panel keys on the screen  
to control the disc.  
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel  
keys on the next page.  
Reading the screen  
1 2 3 4 5 6  
7
8
9
b
a
1 Title number indicator  
Shows the title number currently playing.  
2 Audio track indicator  
Shows the audio track number and audio lan-  
guage currently selected.  
3 Chapter number indicator  
Shows the chapter number currently playing.  
95  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
19  
Playing a DVD-Video  
Using the touch panel keys  
Playback screen (page 1)  
b
a
9
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Playback screen (page 2)  
Playback screen (page 3)  
g
f
e
c
d
h
i
j
p With some discs, the icon 9 may be dis-  
played, meaning that the operation is inva-  
lid.  
1 Displays the “Function” menu  
= For details, refer to Using advanced func-  
tions on page 99.  
4 Switches to the next page of touch panel  
keys  
5 Displays the DVD menu keypad  
= For details, refer to Using DVD menu by  
touch panel keys on page 98.  
6 Playback and Pause  
2 Recalls equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer  
on page 175.  
Touching [f] switches between playback  
and pause.  
7 Hides the touch panel keys and informa-  
tion of the current video  
3 Switches the display  
Touching [Disp] changes the indication on the  
information plate as follows:  
Disc information display — Repeat range and  
L/R select display  
Touching [Hide] shows only the current video.  
p If you want to display the touch panel  
keys and information of the current  
video again, touch anywhere on the LCD  
screen.  
96  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing a DVD-Video  
19  
8 Skips forward or backward  
Each touch of [Audio] switches between  
audio tracks recorded in the disc.  
p DTS audio format cannot be output, so  
select an audio track other than DTS  
audio format.  
p Display indications such as MPEG-A  
and Mch describe the audio track re-  
corded on the DVD. This indication may  
not be the same as the actual sound  
currently output from the navigation sys-  
tem.  
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next  
chapter. Touching [o] once skips to the  
start of the current chapter. Touching it twice  
quickly will skip to the previous chapter.  
9 Stops playback  
a Displays the DVD menu  
You can display the menu by touching [Menu]  
or [Top Menu] while a disc is playing. Touch-  
ing either of these keys again lets you start  
playback from the location selected from the  
menu. For details, refer to the instructions pro-  
vided with the disc.  
i Changes the subtitle (Multi-subtitle)  
Each touch of [S.Title] switches between the  
subtitle languages recorded on the disc.  
j Changes the viewing angle (Multi-angle)  
Each touch of [Angle] switches between view-  
ing angles.  
b Resumes playback (Bookmark)  
= For details, refer to Resuming playback  
(Bookmark) on this page.  
c Frame-by-frame playback (or slow-motion  
playback)  
p During playback of a scene shot from  
= For details, refer to Frame-by-frame play-  
back on page 99.  
= For details, refer to Slow motion playback  
on page 99.  
multiple angles, the angle icon  
is  
displayed. Turn the angle icon display  
on or off using the “DVD/DivX® Setup”  
menu.  
d Fast reverse or forward  
= For details, refer to Setting the angle icon  
display on page 105.  
Touch and hold [m] or [n] to perform fast  
reverse or forward.  
If you keep touching [m] or [n] for five  
seconds, fast reverse/fast forward continues  
even if you release either of these keys. To re-  
sume playback at a desired point, touch  
[f] or opposite key of [m] or [n] which  
you touched.  
Resuming playback (Bookmark)  
The Bookmark function lets you resume play-  
back from a selected scene the next time the  
disc is loaded.  
%
Touch [BookM.].  
e Skips the title forward or backward  
Touching [d] skips to the start of the next title.  
Touching [c] skips to the start of the previous  
title.  
f Performs an operation (such as resuming)  
that is stored on the disc  
When using a DVD that has a point recorded  
that indicates where to return to, the DVD re-  
turns to the specified point and begins play-  
back from that point.  
You can bookmark one point for each of up to  
five discs. If you try to memorize another point  
for the same disc, the older bookmark will be  
overwritten by the newer one.  
g Searches for a desired scene and starts  
playback from a specified time  
= For details, refer to Searching for a speci-  
fic scene and starting playback from a  
specified time on the next page.  
h Changes the audio track (Multi-audio)  
p To clear the bookmark on a disc, touch and  
hold [BookM.].  
97  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
19  
Playing a DVD-Video  
3
Touch [0] to [9] to input the desired  
Searching for a specific scene  
and starting playback from a  
specified time  
number.  
4
While the input number is displayed,  
touch [Enter].  
You can search for the scene you want by spe-  
cifying a title or a chapter, and the time.  
p Chapter search and time search are not  
available when disc playback has been  
stopped.  
Operating the DVD menu  
You can operate the DVD menu by touching  
the menu item on the screen directly.  
p This function can be used when the  
key is displayed on the lower right corner of  
the LCD screen.  
p This function may not work properly with  
some DVD disc content. In that case, use  
touch panel keys to operate the DVD menu.  
1
Touch [Search] and then touch [Title]  
(title), [Chapter] (chapter), [Time] (time).  
2
Touch the keys to input the target num-  
ber or time and then touch [Enter].  
p If you touch the screen while  
is dis-  
played, the touch panel keys will not be dis-  
played.  
1
Touch the screen to display the touch  
panel keys.  
2
Touch [Top Menu] or [Menu] to display  
For titles, chapters  
touch panel keys to operate the DVD  
menu.  
!
!
To select 3, touch [3] and [Enter] in order.  
To select 10, touch [1] and [0] and [Enter] in  
order.  
3
#
Touch the desired menu item.  
If you touch , the touch panel keys for  
For time (time search)  
!
!
!
To select 5 minutes 3 seconds, touch [5],  
[min], [3], [sec] and [Enter] in order.  
To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],  
[1], [min] and [Enter] in order.  
To select 100 minutes 05 seconds, touch  
[1], [0], [0], [5], [sec] and [Enter] in order.  
selecting the menu item are displayed.  
Using DVD menu by touch  
panel keys  
If items on the DVD menu appear, the touch  
panel keys may overlay them. If so, select an  
item using those touch panel keys.  
p To cancel an input number, touch [Clear].  
To cancel the input numbers, touch and  
hold [Clear].  
1
Touch [a], [b], [c] or [d] to select the  
desired menu item.  
Direct number search  
You can use this function when you need to  
enter a numerical command during DVD play-  
back.  
1
2
Touch [Search].  
Touch [10Key].  
98  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing a DVD-Video  
19  
p If the touch panel keys for DVD menu selec-  
p Reversed slow motion playback is not possi-  
tion disappear, touching anywhere on the  
ble.  
screen, then touch  
. The touch panel  
keys are displayed again.  
Operating by hardware  
buttons  
Pressing the TRK button  
You can skip chapters forward or backward.  
2
Touch [Enter].  
Playback starts from the selected menu item.  
The way to display the menu differs depending  
on the disc.  
#
If you touch [Position], the display position of  
touch panel keys is changed each time you touch  
it.  
Pressing and holding the TRK button  
You can perform fast reverse or fast for-  
ward.  
#
If you touch [Hide], the touch panel keys dis-  
appear and the icon is displayed. You can  
select a menu item by touching it.  
Using advanced functions  
Frame-by-frame playback  
This lets you move ahead one frame at a time  
during pause.  
%
Touch  
on the “DVD-V” screen.  
The “Function” menu appears.  
1
2
3
%
Touch [r] during pause.  
Each time you touch [r], you move ahead  
one frame.  
p To return to normal playback, touch [f].  
p With some discs, images may be unclear  
during frame-by-frame playback.  
Slow motion playback  
This lets you slow down playback speed.  
1 Changes the repeat range  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting  
as follows:  
1
Touch and hold [r] until  
played during playback.  
The icon is displayed, and forward slow  
is dis-  
!
!
Disc: Plays throughout the current disc.  
Chapter: Repeats just the current chap-  
ter.  
motion playback begins.  
p To return to normal playback, touch [f].  
!
Title: Repeats just the current title.  
p If you perform chapter (title) search, fast  
forward, fast reverse or slow motion  
playback, the repeat play range changes  
to “Disc”.  
p This function is not available when disc  
playback has been stopped.  
2
Touch [q] or [r] to adjust playback  
speed during slow motion playback.  
Each time you touch [q] or [r] it changes  
the speed in four steps in the following order:  
1/16 f 1/8 f 1/4 f 1/2  
2 Selects audio output  
p There is no sound during slow motion play-  
When playing DVDs recorded with LPCM  
audio, you can switch the audio output.  
Touch [L/R Select] repeatedly until the de-  
sired audio output appears on the display.  
back.  
p With some discs, images may be unclear  
during slow motion playback.  
99  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
19  
Playing a DVD-Video  
Each touch of [L/R Select] changes the set-  
tings as follows:  
!
!
!
!
L+R: Left and right  
L: Left  
R: Right  
Mix: Mixing left and right  
p This function is not available when disc  
playback has been stopped.  
3 DVD setup adjustments  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/  
DivX® Setup menu on page 105.  
100  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
Playing a DivX video  
20  
4 Audio channel indicator  
Shows the current audio channel type, such  
as “Mch” (Multi-channel).  
You can play a DivX disc using the built-in  
drive of the navigation system. This section de-  
scribes those operations.  
5 Subtitle number indicator  
Shows the subtitle number currently selected.  
6 Repeat range indicator  
Starting procedure  
Shows which repeat range has been selected.  
= For details, refer to Changes the repeat  
range on page 104.  
1
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 70.  
7 Current time  
8 Digital sound format indicator  
Shows the digital sound format (surround  
sound format) currently selected.  
9 Play time indicator  
Shows the elapsed playing time within the  
current file.  
a Source icon  
2
Insert the disc you want to play into  
disc-loading slot.  
The source changes and then playback will  
start.  
= For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting a  
disc on page 15.  
p If the disc is already set, tap [Disc] on the  
left edge of the screen.  
Shows which source has been selected.  
= For details, refer to Selecting a source on  
page 70.  
3
Use the touch panel keys on the screen  
to control the disc.  
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel  
keys on the next page.  
Reading the screen  
123 4 5  
6
7
8
a
9
1 Folder number indicator  
Shows the folder number currently playing.  
2 Audio track indicator  
Shows the audio track number currently se-  
lected.  
3 File number indicator  
Shows the file number currently playing.  
101  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
20  
Playing a DivX video  
Using the touch panel keys  
Playback screen (page 1)  
1
a
9
8
2
3
4
5
6
7
Playback screen (page 2)  
f
e
d
b
c
p With some discs, the icon 9 may be dis-  
played, meaning that the operation is inva-  
lid.  
1 Switches the media file type played  
When playing a disc containing a mixture of  
various media file types, you can switch be-  
tween media file types to play.  
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer  
on page 175.  
4 Switches the information  
Touching [Disp] changes the content of the in-  
formation panel as follows:  
Disc information display — Current folder  
name display — Current file name display  
5 Switches to the next page of touch panel  
keys  
Tap the key repeatedly to switch between the  
following media file types:  
CD (audio data (CD-DA)) — ROM (com-  
pressed audio file) — DivX (DivX video files)  
2 Displays the “Function” menu  
= For details, refer to Using advanced func-  
tions on page 104.  
6 Playback and Pause  
Touching [f] switches between playback  
and pause.  
7 Hides the touch panel keys and informa-  
tion of the current video  
3 Recalls equalizer curves  
Touching [Hide] shows only the current video.  
102  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing a DivX video  
20  
If you keep touching [m] or [n] for five  
seconds, fast reverse/fast forward continues  
even if you release either of these keys. To re-  
sume playback at a desired point, touch  
[f] or opposite key of [m] or [n] which  
you touched.  
p If you want to display the touch panel  
keys and information of the current  
video again, touch anywhere on the LCD  
screen.  
8 Skips forward or backward  
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next  
file. Touching [o] once skips to the start of  
the current file. Touching it twice quickly will  
skip to the previous file.  
d Changes the subtitle (Multi-subtitle)  
Each touch of [S.Title] switches between the  
subtitle languages recorded on the disc.  
e Changes audio tracks (Multi-audio)  
Each touch of [Audio] switches between  
audio tracks.  
9 Stops playback  
When [g] is touched once to stop playback,  
playback can be resumed from the stopped  
position. When [g] is touched two times to  
stop playback, playback returns to the begin-  
ning.  
f Searches for a desired scene and starts  
playback from a specified time  
= For details, refer to Starting playback  
from a specified time on the next page.  
a Selects a file from the list  
Touching the key displays the list which lets  
you find file names or folder names on a disc.  
p A dash (–) is displayed if there is no cor-  
responding information.  
Frame-by-frame playback  
This lets you move ahead one frame at a time  
during pause.  
Tapping a folder on the list shows its content.  
You can play a file on the list by tapping it.  
%
Touch [r] during pause.  
Each time you touch [r], you move ahead  
one frame.  
p To return to normal playback, touch [f].  
p With some discs, images may be unclear  
during frame-by-frame playback.  
Slow motion playback  
This lets you slow down playback speed.  
= For details, refer to Operating list screens  
(e.g. iPod list screen) on page 70.  
The contents of the folder in which the cur-  
rently playing file is located are displayed.  
Touching displays the content of the upper  
folder (parent folder). If the uppermost folder  
is listed, cannot be used.  
%
Touch and hold [r] until  
played during playback.  
The icon is displayed, and forward slow  
is dis-  
motion playback begins.  
p To return to normal playback, touch [n]  
or [m], etc.  
p There is no sound during slow motion play-  
back.  
p With some discs, images may be unclear  
during slow motion playback.  
p Reversed slow motion playback is not possi-  
ble.  
b Frame-by-frame playback (or slow-motion  
playback)  
= For details, refer to Frame-by-frame play-  
back on this page.  
= For details, refer to Slow motion playback  
on this page.  
c Fast reverse or forward  
Touch and hold [m] or [n] to perform fast  
reverse or forward.  
103  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
20  
Playing a DivX video  
1
2
Starting playback from a  
specified time  
You can search for a desired scene by specify-  
ing the time.  
p Time search are not possible when disc  
playback has been stopped.  
1
Touch [Search].  
2
Touch the keys to input the target num-  
1 Changes the repeat range  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting  
as follows:  
ber or time and then touch [Enter].  
!
!
!
Disc: Plays throughout the current disc.  
File: Repeats just the current file.  
Folder: Repeats just the current folder.  
p If you select another folder during repeat  
play, the repeat play range changes to  
“Disc”.  
p If you perform fast reverse or fast for-  
ward during “File”, the repeat play range  
changes to “Folder”.  
p When “Folder” is selected, it is not pos-  
sible to playback a subfolder of that  
folder.  
!
!
!
To select 5 minutes 3 seconds, touch [5],  
[min], [3], [sec] and [Enter] in order.  
To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],  
[1], [min] and [Enter] in order.  
To select 100 minutes 05 seconds, touch  
[1], [0], [0], [5], [sec] and [Enter] in order.  
p When playing discs with compressed  
audio files and audio data (CD-DA), re-  
peat play is performed within DivX vi-  
deos even if “Disc” is selected.  
2 DVD setup adjustments  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/  
DivX® Setup menu on the next  
page.  
p To cancel an input number, touch [Clear].  
To cancel the input numbers, touch and  
hold [Clear].  
Operating by hardware  
buttons  
Pressing the TRK button  
You can skip files forward or backward.  
Pressing and holding the TRK button  
You can perform fast reverse or fast for-  
ward.  
Using advanced functions  
%
Touch on the “DivX” screen.  
The “Function” menu appears.  
104  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
DVD-Video or DivX setup  
21  
This chapter describes how to configure the  
DVD-Video/DivX player.  
2
Touch [Subtitle Language], [Audio Lan-  
guage] or [Menu Language].  
Each language menu is displayed and the cur-  
rently set language is selected.  
Displaying DVD/DivX® Setup  
3
Touch the desired language.  
menu  
When you select “Others”, a language code  
input display is shown. Input the four-digit  
code of the desired language then touch  
[Enter].  
1
Play the disc that contains DVD-Video  
or DivX.  
= For details, refer to Language code chart for  
DVDs on page 108.  
p If the selected language is not recorded on  
the disc, the default language specified on  
the disc is output and displayed.  
p You can also switch the subtitle and audio  
language by touching [S.Title] or [Audio]  
during playback.  
2
3
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 70.  
Touch  
.
The “Function” menu appears.  
4
Touch [DVD/DivX® Setup].  
The “DVD/DivX® Setup” screen appears.  
Even if you touch [S.Title] or [Audio] to  
switch the subtitle or audio language, this  
setting will not change.  
5
Touch the desired function.  
Setting the angle icon display  
You can set the angle icon  
to display in  
scenes where the angle can be switched.  
1
Display the “DVD/DivX® Setup” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/DivX®  
Setup menu on this page.  
2
Touch [Multi Angle].  
Setting the top-priority  
languages  
You can assign the top-priority language to the  
top-priority subtitle, audio and menu in initial  
playback. If the selected language is recorded  
on the disc, subtitles, audio and menu are dis-  
played or output in that language.  
Each time you touch the key changes the set-  
ting.  
!
On (default):  
Displays the angle icon in scenes where the  
angle can be switched.  
Off:  
!
Hides the angle icon.  
1
Display the “DVD/DivX® Setup” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/DivX®  
Setup menu on this page.  
105  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
21  
DVD-Video or DivX setup  
Setting the aspect ratio  
played. In this case, playback will begin  
when the correct code number is input.  
There are two kinds of displays. A wide screen  
display has a width-to-height ratio (TV aspect)  
of 16:9, while a regular display has a TV aspect  
of 4:3. If you use a regular rear display with a  
TV aspect of 4:3, you can set the aspect ratio  
suitable for your rear display. (We recommend  
use of this function only when you want to fit it  
to the rear display.)  
Setting the code number and level  
When you first use this function, register your  
code number. If you do not register a code  
number, parental lock will not operate.  
1
Display the “DVD/DivX® Setup” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/DivX®  
Setup menu on the previous page.  
p When using a regular display, select either  
“Letter Box” or “Panscan”. Selecting  
“16:9” may result in an unnatural image.  
2
3
Touch [Parental Level].  
1
Display the “DVD/DivX® Setup” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/DivX®  
Setup menu on the previous page.  
Touch [0] to [9] to input a four-digit  
code number.  
4
While the input number is displayed,  
2
Touch [TV Aspect].  
touch [Enter].  
The code number is registered, and you can  
now set the level.  
Each touch of [TV Aspect] changes the setting  
as follows:  
!
!
16:9: Wide screen image (16:9) is displayed  
as it is (initial setting).  
5
Touch any of [1] to [8] to select the de-  
Letter Box: The image is in the shape of a  
letter box with black bands at the top and  
bottom of the screen.  
Panscan: The image is cut short at the right  
and left of the screen.  
sired level.  
The parental lock level is set.  
!
!
Level 8: Playback of the entire disc is possi-  
ble (initial setting).  
!
Level 7 to Level 2: Playback of discs for  
children and non-adult oriented discs is  
possible.  
Level 1: Only playback of discs for children  
is possible.  
p When playing discs that do not have a pan-  
scan system, the disc is played back with  
“Letter Box” even if you select “Panscan”  
setting. Confirm whether the disc package  
!
bears the  
mark.  
p If you want to change the parental level al-  
ready set, enter the registered code number  
and then select the parental level.  
p Some discs do not enable changing of the  
TV aspect. For details, refer to the disc’s in-  
structions.  
p We recommend that you keep a record of  
your code number in case you forget it.  
p The parental lock level is recorded on the  
disc. You can confirm it by looking at the  
disc package, the included literature or the  
disc itself. You cannot use parental lock  
with discs that do not feature a recorded  
parental lock level.  
p With some discs, parental lock operates to  
skip certain scenes only, after which normal  
playback resumes. For details, refer to the  
disc’s instructions.  
Setting the parental lock  
Some DVD-Video discs let you use parental  
lock to set restrictions so that children cannot  
watch violent or adult-oriented scenes. You  
can set the parental lock level in steps as de-  
sired.  
p When you set a parental lock level and then  
play a disc featuring parental lock, code  
number input indications may be dis-  
106  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
DVD-Video or DivX setup  
21  
p If you forget the registered code number,  
p Up to 42 characters can be displayed on  
one line. If more than 42 characters are set,  
the line breaks and the characters are dis-  
played on the next line.  
touch  
10 times on the number input  
screen. The registered code number is can-  
celed, letting you register a new one.  
p Up to 126 characters can be displayed on  
one screen. If more than 126 characters are  
set, the excess characters will not be dis-  
played.  
p The DivX subtitles will be displayed even  
when the subtitle file setting is on if no cor-  
responding subtitle files exist.  
Setting the auto play  
When a DVD disc with DVD menu is inserted,  
this unit will cancel the DVD menu automati-  
cally and start playback from the first chapter  
of the first title.  
p This function is available for DVD-Video.  
p Some DVDs may not operate properly. If  
this function is not fully operable, turn this  
function off and start playback.  
p Up to three subtitle lines can be displayed  
at once.  
1
Display the “DVD/DivX® Setup” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/DivX®  
Setup menu on page 105.  
2
Touch [Auto Play].  
Each touch of [Auto Play] changes the set-  
tings as follows:  
!
!
Off (default):  
Deactivates the auto play function.  
On:  
Activates the auto play function.  
p When “Auto Play” is set to “On”, the repeat  
range is automatically set to “Disc”.  
Setting the subtitle file for  
DivX  
You can select whether to display DivX exter-  
nal subtitles or not.  
p If no DivX external subtitle files exist, the  
original DivX subtitles are displayed even  
when “Custom” is selected.  
1
Display the “DVD/DivX® Setup” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/DivX®  
Setup menu on page 105.  
2
Touch [Subtitle File].  
Touching [Subtitle File] switches this setting  
between “Original” and “Custom”.  
107  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
21  
DVD-Video or DivX setup  
Language code chart for DVDs  
Two-letter  
code,  
Two-letter  
code,  
Two-letter  
code,  
Language  
Language  
Language  
input code  
aa, 0101  
ab, 0102  
af, 0106  
am, 0113  
ar, 0118  
as, 0119  
ay, 0125  
az, 0126  
ba, 0201  
be, 0205  
bg, 0207  
bh, 0208  
bi, 0209  
bn, 0214  
bo, 0215  
br, 0218  
ca, 0301  
co, 0315  
cs, 0319  
cy, 0325  
da, 0401  
de, 0405  
dz, 0426  
ee, 0505  
el, 0512  
en, 0514  
eo, 0515  
es, 0519  
et, 0520  
eu, 0521  
fa, 0601  
fi, 0609  
input code  
ia, 0901  
ie, 0905  
ik, 0911  
in, 0914  
is, 0919  
it, 0920  
input code  
rn, 1814  
ro, 1815  
ru, 1821  
rw, 1823  
sa, 1901  
sd, 1904  
sg, 1907  
sh, 1908  
si, 1909  
sk, 1911  
sl, 1912  
sm, 1913  
sn, 1914  
so, 1915  
sq, 1917  
sr, 1918  
ss, 1919  
st, 1920  
su, 1921  
sv, 1922  
sw, 1923  
ta, 2001  
te, 2005  
tg, 2007  
th, 2008  
ti, 2009  
Afar  
Interlingua  
Interlingue  
Inupiaq  
Indonesian  
Icelandic  
Italian  
Japanese  
Yiddish  
Javanese  
Georgian  
Kazakh  
Kalaallisut  
Central Khmer  
Kannada  
Korean  
Kashmiri  
Kurdish  
Kirghiz; Kyrgyz  
Latin  
Lingala  
Lao  
Lithuanian  
Latvian  
Malagasy  
Maori  
Macedonian  
Malayalam  
Mongolian  
Moldavian  
Marathi  
Rundi  
Abkhazian  
Afrikaans  
Amharic  
Arabic  
Assamese  
Aymara  
Azerbaijani  
Bashkir  
Belarusian  
Bulgarian  
Bihari  
Bislama  
Bengali  
Tibetan  
Breton  
Catalan  
Corsican  
Czech  
Romanian  
Russian  
Kinyarwanda  
Sanskrit  
Sindhi  
ja, 1001  
ji, 1009  
Sango  
Serbo-Croatian  
Sinhala  
Slovak  
Slovenian  
Samoan  
Shona  
Somali  
Albanian  
Serbian  
Swati  
Sotho, Southern  
Sundanese  
Swedish  
Swahili  
Tamil  
jw, 1023  
ka, 1101  
kk, 1111  
kl, 1112  
km, 1113  
kn, 1114  
ko, 1115  
ks, 1119  
ku, 1121  
ky, 1125  
la, 1201  
ln, 1214  
lo, 1215  
lt, 1220  
Welsh  
Danish  
German  
Dzongkha  
Ewe  
lv, 1222  
Telugu  
Tajik  
Thai  
mg, 1307  
mi, 1309  
mk, 1311  
ml, 1312  
mn, 1314  
mo, 1315  
mr, 1318  
ms, 1319  
mt, 1320  
my, 1325  
na, 1401  
ne, 1405  
nl, 1412  
no, 1415  
oc, 1503  
om, 1513  
or, 1518  
pa, 1601  
pl, 1612  
ps, 1619  
pt, 1620  
qu, 1721  
rm, 1813  
Greek  
English  
Esperanto  
Spanish  
Estonian  
Basque  
Persian  
Finnish  
Fijian  
Faroese  
French  
Western Frisian  
Irish  
Tigrinya  
Turkmen  
Tagalog  
Tswana  
Tonga  
Turkish  
Tsonga  
Tatar  
tk, 2011  
tl, 2012  
tn, 2014  
to, 2015  
tr, 2018  
Malay  
Maltese  
Burmese  
Nauru  
Nepali  
Dutch; Flemish  
Norwegian  
Occitan  
Oromo  
Oriya  
ts, 2019  
tt, 2020  
fj, 0610  
fo, 0615  
fr, 0618  
tw, 2023  
uk, 2111  
ur, 2118  
uz, 2126  
vi, 2209  
vo, 2215  
wo, 2315  
Twi  
Ukrainian  
Urdu  
fy, 0625  
ga, 0701  
gd, 0704  
gl, 0712  
gn, 0714  
gu, 0721  
ha, 0801  
hi, 0809  
hr, 0818  
hu, 0821  
hy, 0825  
Uzbek  
Gaelic  
Vietnamese  
Volapuk  
Wolof  
Xhosa  
Yoruba  
Galician  
Guarani  
Gujarati  
Hausa  
Panjabi; Punjabi xh, 2408  
Polish  
yo, 2515  
zh, 2608  
zu, 2621  
Hindi  
Pushto; Pashto  
Portuguese  
Quechua  
Chinese  
Zulu  
Croatian  
Hungarian  
Armenian  
Romansh  
108  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing music files (from USB or SD)  
22  
You can play the compressed audio files  
stored in the external storage device (USB,  
SD).  
Reading the screen  
2
3
p In the following description, the SD mem-  
ory card and USB memory device are col-  
lectively referred to as the “external storage  
device (USB, SD)”. If it indicates the USB  
memory device only, it is referred to as the  
“USB storage device”.  
4
5
1
Starting procedure  
p This unit may not achieve optimum perfor-  
mance with some external storage devices.  
p You can playback the files on a USB sto-  
rage device compliant with Mass Storage  
Class. For details about the USB Class,  
refer to the manual supplied with the USB  
storage device.  
1
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 70.  
2
Insert the SD memory card into the SD  
card slot or plug the USB storage device  
into the USB connector.  
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Playback condition indicator  
Indicates the current playback condition.  
= For details, refer to Plugging in a USB sto-  
rage device on page 19.  
= For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting an  
SD memory card on page 16.  
Scanning folders and files  
p Playback is performed in order of folder  
numbers. Folders are skipped if they con-  
tain no playable files. If there are no play-  
able files in folder 01 (root folder), playback  
starts from folder 02.  
Indicator  
Meaning  
Cancels the scan play.  
Plays the first audio files of each  
folder for about 10 seconds  
when the repeat range is set to  
“Media”.  
3
Tap [USB] or [SD] on the left edge of  
Plays the beginning of each  
audio file in the current folder  
for about 10 seconds when the  
repeat range is set to “Folder”.  
the screen to display the “USB” or “SD”  
screen.  
4
Use the touch panel keys on the screen  
to control the external storage device  
(USB, SD).  
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel  
keys (Music) on page 111.  
Playing files in random order  
Indicator  
Meaning  
Does not play files in random  
order.  
Plays all audio files in the cur-  
rent repeat play range in ran-  
dom order.  
109  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
22  
Playing music files (from USB or SD)  
Setting a repeat play range  
Indicator  
Meaning  
Repeats all compressed audio  
files in the selected external sto-  
rage device (USB, SD).  
Repeats just the current file.  
Repeats the current folder.  
3 Current file information  
!
!
!
!
: Folder name  
Shows the folder name currently play-  
ing.  
: Artist name  
Shows the artist name currently playing  
(when available).  
: Album title  
Shows the title of the album of the cur-  
rent file (when available).  
: Track title  
Shows the title of the track currently  
playing (when available).  
p If the title of a track is not available,  
the file name appears.  
Play time  
!
Shows the elapsed playing time within  
the current file.  
p “-------” is displayed if there is no corre-  
sponding information.  
4 Current time  
5 File information  
!
!
!
File number indicator  
File name indicator  
File type indicator  
Shows the type of audio files.  
110  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
Playing music files (from USB or SD)  
22  
Using the touch panel keys (Music)  
1
2
3
9
8
4
7
6
5
1 Scans folders and files  
6 Displays the “Function” menu  
Scan play is performed by touching only one  
key.  
= For details, refer to Using advanced func-  
tions on the next page.  
= For details of the operation, refer to  
Scans folders and files on the next  
page.  
7 Playback and Pause  
Touching [f] switches between playback  
and pause.  
2 Plays files in random order  
The files in the current repeat play range can  
be played at random by touching only one key.  
= For details of the operation, refer to  
Plays files in random order on the  
next page.  
8 Selects a file from the list  
Touching the key displays the list which lets  
you find track titles or folder names on an ex-  
ternal storage device (USB, SD).  
Tapping a folder on the list shows its content.  
You can play a file on the list by tapping it.  
3 Sets a repeat play range  
The repeat play range can be changed by  
touching only one key.  
= For details, refer to Changes the repeat  
range on the next page.  
4 Selects a file to play  
Scrolling the keys up or down displays files,  
and tapping a file starts playback.  
Tapping the lower key during random play-  
back skips to the next file. Tapping the upper  
key jumps to the start of the current file.  
5 Recalls equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Operating list screens  
(e.g. iPod list screen) on page 70.  
Touching displays the content of the upper  
folder (parent folder). If the uppermost folder  
is listed, cannot be used.  
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer  
on page 175.  
111  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
22  
Playing music files (from USB or SD)  
9 Switches the operation screen  
Tapping this key switches between the screen  
to operate music files and the screen to oper-  
ate video files. This touch panel key is avail-  
able only when there are both audio and video  
files in the external storage device (USB,  
SD).  
Random play lets you playback files in ran-  
dom order within the current repeat range.  
Each touch of [Random] turns it on or off.  
p If you turn the random play on when the  
repeat play range is set to “Track”, the  
repeat play range changes to “Folder”  
automatically.  
3 Scans folders and files  
Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds  
of each file. Scan play is performed in the  
current repeat play range.  
Each touch of [Scan] turns it on or off.  
When you find the file you want, touch  
[Scan] to turn the scan play off.  
Operating by hardware  
buttons  
Pressing the TRK button  
You can skip files forward or backward.  
p After all files or folders scanning are fin-  
ished, normal playback will begin again.  
p If you turn the scan play on when the re-  
peat play range is set to “Track”, the re-  
peat play range changes to “Folder”  
automatically.  
Pressing and holding the TRK button  
You can perform fast reverse or fast for-  
ward.  
Using advanced functions  
%
Touch on the “USB” or “SD” screen.  
The “Function” menu appears.  
1
2
3
1 Changes the repeat range  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting  
as follows:  
!
Media: Repeats all compressed audio  
files in the selected external storage de-  
vice (USB, SD).  
!
!
Track: Repeats just the current file.  
Folder: Repeats the current folder.  
p If you skip the file forward or backward  
when the repeat play range in “Track”,  
the repeat play range changes to  
“Folder”.  
2 Plays files in random order  
112  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing video files (from USB or SD)  
23  
You can play the video files stored in the exter-  
nal storage device (USB, SD).  
Reading the screen  
1 2 3  
4
5
p In the following description, the SD mem-  
ory card and USB memory device are col-  
lectively referred to as the “external storage  
device (USB, SD)”. If it indicates the USB  
memory device only, it is referred to as the  
“USB storage device”.  
6
8
Starting procedure  
7
1
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 70.  
p This unit may not achieve optimum perfor-  
mance with some external storage devices.  
p You can playback the files on a USB sto-  
rage device compliant with Mass Storage  
Class. For details about the USB Class,  
refer to the manual supplied with the USB  
storage device.  
2
Insert the SD memory card into the SD  
card slot or plug the USB storage device  
into the USB connector.  
= For details, refer to Plugging in a USB sto-  
rage device on page 19.  
1 Folder number indicator  
= For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting an  
SD memory card on page 16.  
2 File number indicator  
3 Current folder name indicator  
Shows the folder name currently playing.  
4 File name indicator  
Shows the file name currently playing.  
5 Current time  
p Playback is performed in order of folder  
numbers. Folders are skipped if they con-  
tain no playable files. If there are no play-  
able files in folder 01 (root folder), playback  
starts from folder 02.  
6 File type indicator  
Shows the type of audio file currently playing.  
7 Play time indicator  
3
Tap [USB] or [SD] on the left edge of  
the screen to display the “USB” or “SD”  
screen.  
Shows the elapsed playing time within the  
current file.  
8 Source icon  
4
Touch the screen to display the touch  
Shows which source has been selected.  
panel keys.  
5
Use the touch panel keys on the screen  
to control the external storage device  
(USB, SD).  
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel  
keys (Video) on the next page.  
113  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
23  
Playing video files (from USB or SD)  
Using the touch panel keys (Video)  
1
9
8
7
2
3
4
5
6
1 Switches the operation screen  
Tapping this key switches between the screen  
to operate music files and the screen to oper-  
ate video files. This touch panel key is avail-  
able only when there are both audio and video  
files in the external storage device (USB, SD).  
2 Displays the “Function” menu  
= For details, refer to Using advanced func-  
tions on the next page.  
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next  
file. Touching [o] once skips to the start of  
the current file. Touching it twice quickly will  
skip to the previous file.  
Fast reverse or forward  
Touch and hold [o] or [p] to fast reverse  
or fast forward.  
p There is no sound on fast reverse or for-  
ward.  
3 Recalls equalizer curves  
8 Selects a file from the list  
You can select and play the title you want from  
the list.  
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer  
on page 175.  
4 Searches for a desired scene and starts  
playback from a specified time  
= For details, refer to Searching for a speci-  
fic scene and starting playback from a  
specified time on the next page.  
5 Playback and Pause  
Touching [f] switches between playback  
and pause.  
6 Hides the touch panel keys and informa-  
tion of the current video  
= For details, refer to Operating list screens  
(e.g. iPod list screen) on page 70.  
The contents of the folder in which the cur-  
rently playing file is located are displayed.  
Touching displays the content of the upper  
folder (parent folder). If the uppermost folder  
is listed, cannot be used.  
Touching [Hide] shows only the current video.  
p If you want to display the touch panel  
keys and information of the current  
video again, touch anywhere on the LCD  
screen.  
7 Skips forward or backward  
114  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing video files (from USB or SD)  
23  
9 Stops playback  
Using advanced functions  
1
Tap [USB] or [SD] on the left edge of  
Searching for a specific scene  
and starting playback from a  
specified time  
You can search for a desired scene by specify-  
ing the time.  
the screen to display the “USB” or “SD”  
screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 70.  
2
Touch the screen to display the touch  
panel keys.  
1
Touch [Search].  
3
Touch  
.
2
Touch the keys to input the target num-  
The “Function” menu appears.  
p If the touch panel keys are not shown,  
touch anywhere on the screen to display  
them.  
ber or time and then touch [Enter].  
1
2
!
!
!
To select 5 minutes 3 seconds, touch [5],  
[min], [3], [sec] and [Enter] in order.  
To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],  
[1], [min] and [Enter] in order.  
To select 100 minutes 05 seconds, touch  
[1], [0], [0], [5], [sec] and [Enter] in order.  
1 Changes the repeat range  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting  
as follows:  
p To cancel an input number, touch [Clear].  
To cancel the input numbers, touch and  
hold [Clear].  
!
Media: Repeats all video files in the se-  
lected external storage device (USB,  
SD).  
!
!
File: Repeats just the current file.  
Folder: Repeats the current folder.  
Operating by hardware  
buttons  
Pressing the TRK button  
You can skip files forward or backward.  
p If you skip the file forward or backward  
when the repeat play range in “File”, the  
repeat play range changes to “Folder”.  
2 Changes the screen size of video  
If a video file is played, you can select the  
display mode between normal and full  
screen.  
Pressing and holding the TRK button  
You can perform fast reverse or fast for-  
ward.  
Each touch of [Video Output Setting]  
changes the setting as follows:  
!
Normal: Enlarges the display size while  
maintaining the aspect ratio.  
Full: Displays the image full-screen  
although the aspect ratio may be  
changed.  
!
115  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
24  
Using an iPod (iPod)  
Using the USB interface cable for iPod en-  
ables you to connect your iPod to the naviga-  
tion system.  
Video  
1
7
3
p A USB interface cable for iPod (CD-IU51V)  
(sold separately) is required for connection.  
6
Starting procedure  
1
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 70.  
7
1 Playback condition indicator  
2
Connect your iPod.  
Indicates the current playback condition.  
The source changes and then playback will  
start.  
Setting the shuffle play  
= For details, refer to Connecting your iPod on  
page 20.  
Indicator  
Meaning  
p If the iPod is already connected, tap [iPod]  
on the left edge of the screen.  
Cancels the shuffle play.  
Plays back songs or videos in  
random order within the se-  
lected list.  
= For details, refer to Selecting a source  
on page 70.  
p If no video is output when iPod is selected  
as AV source, check the setting in “AV1  
Input” on the “AV System Settings” menu.  
= For details, refer to Setting video input 1  
(AV1) on page 170.  
Selects an album randomly, and  
then plays back all songs in that  
album in order.  
The actions while this indicator  
is displayed on the video opera-  
tion screen vary depending on  
the connected iPod.  
3
Use the touch panel keys on the screen  
to control your iPod.  
= For details of the operation, refer to Using  
the touch panel keys on page 118.  
Setting a repeat play range  
Indicator  
Meaning  
Repeats all songs or videos in  
the selected list.  
Reading the screen  
Music  
Repeats just the current song or  
video.  
1
2
2 Current song (episode) information  
3
4
!
!
!
: Artist name (podcast title)  
Shows the artist name currently playing.  
When a podcast is played, the podcast  
title is displayed (when available).  
: Album title (release date)  
Shows the title of the album for the  
song. When a podcast is played, the re-  
lease date is displayed (when available).  
: Song title (episode)  
6
5
116  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using an iPod (iPod)  
24  
Shows the title of the current song.  
When a podcast is played, the episode  
is displayed (when available).  
p If characters recorded on the iPod are not  
compatible with this navigation system,  
they may turn into garbled characters.  
!
!
: Chapter number  
Shows the current chapter number and  
total number of chapters when the file  
with chapters played (when available).  
Play time  
Shows the elapsed playing time within  
the current song (episode).  
p “-------” is displayed if there is no corre-  
sponding information.  
3 Current time  
4 Song (episode) information  
!
Song number indicator  
Shows the number of the song and the  
total number of songs in the selected  
list.  
!
!
Song title (episode) indicator  
Album artwork  
Album art of the current song is dis-  
played if it is available.  
5 Genre indicator  
Shows the genre of the current song.  
6 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
7 Current video information  
!
: Chapter number  
Shows the current chapter number  
when the video with chapters played  
(when available).  
!
: Artist name (podcast title)  
Shows the artist name currently playing.  
When a podcast is played, the podcast  
title is displayed (when available).  
: File number indicator  
Shows the number of the file currently  
playing (when available).  
File name indicator  
!
!
!
Shows the file name currently playing  
(when available).  
Play time indicator  
Shows the elapsed playing time within  
the current file.  
p “-------” is displayed if there is no corre-  
sponding information.  
117  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
24  
Using an iPod (iPod)  
Using the touch panel keys  
Music  
1
2
3
f
e
d
c
4
b
a
9
8
7
6
5
Video  
f
e
g
9
8
i
6
a
h
1 Sets the shuffle play for music  
The repeat play range can be changed by  
touching only one key.  
= For details, refer to Sets repeat play on  
page 122.  
The shuffle play setting can be changed by  
touching only one key.  
= For details, refer to Sets the shuffle  
play for music on page 123.  
3 Displays the “MusicSphere” screen  
2 Sets a repeat play range  
118  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using an iPod (iPod)  
24  
Touching the key displays the MusicSphere  
screen, and a playlist created with the PC ap-  
plication (MusicSphere) can be played.  
= For details, refer to Playing Music-  
Sphere on page 122.  
= For details of the operation, refer to  
Starting the video playback on the next  
page.  
p This touch panel key is available only  
when there are both audio and video file  
in your iPod.  
4 Selects a song to play  
Scrolling the keys up or down displays songs,  
and tapping a song starts playback.  
Tapping the lower key during shuffle playback  
skips to the next song. Tapping the upper key  
once skip to the start of the current song. Tap-  
ping it again will skip to the previous song.  
When the song with chapters played, chapter  
can be skipped back and forward.  
5 Displays the genre list  
p If iPod fifth generation is connected, the  
following settings are automatically  
changed when the operation screen is  
switched to the one to operate video  
files.  
!
!
“Repeat” is set to “All”.  
“Shuffle” is set to “Off”.  
p Touching [Video] or [Music] on the list  
screens enables you to perform the  
equivalent operation.  
6 Switches the control mode of iPod func-  
tions  
Touching the key lets you control the functions  
of an iPod connected to the navigation system  
from the iPod.  
= For details, refer to Operating the func-  
tions from your iPod on page 121.  
7 Displays the top category menu  
Touching the key displays the top category for  
song playback.  
Displays the previously selected list  
If you select the song from the list to play after  
touching , touching the key displays the pre-  
vious list.  
f Displays the top category menu  
Touching the key displays the top category  
menu for song or video playback.  
g Skips back or forward to another video  
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next  
video. Touching [o] once skips to the start  
of the current video. Touching again will skip  
to the previous video. When the video with  
chapters played, chapter can be skipped back  
and forward.  
8 Recalls equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer  
on page 175.  
9 Displays the “Function” menu  
= For details, refer to Using advanced func-  
tions on page 122.  
a Playback and Pause  
Fast reverse or forward  
Touching [f] switches between playback  
and pause.  
Touch and hold [o] or [p] to fast reverse  
or fast forward.  
b Displays the song list  
c Displays the album list  
d Displays the artist list  
e Switches the operation screen  
Tapping this key displays the touch panel key  
([Video] or [Music]) to switch between the  
screen to operate video files and the screen to  
operate music files.  
If you keep touching [o] or [p] for five  
seconds, fast reverse/fast forward continues  
even if you release either of these keys. To re-  
sume playback at a desired point, touch  
[f], [o] or [p].  
h Hides the touch panel keys and informa-  
tion of the current video  
Touching [Hide] shows only the current video.  
119  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
24  
Using an iPod (iPod)  
p If you want to display the touch panel  
keys and information of the current  
video again, touch anywhere on the LCD  
screen.  
3
Tap one of the categories in that con-  
tains the video you want to play.  
i Displays the top category menu for video  
Touching the key displays the top category for  
video playback.  
Displays the previously selected list  
If you select the video from the list to play  
after touching , touching the key displays  
the previous list.  
4
Tap your desired item on the list to nar-  
row down them until the video list ap-  
pears.  
= For details, refer to Narrowing down a song  
or video with the list on this page.  
Operating by hardware  
buttons  
Pressing the TRK button  
You can skip songs, videos or podcasts for-  
ward or backward.  
When the song, video or podcast with chapter  
played, you can skip chapter forward or back-  
ward.  
5
On the video list, tap the video you  
want to play.  
Video playback will start.  
6
Touch the screen to display the touch  
panel keys.  
= For details of the operation, refer to Using  
the touch panel keys on page 118.  
Pressing and holding the TRK button  
You can perform fast reverse or fast for-  
ward.  
Narrowing down a song or  
video with the list  
Starting the video playback  
Tapping an item on list allows you to search  
for a song or video and play it in your iPod.  
This navigation system can play video if an  
iPod with video capabilities is connected.  
1
Display a list screen.  
1
Touch [iPod] on the left edge of the  
= For details, refer to Displays the genre list  
on the previous page.  
screen to display the touch panel key to  
switch to a video source.  
= For details, refer to Displays the song list  
on the previous page.  
2
Tap [Music].  
= For details, refer to Displays the album  
list on the previous page.  
= For details, refer to Displays the artist list  
on the previous page.  
#
If you touch , the top category menu screen  
is displayed. Tap the category of your preference.  
A list of videos by category appears.  
120  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using an iPod (iPod)  
24  
5
On the song (episode) or video list, tap  
the song (episode) or video you want to  
play.  
p After you select the song (episode) or video  
using this function, touching  
the list previously selected.  
displays  
Operating the functions  
from your iPod  
You can control the navigation system via the  
connected iPod. When you change the screen  
of the navigation system to “Application  
Mode”, sound is output from the speakers of  
your vehicle.  
2
Scroll by dragging tabs up or down to  
display the character that you want to re-  
fine.  
In the “Application Mode” screen, the follow-  
ing operations are available from this naviga-  
tion system.  
!
!
!
!
Playback and Pause  
Fast reverse or forward  
Skip forward or backward  
Adjusting the volume  
Character tabs  
3
Tap the tab to select the character and  
display the page which includes applicable  
options.  
p An article listed below and space at the be-  
ginning of the artist name will be ignored  
and the next character will be taken into ac-  
count for searching.  
%
Touch  
to switch the mode.  
The “Application Mode” screen appears.  
= For details, refer to Switches the control  
mode of iPod functions on page 119.  
!
!
!
“A” or “a”  
“AN”, “An”, or “an”  
“THE”, “The”, or “the”  
4
Scroll the list by dragging items up or  
down to display the item you want to se-  
lect.  
Refine the item until the song title (episode) is  
displayed on the list.  
p Tapping [All] on the list includes all options  
in the current list. For example, if you tap  
[All] after tapping [Artists], you can pro-  
ceed to the next screen with all artists in  
the list selected.  
1
2
1 Switches to the normal mode.  
2 Operates the iPod.  
The operations activated by touching vary  
depending on the connected iPod.  
p After you select artists, albums, genres,  
podcasts, or composers, go on to touch  
and hold one of the list to start playing the  
first song in the selected list and display the  
next hierarchy.  
121  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
24  
Using an iPod (iPod)  
Using the touch panel keys  
Playing MusicSphere  
You can play playlists created with the PC ap-  
plication (MusicSphere) using an exciting gra-  
phic interface.  
p PC application (MusicSphere) will be avail-  
able on our website.  
2
Starting procedure  
1
1
Display the music operation screen of  
the iPod.  
1 Switches to the AV operation screen  
2 Plays the playlist  
= For details of the operation, refer to Starting  
procedure on page 127.  
Tapping a key moves the playlist to the center  
of the screen, and tapping the center key  
starts playback.  
p To change the playlist to be displayed,  
rotate the sphere by dragging the keys  
up, down, left, or right.  
2
Touch  
.
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
plays the “MusicSphere” screen on page  
118.  
Reading the screen  
Using advanced functions  
3
4
%
Touch  
on the “iPod” screen.  
The “Function” menu appears.  
1
2
p This menu is not available when you  
change the screen of the navigation system  
to “Application Mode”.  
3
5
= For details, refer to Operating the functions  
from your iPod on the previous page.  
1
2
3
4
1 Category name and total number of songs  
Shows the category name and the total num-  
ber of playable songs in the playlist currently  
selected.  
2 Song title indicator  
Shows six songs including the first song  
played after selecting the playlist.  
3 Playlist name indicator  
Shows the name of the playlist currently se-  
lected.  
5
1 Sets repeat play  
4 Current time  
5 Category name  
There are two repeat play types for play-  
Shows the category name in the playlist.  
back.  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting  
as follows:  
122  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using an iPod (iPod)  
24  
!
!
All: Repeats all songs or videos in the  
selected list.  
One: Repeats just the current song or  
video.  
!
!
Link Albums: Songs related to the cur-  
rently playing album will be played.  
Link Genres: Songs related to the cur-  
rently playing genre will be played in the  
artist order.  
2 Sets the shuffle play for music  
This function shuffles songs or albums and  
plays them in random order.  
Each touch of [Shuffle] changes the setting  
as follows:  
!
!
Off: Does not shuffle.  
Songs: Plays back songs or videos in  
random order within the selected list.  
Albums: Selects an album randomly,  
and then plays back all songs in that  
album in order.  
!
3 Sets the audiobook play speed  
While listening to an audiobook on iPod,  
playback speed can be changed.  
Each touch of [Audio Book] changes the  
setting as follows:  
!
!
Normal: Playback in normal speed  
Faster: Playback faster than normal  
speed  
!
Slower: Playback slower than normal  
speed  
4 Plays video in wide screen mode  
If the video is compatible with wide screen  
format, set “Widescreen” to “On” in order  
to view the video image in the wide screen.  
Each touch of [Widescreen] changes the  
setting as follows:  
!
On: Outputs the wide-screen video from  
an iPod.  
!
Off: Outputs the normal-sized video  
from an iPod.  
p Display size is changed after you  
change “Widescreen” setting and select  
the video to play.  
p This setting is available only during the  
video operation.  
5 Plays songs related to the currently  
playing song  
You can play songs related to the currently  
playing song, using of the following lists.  
!
Link Artists: Songs related to the cur-  
rently playing artist will be played in the  
album order.  
123  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
®
25  
Using Pandora  
You can experience Pandora by connecting an  
iPod that has the Pandora application in-  
stalled.  
p Be sure to read Using App-based Connected  
Contents before you perform this opera-  
tion.  
2
3
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 70.  
Connect your iPod.  
The source changes and then playback will  
start.  
= For details, refer to Using App-based  
Connected Contents on page 217.  
= For details, refer to Connecting your iPod on  
page 20.  
Note:  
p If the iPod is already connected, tap  
[Pandora] on the left edge of the screen.  
= For details, refer to Selecting a source on  
page 70.  
!
Certain functionality of the Pandora service is  
not available when accessing the service  
through the Pioneer navigation system, in-  
cluding, but not limited to, creating new sta-  
tions, deleting stations, emailing current  
stations, buying songs from iTunes, viewing  
additional text information, logging in to  
Pandora, and adjusting Cell Network Audio  
Quality.  
4
Tap [Pandora] on the left side of the  
screen to display “Pandora” screen.  
5
Use the touch panel keys on the screen  
to control the Pandora.  
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel  
keys on page 126.  
!
!
Pandora Internet radio is a music service not  
affiliated with Pioneer. More information is  
available at http://www.pandora.com.  
A specific version of the Pandora iPhone ap-  
plication is required to be installed on your  
iPhone in order to enjoy Pandora Internet  
Radio on this navigation system.  
Reading the screen  
1
2
Because the application for the iPhone is not  
provided by Pioneer, the required version of  
the application may not yet be available at the  
time of purchase of the navigation system.  
Availability, version and update information  
can be found at  
4
3
http://www.pioneerelectronics.com/pandora  
1 Current song information  
!
Station name indicator  
Shows the Pandora station name the  
tuner is currently tuned in.  
: Artist name  
Shows the artist name currently playing.  
: Album title  
Shows the title of the album of the cur-  
rent song.  
: Song title  
Starting procedure  
1
Start up the Pandora application in-  
!
!
stalled on the iPod.  
p In some iPod modes, selecting a source  
may start up an iPod application. If the mes-  
sage “Start up the application from your  
Device.” appears, start up the application  
from your iPod.  
!
!
Shows the title of the current song.  
Play time indicator  
p Before starting up, sign-in to Pandora from  
your iPod.  
124  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
®
Using Pandora  
25  
Shows the elapsed playing time within  
the current song.  
p “-------” is displayed if there is no corre-  
sponding information.  
2 Current time  
3 Album artwork  
Album art of the current song is displayed if it  
is available.  
4 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
125  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
®
25  
Using Pandora  
Using the touch panel keys  
1
6
5
4
3
2
1 Selects a Pandora station from the list  
Touching the key displays the list of your  
Pandora stations to select one of them to play.  
!
:
You can sort the items in the list in  
order of dates the items were cre-  
ated.  
2 Thumbs Up  
Touching the key gives “Thumbs Up” to the  
song currently playing.  
3 Thumbs Down  
Touching the key gives “Thumbs Down” to the  
song currently playing and skip to the next  
song.  
4 Bookmark  
Touching the key displays the screen which  
lets you select the artist or song to add book-  
marks.  
= For details, refer to Operating list screens  
(e.g. iPod list screen) on page 70.  
Scroll the list by dragging items up or down to  
display the item you want to select.  
p Touching [QuickMix] plays only one  
song based on particular musical char-  
acteristics at a time from shuffled sev-  
eral stations.  
5 Recalls equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer  
on page 175.  
6 Playback and Pause  
Touching [f] switches between playback  
and pause.  
p Each time you touch [List] changes the  
sort order.  
Current order is indicated on the upper  
right of the screen.  
Operating by hardware  
buttons  
Pressing the TRK button  
You can skip the song forward.  
!
:
You can sort the items in the list al-  
phabetically.  
126  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using Aha Radio  
26  
Device.” appears, start up the application  
from your iPod.  
p Before starting up, sign-in to Aha Radio  
from your iPod.  
When connecting iPod with the Aha Radio in-  
stalled, you can control, view, and/or hear Aha  
Radio content from this navigation system.  
You can also display POI information from the  
Aha Radio application on the map screen and  
route to these POIs.  
p For details concerning operations, refer to  
the Help and Tips section within the Aha  
Radio application.  
2
3
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 70.  
Connect your iPod.  
p Aha Radio stations may require initial  
setup or sign-in before the station can be  
accessed.  
p Be sure to read Using App-based Connected  
Contents before you perform this opera-  
tion.  
The source changes and then playback will  
start.  
= For details, refer to Connecting your iPod on  
page 20.  
p If the iPod is already connected, tap [aha]  
on the left edge of the screen.  
= For details, refer to Selecting a source on  
page 70.  
= For details, refer to Using App-based  
Connected Contents on page 217.  
Note:  
4
Tap [aha] on the left side of the screen  
to display the “aha” screen.  
!
Certain functionality of the Aha Radio service  
may not be available when accessing the ser-  
vice through the Pioneer navigation system,  
including, but not limited to, creating new  
Aha stations, deleting Aha stations, recording  
‘shouts’ by voice, adjusting Aha Radio App  
settings, logging into Facebook, creating a Fa-  
cebook account, logging into Twitter, or creat-  
ing a Twitter account.  
5
Use the touch panel keys on the screen  
to control the Aha Radio.  
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel  
keys on page 129.  
!
!
Aha Radio is a service not affiliated with  
Pioneer. More information is available at  
http://www.ahamobile.com.  
A specific version of the Aha Radio applica-  
tion is required to be installed on your iPhone  
in order to enjoy Aha Radio content on this na-  
vigation system.  
Because the application for the iPhone is not  
provided by Pioneer, the required version of  
the application may not yet be available at the  
time of purchase of the navigation system.  
Availability, version and update information  
can be found at  
http://www.pioneerelectronics.com/aharadio  
Starting procedure  
1
Start up the Aha Radio application in-  
stalled on the iPod.  
p In some iPod modes, selecting a source  
may start up an iPod application. If the mes-  
sage “Start up the application from your  
127  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
26  
Using Aha Radio  
Reading the screen  
1
2
3
4
1 Current station information  
Shows which source has been selected.  
!
Station name  
Shows the name of the Aha Radio sta-  
tion that the navigation system is cur-  
rently tuned to.  
!
Detailed information  
Shows the information on the content  
currently being played.  
p “-------” is displayed if there is no  
corresponding information.  
Rating information  
!
Shows the rated value of the current  
content displayed (only when and where  
applicable).  
2 Current time  
3 Content image  
Displays an image of the current content if  
one is available.  
4 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
128  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using Aha Radio  
26  
Using the touch panel keys  
1
2
3
6
5
4
1 Selects an Aha Radio station from the list  
Touching this key displays the list of your avail-  
able Aha Radio stations. Touch the desired  
Aha Radio station to change Aha sources.  
4 Performs additional functions of each sta-  
tion or content currently playing  
p The icons displayed vary depending on  
each station or content.  
Indicator  
Meaning  
Touching the key discloses the  
current car location through  
Aha Radio.  
Touching the key retweets the  
selected tweets with your Twitter  
account.  
Touching the key performs fast  
reverse of the current content  
for 30 seconds.  
= For details of the list operations, refer to  
Operating list screens (e.g. iPod list  
screen) on page 70.  
Touching the key sends you to  
the Location confirmation  
screen the selected POI to  
search for the desired route.  
Scroll the list by dragging items up or down to  
display the item you want to select.  
2 Playback and pause (or stop)  
Touch [d] to start playback. Touching [e] dur-  
ing playback, pauses or stops playback.  
p Pause (or stop) key functionality de-  
pends on the content.  
=
For the subsequent opera-  
tions, refer to Setting a route  
to your destination on page  
42.  
Touching the key “likes” current  
content.  
3 Selects content to play  
Scrolling the keys up or down displays avail-  
able content while tapping a key starts play-  
back.  
129  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
26  
Using Aha Radio  
Displaying POIs obtained with  
Aha Radio  
If you select a station with content that in-  
cludes POI location information, the corre-  
sponding POI icons will appear on the map  
screen. A maximum of 30 POI icons are dis-  
played at one time.  
Indicator  
Meaning  
Touching the key unsubscribes  
the selected content. The unsub-  
scribed content will be deleted  
from the My Feeds station.  
Touching the key follows the cur-  
rent content. The followed con-  
tent will be added to the My  
Feeds station.  
5 Recalls equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer  
on page 175.  
6 Pauses the content currently playing and  
shows a text pop-up screen  
p “-------” is displayed if there is no corre-  
sponding information.  
Pop-up screen  
Detailed information can be displayed by pla-  
cing the scroll cursor over the POI icon.  
= For details, refer to Viewing information  
about a specified location on page 28.  
p The POI icons on the map will not disap-  
pear even when the iPod is removed.  
The icons will disappear with the following  
operations:  
p Touching  
closes the pop-up screen  
!
Turning off the ignition switch (ACC  
OFF)  
and plays the content.  
!
!
Initializing user data  
Updating the display of the Aha POI  
icons  
Functions coupled with  
Aha Radio and the  
navigation system  
Depending on the stations, functions coupled  
with the navigation system are available.  
p Aha POI icons are updated at the following  
intervals.  
!
!
!
When a station with content including  
location information is reselected  
When the content lists of the Aha appli-  
cation are updated  
If there are 30 or more content items se-  
lected and 31st POI is read  
130  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the Bluetooth audio player  
27  
You can control the Bluetooth audio player.  
p Before using the Bluetooth audio player,  
you need to register and connect the device  
to this navigation system.  
Bluetooth audio player connected to this  
unit may be paused.  
= For details, refer to Registering your  
Bluetooth devices on page 56.  
p Operations may vary depending on the  
kind of a Bluetooth audio player.  
p Depending on the Bluetooth audio player  
connected to this navigation system, the  
available operations with this navigation  
system are limited to the following two le-  
vels:  
Starting procedure  
1
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 70.  
2
Tap [Audio] on the left edge of the  
screen to display the “Audio” screen.  
3
Use the touch panel keys on the screen  
!
A2DP profile (Advanced Audio Distribu-  
tion Profile): Only playing back songs on  
your audio player is possible.  
to control the Bluetooth audio player.  
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel  
keys on page 133.  
!
A2DP profile and AVRCP profile (Audio/  
Video Remote Control Profile): Playing  
back, pausing, selecting songs, etc., are  
possible.  
Reading the screen  
p Since there are a number of Bluetooth  
audio players available on the market, op-  
erations with your Bluetooth audio player  
using this navigation system vary greatly in  
range. Please refer to the instruction man-  
ual that came with your Bluetooth audio  
player as well as this manual while operat-  
ing your player on this navigation system.  
p While you are listening to songs on your  
Bluetooth audio player, please refrain from  
operating your cellular phone as much as  
possible. If you try operating on your cellu-  
lar phone, the signal from your cellular  
phone may cause a noise on the song play-  
back.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 Playback condition indicator  
Indicates the current playback condition if the  
connected Bluetooth audio player features  
AVRCP 1.3.  
p Even if you switch to another source while  
listening to a song on your Bluetooth audio  
player, the playback of song continues to  
elapse.  
p Depending on the Bluetooth audio player  
you connected to this navigation system,  
operations on this navigation system to  
control the player may differ from those ex-  
plained in this manual.  
Playing files in random order  
Indicator  
Meaning  
Does not play files in random  
order.  
Plays all audio files in the cur-  
rent repeat play range in ran-  
dom order.  
p When you are talking on a cellular phone  
connected to this unit via Bluetooth wire-  
less technology, song playback from your  
131  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
27  
Using the Bluetooth audio player  
Setting a repeat play range  
Indicator  
Meaning  
Does not repeat.  
Repeats just the current file.  
Repeats all audio files in the  
Bluetooth audio player.  
2 Current file information  
If the connected Bluetooth audio player fea-  
tures AVRCP 1.3, the following file information  
will be displayed.  
!
!
!
!
!
: Artist name  
Shows the artist name currently playing  
(when available).  
: Album title  
Shows the title of the album of the cur-  
rent file (when available).  
: Track title  
Shows the title of the track currently  
playing (when available).  
Play time indicator  
Shows the elapsed playing time within  
the current file.  
File number indicator  
Shows the file number currently playing  
(when available).  
p In the following cases, file information  
will only be displayed after a file starts  
or resumes playing:  
!
You connect the Bluetooth audio  
player compatible with AVRCP1.3,  
and operate the player to start play-  
ing.  
!
You select another file when play-  
back is paused.  
3 Current time  
4 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
5 Device name indicator  
6 Connection status indicator  
Shows whether the device featuring Bluetooth  
technology is connected or not.  
132  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
Using the Bluetooth audio player  
Using the touch panel keys  
27  
1
2
3
6
5
4
1 Plays files in random order  
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer  
on page 175.  
6 Displays the “Function” menu  
= For details, refer to Using advanced func-  
tions on the next page.  
All of the files within the repeat play range  
can be played at random by touching only one  
key.  
p This function is available only when the  
connected Bluetooth audio player fea-  
tures AVRCP 1.3.  
= For details, refer to Plays files in ran-  
dom order on the next page.  
2 Sets a repeat play range  
Operating by hardware  
buttons  
The repeat play range can be changed by  
touching only one key.  
Pressing the TRK button  
You can skip files forward or backward.  
p This function is available only when the  
connected Bluetooth audio player fea-  
tures AVRCP 1.3.  
= For details, refer to Changes the repeat  
range on the next page.  
Pressing and holding the TRK button  
You can perform fast reverse or fast for-  
ward.  
3 Playback and Pause  
Touching [d] or [e] switches between play-  
back and pause.  
4 Connects the Bluetooth audio player  
Touching [Connect] displays the connection  
standby screen and the navigation system  
waits for the Bluetooth wireless connection re-  
quest.  
5 Recalls equalizer curves  
133  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
27  
Using the Bluetooth audio player  
Using advanced functions  
p This menu is available only when the con-  
nected Bluetooth audio player features  
AVRCP 1.3.  
%
Touch on the “Audio” screen.  
The “Function” menu appears.  
1
2
1 Changes the repeat range  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting  
as follows:  
!
All: Repeats all audio files in the  
Bluetooth audio player.  
!
!
Track: Repeats just the current file.  
Off: Does not repeat.  
p If you skip the file forward or backward  
when the repeat play range in “Track”,  
the repeat play range changes to “All”.  
2 Plays files in random order  
Random play lets you playback files in ran-  
dom order within the current repeat range.  
Each touch of [Random] turns it on or  
off.  
134  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the XM tuner  
28  
You can use the navigation system to control  
an XM satellite digital tuner, which is sold se-  
parately.  
For details concerning operation, refer to the  
XM tuner’s operation manuals. This section  
provides information on XM operations with  
the navigation system which differs from that  
described in the XM tuner’s operation man-  
ual.  
Category Mode  
1
2
3
4
7
6
5
The following XM satellite digital tuner units  
cannot be connected:  
About the logo for channel name  
GEX-P900XM, GEX-P910XM  
Only the logo data that is contained in the na-  
vigation system can be displayed for each  
channel. The logo of a newly established chan-  
nel that is not contained cannot be displayed.  
When a logo is not available, the following  
substitute icon is displayed.  
Starting procedure  
1
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 70.  
Substitute icon  
2
Tap [XM] on the left edge of the screen  
to display the “XM” screen.  
p The icon of each broadcast station is con-  
tained in the NAND flash memory based  
on the data provided by XM Satellite Radio  
as of September 2010.  
p Any changes made by XM Satellite Radio  
in the lineup or icon of the broadcast sta-  
tion in the future may not be supported by  
the navigation system, and may cause the  
unit to display incorrect icons.  
3
Use the touch panel keys on the screen  
to control the XM tuner.  
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel  
keys on page 137.  
Reading the screen  
All CH Mode  
1 XM band indicator  
Shows the XM band that has been selected.  
2 Current XM station information  
Shows the detailed information of the broad-  
cast channel currently being received.  
1
2
3
4
7
!
!
!
!
XM channel number  
Shows the XM channel number the  
tuner is currently tuned to.  
: XM station name  
Shows the XM broadcast station name  
the tuner is currently tuned in.  
: Artist (performer) name  
Shows the artist (performer) name cur-  
rently playing (when available).  
: Song title (program name)  
6
135  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
28  
Using the XM tuner  
Shows the title of the current song (pro-  
gram).  
p “-------” is displayed if there is no corre-  
sponding information.  
3 Current time  
4 XM station information  
!
!
!
XM station name logo  
XM channel number  
Preset number  
Shows what preset item has been se-  
lected.  
5 XM channel category  
Shows the category of broadcast channel.  
6 XM channel select mode indicator  
Shows what channel select mode has been  
selected. You can select a channel from all  
channels in “All CH Mode”, and select a  
channel from selected category in  
“Category Mode”.  
7 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
136  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
Using the XM tuner  
28  
Using the touch panel keys  
All CH Mode  
1
2
3
1
c
b
a
4
9
8
7
6
5
Category Mode  
d
2
3
d
c
b
a
4
9
8
7
6
5
e
1 Performs manual tuning  
2 Switches between the AV operation  
screen and the preset list display  
You can switch the screen display according  
to your preference.  
The channels move up or down one at a time.  
p If you keep touching [o] or [p] you  
can skip the broadcasting channels.  
137  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
28  
Using the XM tuner  
d Performs manual tuning  
= For details of the operation, refer to  
Switching between the AV operation  
screen and the list screen on page 70.  
3 Memorizes the current song  
= For details, refer to Memorizing the song  
on the next page.  
4 Recalls channels from the preset  
Once you have stored broadcast channels,  
you can easily recall preset channels from  
memory with a tap of a key.  
= For details, refer to Storing and recalling  
broadcast stations on the next page.  
5 Selects an XM channel directly  
= For details, refer to Selecting an XM  
channel directly on this page.  
The channels move up or down one at a time  
within a selected category.  
p If you keep touching [o] or [p] you  
can skip the broadcasting channels.  
e Switches the channel category  
Touch [c] or [d] to select the desired cate-  
gory.  
Selecting an XM channel directly  
You can select an XM channel directly by en-  
tering the desired channel number.  
1
Touch [Direct].  
6 Recalls equalizer curves  
2
Touch [0] to [9] to input the desired  
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer  
on page 175.  
7 Displays the “Function” menu  
= For details, refer to Using advanced func-  
tions on page 140.  
channel number.  
To cancel the input numbers one by one,  
touch . Touching and holding  
to delete all input numbers.  
allows you  
8 Switches the XM channel select mode  
You can switch the mode between the two  
methods for selecting and listing the channel.  
All CH Mode:  
3
While the input number is displayed,  
touch [Enter].  
The XM channel that was entered is selected.  
4
Touch  
.
You can select a channel from all channels  
when you operate this function.  
You return to the previous display.  
Category Mode:  
You can select a channel within a selected ca-  
tegory that you operate this function.  
9 Switches to the list display of song titles  
= For details, refer to Selecting a channel  
from the list on the next page.  
Displaying the Radio ID  
If you select CH: 000, the Radio ID is dis-  
played.  
1
2
Touch [Direct].  
a Switches to the list display of artist  
names  
Input [000] and then touch [Enter].  
p If you select another channel, display of the  
Radio ID is canceled.  
= For details, refer to Selecting a channel  
from the list on the next page.  
b Switches to the list display of XM station  
3
Touch  
.
names  
You return to the previous display.  
= For details, refer to Selecting a channel  
from the list on the next page.  
4
Wait until the Radio ID is displayed.  
c Selects an XM band  
Tapping the key repeatedly switches between  
the following XM bands: XM 1, XM 2, or  
XM 3.  
p This function is convenient for preparing  
different preset lists for each band.  
138  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the XM tuner  
28  
CH Name List (Channel name) —  
Song Title List (Song title) —  
Artist Name List (Artist name)  
Storing and recalling broadcast  
stations  
With a tap of any of the preset tuning keys  
(“P1” to “P6”), you can easily store up to six  
broadcast channels for later recall (also with  
the tap of a key).  
3
Tap the desired channel that you want  
to listen to.  
1
Select the channel that you want to  
store in memory.  
2
Display the preset channel list.  
= For details, refer to Switches between the  
AV operation screen and the preset list  
display on page 137.  
3
Keep touching a preset tuning key [P1]  
= For details, refer to Operating list screens (e.  
g. iPod list screen) on page 70.  
p During Category Mode, touch [c] or [d]  
to switch to another category.  
to [P6].  
The selected station has been stored in mem-  
ory.  
The next time you tap the same preset tuning  
key “P1” to “P6”, the station is recalled from  
memory.  
Using “MyMix” function  
p Up to 18 stations, six for each of three XM  
bands can be stored in memory.  
“MyMix” function memorizes the song title  
and artist name of the song currently being re-  
ceived. When the song that matches the mem-  
orized song title and artist name is being  
broadcast on a station other than the one you  
are listening to, you will be alerted, and you  
can switch the station to listen to that song.  
p A track itself is NOT downloaded. ONLY the  
song title and the artist name are memor-  
ized.  
Selecting a channel from the list  
The list content can be switched so you can  
search for the song you want to listen to not  
only by the channel name but also by the artist  
name or song title.  
p The channel list shows all channels during  
“All CH Mode”, and the channels included  
in the selected category during  
Memorizing the song  
“Category Mode”.  
The song title and artist name of the song you  
are listening to can be memorized to “MyMix”.  
1
Display a list screen.  
= For details, refer to Switches to the list  
display of song titles on the previous  
page.  
= For details, refer to Switches to the list  
display of artist names on the previous  
page.  
= For details, refer to Switches to the list  
display of XM station names on the pre-  
vious page.  
%
Touch and hold [Memo].  
The song title and artist name of current song  
you are listening to are memorized, and a con-  
firmation message appears.  
p The song title and artist name of up to 12  
songs can be memorized. Trying to save  
more than 12 songs will result in older ones  
being overwritten.  
p You cannot memorize the song title or the  
artist name when “– – – – – – – –” is dis-  
played on the title information.  
p This function is invalid for the channel  
“000”.  
2
Touch [List].  
XM channel list appears in the display.  
Each touch of [List] changes the screen as fol-  
lows:  
139  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
28  
Using the XM tuner  
p The memorized title may not be displayed  
correctly depending on the conditions.  
p You can customize the setting for the mem-  
orized songs later.  
1
= For details concerning operations, refer  
to Setting the memorized songs on this  
page.  
When the memorized song is broadcast  
A beep sounds, and a message is displayed.  
Touch [Yes] to switch to that station and listen  
to that track.  
1 Sets the memorized songs  
p If the memorized song is not checked, or  
when [Off] is selected on [Alert] on the  
“Memo Edit” screen, no alert will be pro-  
vided.  
Setting the memorized songs  
Selecting the songs to alert  
The list of song titles memorized for the MyMix  
Function (MyMix list) is displayed. You can  
change the notification setting when the song  
is broadcast again. You can enable or disable  
notification for each song.  
= Refer to Setting the memorized songs on  
this page.  
p Notification may not be provided depend-  
ing on the status of the navigation system.  
p If there is even a slight difference between  
the memorized title and the title of the  
song being broadcast, no notification will  
be provided even though they are the same  
song.  
1
Touch [Memo Edit].  
2
Touch the song title that you want to  
disable notification for.  
The check mark is removed, and the notifica-  
tion setting of the song is deactivated.  
Operating by hardware  
buttons  
Pressing the TRK button  
You can move the channel up or down.  
Changing the alert setting  
You can enable or disable alerts for all items at  
the same time. This function is useful when  
you want to turn alerts off temporarily without  
changing each memorized song.  
Pressing and holding the TRK button  
You can move channels up or down by holding  
down the button.  
1
Touch [Memo Edit].  
2
Touch [Alert].  
Each touch of [Alert] turns it on or off.  
Using advanced functions  
Deleting the memorized songs  
You can delete each one of the memorized  
songs from the song title list.  
%
Touch on the “XM” screen.  
The “Function” menu appears.  
1
Touch [Memo Edit].  
2
Touch and hold the song you want to  
delete.  
p To delete all songs that are memorized,  
touch [Delete All].  
3
Touch [Yes].  
140  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the SIRIUS tuner  
29  
You can use the navigation system to control a  
Pioneer Sirius Satellite Radio tuner, which is  
sold separately.  
For details concerning operation, refer to the  
SIRIUS tuner’s operation manuals. This sec-  
tion provides information on SIRIUS opera-  
tions with navigation system which differs  
from that described in the SIRIUS tuner’s op-  
eration manual.  
Category Mode  
1
2
3
4
7
6
p When you use the SiriusConnect universal  
tuner (sold separately) with this navigation  
system, Pioneer SIRIUS BUS INTERFACE is  
required. For details concerning operation,  
refer to the owner’s manual of Pioneer SIR-  
IUS BUS INTERFACE and SiriusConnect  
universal tuner.  
5
1 SIRIUS band indicator  
Shows the SIRIUS band that has been se-  
lected.  
2 SIRIUS channel number indicator  
Shows the SIRIUS channel number that the  
tuner is tuned to.  
3 Current time  
Starting procedure  
4 Preset number indicator  
1
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 70.  
Shows what preset item has been selected.  
5 SIRIUS channel select mode indicator  
Shows what channel select mode has been  
selected. You can select a channel from all  
channels in “All CH Mode”, and select a  
channel from the selected category in  
“Category Mode”.  
2
Tap [SIRIUS] on the left edge of the  
screen to display the “SIRIUS” screen.  
3
Use the touch panel keys on the screen  
to control the SIRIUS tuner.  
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel  
keys on the next page.  
= For details concerning operations, refer  
to Switches the SIRIUS channel se-  
lect mode on page 143.  
6 Variable information area  
Shows various information about the broad-  
cast channel currently being received.  
= For more details about the displayed in-  
formation, refer to Switches the SIR-  
IUS display on page 143.  
Reading the screen  
All CH Mode  
1
2
3
4
7 Source icon  
7
6
Shows which source has been selected.  
5
141  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
29  
Using the SIRIUS tuner  
Using the touch panel keys  
All CH Mode  
1
2
3
4
b
a
5
9
8
7
6
2
Category Mode  
1
3
4
b
a
5
9
8
7
6
c
1 Switches the SIRIUS Instant replay mode  
= For details, refer to Using the “Instant  
Replay” function on page 144.  
p If you keep touching [o] or [p] you  
can skip the broadcasting channels.  
3 Selects a SIRIUS channel directly  
= For details, refer to Selecting a SIRIUS  
channel directly on the next page.  
2 Performs manual tuning  
The channels move up or down one at a time.  
142  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the SIRIUS tuner  
29  
4 Memorizes the current song  
= For details, refer to Memorizing the song  
on the next page.  
5 Recalls channels from the preset  
Tap to recall the preset channel.  
= For details, refer to Storing and recalling  
broadcast stations on this page.  
6 Switches the SIRIUS display  
Each touch of [Disp] changes the display in-  
formation.  
Selecting a SIRIUS channel directly  
You can select a SIRIUS channel directly by  
entering the desired channel number.  
1
Touch [Direct].  
2
Touch [0] to [9] to input the desired  
channel number.  
To cancel the input numbers one by one,  
touch . Touching and holding  
to delete all input numbers.  
allows you  
Channel number — Channel name — Chan-  
nel category — Artist name/feature — Song/  
program title — Composer  
3
While the input number is displayed,  
touch [Enter].  
The SIRIUS channel that was entered se-  
lected.  
7 Recalls equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer  
on page 175.  
4
Touch  
.
8 Displays the “Function” menu  
= For details, refer to Using advanced func-  
tions on page 145.  
You return to the previous display.  
9 Switches the SIRIUS channel select  
Display the Radio ID  
If you select CH: 000, the Radio ID is dis-  
played.  
mode  
You can switch the mode between the two  
methods for selecting and listing the channel.  
All CH Mode:  
You can select a channel from all channels  
when you operate this function.  
Category Mode:  
1
Touch [Direct].  
2
Input [000] and then touch [Enter].  
If you select another channel, display of the  
Radio ID is canceled.  
You can select a channel within a selected ca-  
tegory that you operate this function.  
a Switches between the AV operation  
screen and the preset list display  
You can switch the screen display according  
to your preference.  
3
Touch  
.
You return to the previous display.  
4
Wait until the Radio ID is displayed.  
= For details of the operation, refer to  
Switching between the AV operation  
screen and the list screen on page 70.  
b Selects a SIRIUS band  
Storing and recalling broadcast  
stations  
With a tap of any of the preset tuning keys  
(“Preset 1” to “Preset 6”), you can easily store  
up to six broadcast stations for later recall  
(also with the tap of a key).  
Tapping the key repeatedly switches between  
the following SIRIUS bands: SIRIUS1,  
SIRIUS2, or SIRIUS3.  
p This function is convenient for preparing  
different preset lists for each band.  
c Switches the channel category  
Touch [c] or [d] to select the desired cate-  
gory.  
1
Select the channel that you want to  
store in memory.  
2
Display the preset channel list.  
= For details, refer to Switches between the  
AV operation screen and the preset list  
display on this page.  
143  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
29  
Using the SIRIUS tuner  
3
Keep touching a preset tuning key  
= For details, refer to Setting the memor-  
ized songs on the next page.  
[Preset 1] to [Preset 6].  
The selected station has been stored in mem-  
ory.  
The next time you tap the same preset tuning  
key “Preset 1” to “Preset 6” the station is re-  
called from memory.  
p Notification may not be provided depend-  
ing on the situation of the Navigation Sys-  
tem.  
= For details, refer to Selecting the songs  
to alert on the next page.  
p Up to 18 stations, six for each of three SIR-  
IUS bands can be stored in memory.  
Using the “Instant Replay” function  
The “Instant Replay” function allows you to  
replay the stored broadcast on Pioneer SIRIUS  
BUS INTERFACE (if Pioneer SIRIUS BUS IN-  
TERFACE capable for this function). As soon  
as you tune to a channel, Pioneer SIRIUS BUS  
INTERFACE automatically begins storing the  
broadcast. It can store approximately up to 44  
minutes previous (depending on the selected  
channel and the memory capacity of Pioneer  
SIRIUS BUS INTERFACE).  
Using the song alert function  
The song alert function memorizes the song  
title and artist name of the song currently  
being received. When a track that matches the  
memorized song title and artist name is being  
broadcast on a station other than the one you  
are listening to, you will be alerted, and you  
can switch the station to listen to that song.  
p The track itself is NOT downloaded; only  
the song title and the artist name are mem-  
orized.  
1
Touch [Instant Replay] on the SIRIUS  
screen to activate the “Instant Replay”  
mode.  
Memorizing the song  
The song title and artist name of the song you  
are listening to can be memorized.  
2
Touch keys for “Instant Replay”.  
Touch panel  
keys  
Action  
%
Touch and hold [Memo].  
Return to the start of the current  
song or program. Touching again  
will skip back to the previous song  
or program.  
The song title and artist name of the song you  
are listening to can be memorized.  
p Up to 10 song titles and artist names can be  
memorized.  
[o]  
[o] and hold  
[p]  
Fast reverses.  
p You cannot memorize a song that does not  
have song title and artist name information.  
p You cannot memorize the song title or the  
artist name of channel “000”.  
p The memorized title may not be displayed  
correctly.  
Forwards play to the next song or  
program.  
[p] and hold  
[f]  
Fast-forwards.  
Touching [f] switches between  
playback and pause.  
When the memorized song is broadcast  
p During “Instant Replay” mode, each touch  
of [Disp] changes the display information  
as follows;  
A beep sounds, and a message is displayed.  
Touch [Jump] to switch to that station, and  
you can listen to that track. If you touch  
[Stay], the channel does not switch.  
p If the alert for the song is “Off” or set  
“Alert” to “Off”, no notification will be pro-  
vided even when that song is broadcast.  
Time position — Channel number — Chan-  
nel name — Channel category — Artist  
name/feature — Song/program title —  
Composer  
p You cannot replay the broadcast prior to the  
beginning of stored data.  
144  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the SIRIUS tuner  
29  
2
Touch [c Prev] or [Next d] to select the  
Operating by hardware  
buttons  
desired song.  
Pressing the TRK button  
You can move the channel up or down.  
During “Instant Replay” mode, you can skip  
the song or program forward or backward.  
Pressing and holding the TRK button  
You can move channels up or down by holding  
down the button.  
During “Instant Replay” mode, you can per-  
form fast reverse or fast forward.  
3
Touch [On/Off] to turn the setting on.  
When the alert for the song is activated, [On]  
appears at the beginning of the selected title.  
p Touch [On/Off] again to turn the setting off.  
Using advanced functions  
%
Touch on the “SIRIUS” screen.  
The “Function” menu appears.  
Changing the alert setting  
You can enable or disable alerts for all items at  
the same time. This function is useful when  
you want to turn alerts off temporarily without  
changing each memorized song.  
1
2
3
1
Touch [Memo Edit].  
2
Touch [Alert].  
Each touch of [Alert] turns it on or off.  
Deleting the memorized songs  
You can delete each one of the memorized  
tracks from the song title list.  
1 Sets the memorized songs  
2 Uses the Game Alert function  
3 Displays Game Information  
= For details of each function, refer to sec-  
tions below with the relative titles.  
1
Touch [Memo Edit].  
2
Touch [c Prev] or [Next d] to select the  
song title that you want to delete.  
3
Touch [Delete] when the song you  
Setting the memorized songs  
Selecting the songs to alert  
You can change the setting of the alert when  
the track is broadcast again. You can enable  
or disable alert for each song.  
want to delete is displayed.  
A message will appear asking you to confirm  
the deletion.  
4
Touch [Yes].  
1
Touch [Memo Edit].  
Using the Game Alert function  
Selecting teams for Game Alert  
This navigation system can alert you when  
games involving your favorite sports teams are  
about to start. To use this function you need to  
store the teams you want to follow in advance.  
145  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
29  
Using the SIRIUS tuner  
1
2
Touch [Game Alert].  
Displaying Game Information  
An alert will be displayed when a game with  
the team you selected is about to start (or is  
currently under way). You can also display  
game information and changes to the broad-  
cast channel.  
Touch [c Prev] or [Next d] to select the  
league.  
p The Game Information function is available  
when “Alert” is “On” in “Game Alert”.  
1
Touch [Game Info].  
2
Touch [Prev] or [Next] to view the game  
score information that is registered.  
p The game score will be updated automati-  
cally.  
3
Touch [c Prev] or [Next d] to select the  
team.  
p Touch [Tune To] to switch to the channel  
that broadcasts the displayed game.  
p If you have not selected any team,  
“Not Set” is displayed.  
p When no games involving your favorite  
teams are currently being played  
“NO GAME” is displayed.  
4
Touch [On/Off].  
The team displayed as [On] is the alert target.  
p When the selected team is excluded from  
the alert target, the team is displayed as  
[Off]. Up to 12 teams can be selected.  
If you have already selected 12 teams,  
“FULL” is displayed and adding new entries  
is not possible. In this case, delete a team  
and then try again.  
Changing the alert setting  
You can enable or disable the alert for selected  
items. This function is useful when you want  
to turn the alert off temporarily without chan-  
ging the setting of each selected team.  
1
Touch [Game Alert].  
2
Touch [Alert].  
Each touch of [Alert] turns it on or off.  
When a game involving one of your  
favorite teams is broadcast  
A message is displayed. Touch [Jump] to  
switch the station to view the game informa-  
tion. If you touch [Stay], the station does not  
switch.  
p Alerts may not be available depending on  
the status of the navigation system.  
146  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using AV input  
30  
You can display the video image output by the  
equipment connected to the navigation sys-  
tem. For details of the connection method,  
refer to Installation Manual.  
Using AV2  
You can display the video image output by the  
equipment connected to video input 2.  
1
Touch [AV2 Input] on the “AV System  
Settings” menu.  
= For details, refer to Setting video input 2  
(AV2) on page 171.  
CAUTION  
For safety reasons, video images cannot be  
viewed while your vehicle is in motion. To view  
video images, you must stop in a safe place and  
apply the parking brake.  
2
3
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 70.  
Tap [AV2] on the left edge of the  
Reading the screen  
screen.  
1
The image is displayed on the screen.  
4
Touch the screen to display the touch  
panel keys.  
2
Using the touch panel keys  
1 Current time  
2 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
Using AV1  
You can display the video image output by the  
equipment connected to video input 1.  
1
2
1 Recalls equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer  
1
Touch [AV1 Input] on the “AV System  
on page 175.  
Settings” menu.  
2 Hides the touch panel keys  
Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel keys.  
p If you want to display the touch panel  
keys again, touch anywhere on the LCD  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Setting video input 1  
(AV1) on page 170.  
2
3
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 70.  
Tap [AV1] on the left edge of the  
screen.  
The image is displayed on the screen.  
4
Touch the screen to display the touch  
panel keys.  
147  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
31  
Using the external unit (EXT1, EXT2)  
The term “external unit” refers to future  
Reading the screen  
Pioneer devices that are not currently planned  
for, or to devices that allow control of basic  
functions although they are not fully con-  
trolled by the navigation system. Two external  
units can be controlled by this navigation sys-  
tem. When two external units are connected,  
the navigation system allocates them as exter-  
nal unit 1 or external unit 2.  
2
3
4
1
For details of the connection method, refer to  
Installation Manual.  
For details of the operation, refer to the exter-  
nal unit’s operation manual. This section pro-  
vides information on external unit operations  
with the navigation system that differ from  
those described in the external unit’s opera-  
tion manual.  
p Operation varies depending on the external  
unit connected. (In some cases, the exter-  
nal unit may not respond.)  
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 External unit indicator  
Displays the information that is sent by con-  
nected external units.  
3 Current time  
4 Auto/Manual mode indicator  
Shows the current mode.  
Starting procedure  
1
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 70.  
2
Tap [EXT1] or [EXT2] on the left edge of  
the screen to select the external unit.  
3
Use the touch panel keys on the screen  
to control the external unit.  
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel  
keys on the next page.  
148  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the external unit (EXT1, EXT2)  
31  
Using the touch panel keys  
6
5
4
1
2
3
1 Recalls equalizer curves  
p Operating commands set for “Auto”  
and “Manual” operations vary depend-  
ing on the external unit connected.  
5 Sends a command [a], [b], [c], or [d]  
Touch to operate the external unit.  
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer  
on page 175.  
2 Sends a band command  
Touch to send a band command to the exter-  
nal unit.  
p Operation varies depending on the ex-  
ternal unit connected. (In some cases,  
the external unit may not respond.)  
3 Uses [F1] through [F4] to operate the ex-  
ternal unit  
p Operation varies depending on the ex-  
ternal unit connected. (In some cases,  
some functions may not be used until  
you touch and hold the key.)  
6 Sends a [1] key to [6] key command  
The external unit can be operated by transmit-  
ting the operating commands set to “1” key  
through “6” key.  
The external unit can be operated by transmit-  
ting the operating commands set to “F1”  
through “F4”.  
p The operating commands set to “F1”  
through “F4” vary depending on the ex-  
ternal unit.  
p Operation varies depending on the ex-  
ternal unit connected. (In some cases,  
some functions may not be used until  
you touch and hold the key.)  
p Some functions may not be used until  
you touch and hold the key.  
4 Switches between automatic and manual  
function  
You can turn automatic and manual function  
on or off.  
You can switch between “Auto” and  
“Manual” functions of the external unit con-  
nected.  
Initially, this function is set to “Auto”.  
149  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
32  
Customizing preferences  
2
Touch [Connection Status].  
Displaying the screen for  
navigation settings  
The “Connection Status” screen appears.  
1
Press the HOME button to display the  
1
2
3
4
5
“Top Menu” screen.  
2
Touch [Settings].  
The “Settings Menu” screen appears.  
p This can also be operated using the “Short-  
cut Menu” screen.  
3
Touch [Navi Settings].  
1 Speed Pulse  
The Speed Pulse value detected by the navi-  
gation system is shown. “0” is shown while  
the vehicle is stationary.  
2 GPS Antenna  
Indicates the connection status of the GPS  
antenna, the reception sensitivity, and from  
how many satellites the signal is received.  
Signal com-  
munication  
Used in posi-  
tioning  
Color  
The “Navi Settings” menu appears.  
Touch the item that you want to  
Orange  
Yellow  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
4
change the setting.  
p When the GPS antenna is connected to  
this navigation system, “OK” is dis-  
played.  
When the GPS antenna is not con-  
nected to this navigation system, “NOK”  
is displayed.  
p If reception is poor, please change the  
installation position of the GPS antenna.  
3 Parking Brake  
#
If you touch , the previous screen re-  
turns.  
When the parking brake is applied, “On” is  
displayed. When the parking brake is re-  
leased, “Off” is displayed.  
Checking the connections  
of leads  
Check that leads are properly connected be-  
tween the navigation system and the vehicle.  
Please also check whether they are connected  
in the correct positions.  
4 Illumination  
When the headlights or small lamps of a ve-  
hicle are on, “On” is displayed. When the  
small lamps of a vehicle are off, “Off” is dis-  
played. (If the orange/white lead is not con-  
nected, “Off” appears.)  
5 Back Signal  
1
Display the “Navi Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
navigation settings on this page.  
150  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
32  
When the gear lever is shifted to “R”, the  
signal switches to “High” or “Low”. (One of  
these is displayed depending on the  
vehicle.)  
Indicates the degree of slope of the street  
that you are currently on.  
7 Degree of learning  
Sensor learning situations for distance  
(Distance), right turn (Right Turn), left turn  
(Left Turn) and 3D detection (3D) are indi-  
cated by the length of bars.  
p When tires have been changed or  
chains fitted, turning on the Speed  
Pulse allows the system to detect the  
fact that the tire diameter has changed,  
and automatically replaces the value for  
calculating distance.  
Checking sensor learning  
status and driving status  
p The navigation system can automatically  
use its sensor memory based on the outer  
dimensions of the tires.  
1
Display the “Navi Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
navigation settings on the previous page.  
p If a separately sold speed pulse genera-  
tor (ND-PG1) is connected, the distance  
calculation value cannot be replaced  
automatically.  
2
Touch [3D Calibration Status].  
The “3D Calibration Status” screen appears.  
Clearing status  
You can delete the learned results stored in  
“Distance”, “Speed Pulse” or “Learning Sta-  
tus”.  
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
1
Touch [Distance] or [Speed Pulse].  
The following message appears.  
1 Speed  
Indicates the speed detected by the naviga-  
tion system. (This indication may be differ-  
ent from the actual speed of your vehicle,  
so please do not use this instead of the  
speedometer.)  
2 Acceleration or deceleration/Rotational  
speed  
2
Touch [Yes].  
Indicates acceleration or deceleration velo-  
city of your vehicle. Also, rotational speed  
when your vehicle turns to left or right is  
shown.  
Clears the results stored in “Distance” or  
“Speed Pulse”.  
3
Touch [Learning Status].  
3 Distance  
Indicates driving distance.  
4 Speed Pulse  
The following message appears.  
Indicates the total number of speed pulses.  
5 Learning Status  
Indicates the current driving mode.  
6 Inclination  
151  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
32  
Customizing preferences  
3
Enter the fuel consumption informa-  
tion.  
4
Touch [All].  
Clears all leaning results.  
p Touch [All] for the following cases:  
Enter the following items:  
!
!
!
After changing the installation position  
of the navigation system  
After changing the installation angle of  
the navigation system  
After moving the navigation system to  
another vehicle  
!
Surface Road Gas Mileage:  
Enter the fuel cost when you drive on ordin-  
ary roads.  
Freeway Gas Mileage:  
Enter the fuel cost when you drive on the  
freeway.  
!
#
If you touch [Distance], all learned results  
!
!
!
Gas Price Per Unit:  
Enter the fuel unit price.  
Gas Unit:  
Set the fuel unit.  
Currency:  
stored in “Distance” are cleared.  
Using the fuel consumption  
function  
Inputting the fuel consumption  
information for calculating the  
fuel cost  
You can estimate the fuel cost to your destina-  
tion by entering the fuel consumption informa-  
tion in the navigation system.  
= For details, refer to Setting a route to your  
destination on page 42.  
Set the unit of currency.  
p The unit in “Surface Road Gas Mileage”  
and “Freeway Gas Mileage” depend on  
the one chosen in “Gas Unit”.  
!
When “Gas Unit” is set to “Gallon”.  
Enter how many miles (kilometers) you  
get to a gallon.  
!
When “Gas Unit” is set to “Liter”.  
Enter how much fuel you need to travel  
60 miles (100 kilometers).  
When all the items are entered, inputting the  
fuel consumption information is complete.  
1
Display the “Navi Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
navigation settings on page 150.  
Calculating the fuel consumption  
When you enter the fueling information to the  
navigation system, and export the data to SD  
memory cards, you can check the fuel con-  
sumption information by using the utility pro-  
gram AVIC FEEDS, which is available  
separately, on your PC.  
2
Touch [Gas Mileage].  
The “Gas Mileage Setting” screen appears.  
p Up to 24 sets of data can be stored. You  
can also export the data, as described  
below.  
152  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
32  
!
Gas Price Per Unit:  
Enter the fuel unit price.  
If the entries reach the maximum number,  
a new entry will overwrite the oldest one.  
When all the items are entered, the fuel con-  
sumption is displayed next to “Gas Mileage”.  
These calculations are based only on the infor-  
mation that you provide and not on any data  
from the vehicle. The fuel mileage displayed is  
only a reference value, and does not guarantee  
the fuel mileage displayed can be obtained.  
5
Touch [OK].  
1
Display the “Navi Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
navigation settings on page 150.  
2
Touch [Gas Mileage].  
The “Gas Mileage Setting” screen appears.  
The “Gas Mileage Setting” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Gas Price Calculation].  
Exporting the data of fuel cost  
information  
Exporting the fuel cost data to an SD memory  
card is possible.  
p The data stored in this navigation system  
will be cleared as exporting it to the SD  
memory card.  
p If there is previous data in the SD memory  
card, the data is overwritten with new data.  
The “Gas Price Calculation” screen appears.  
Enter the fuel consumption informa-  
1
Insert an SD memory card into the SD  
4
card slot.  
tion.  
= For details of the operation, refer to Insert-  
ing and ejecting an SD memory card on  
page 16.  
2
3
Display the “Navi Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
navigation settings on page 150.  
Touch [Gas Mileage].  
The “Gas Mileage Setting” screen appears.  
Enter the following items:  
!
Distance:  
Enter the distance traveled since the pre-  
vious fueling.  
p The distance is entered automatically  
only when the distance traveled since  
the previous fueling is recorded.  
Gas Pumped:  
!
Enter the amount of fuel pumped.  
153  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
32  
Customizing preferences  
p While the setting is “On”, the navigation  
system continues to store the track logs in  
the inserted SD memory card.  
4
Touch [Export].  
5
Touch [Type].  
Each time you touch the key changes the set-  
ting.  
!
Private (default):  
Changes the track log attribute to “Private”.  
!
Business:  
After a message confirming whether to export  
the data appeared, exporting the data to the  
SD memory card starts.  
The “Gas Mileage Setting” screen appears  
when it is done.  
Changes the track log attribute to “Busi-  
ness”.  
Other:  
Changes the track log attribute to  
“Other”.  
!
Recording your travel history  
Using the demonstration  
guidance  
This is a demonstration function for retail  
stores. After a route is set, touching this key  
starts the simulation of route guidance.  
Activating the track logger enables you to re-  
cord your driving history (called “track log”  
below). You can review the travel history later.  
p If an SD memory card is inserted into the  
SD card slot, the track logs will be stored in  
the SD memory card.  
1
Display the “Navi Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
navigation settings on page 150.  
1
Insert an SD memory card into the SD  
card slot.  
= For details of the operation, refer to Insert-  
ing and ejecting an SD memory card on  
page 16.  
2
Touch [Demo Mode].  
Each time you touch the key changes the set-  
ting.  
!
Off (default):  
The demonstration guidance is set off.  
On:  
2
3
Display the “Navi Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
navigation settings on page 150.  
!
Repeats the demonstration guidance.  
Touch [Drive Log Settings].  
3
Display the map screen.  
The “Drive Log Settings” screen appears.  
The demonstration guidance will begin.  
4
Touch [Drive Log Settings].  
Each time you touch the key changes the set-  
ting.  
Registering your home  
!
Off (default):  
Registering your home position saves time  
and effort. Also, routes to home positions can  
be calculated easily with a single touch of the  
key from the “Destination Menu”. The regis-  
tered home position can also be modified  
later.  
You cannot export your track log to the SD  
memory card.  
!
On:  
You can store your track log to the SD mem-  
ory card.  
154  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
32  
1
2
Display the “Navi Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
navigation settings on page 150.  
3
Scroll to the position where you want  
to set, then touch [OK].  
4
Touch the arrow key on the screen to  
Touch [Set Home].  
set the direction, then touch [OK].  
The “Set Home” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Home].  
Changing the eco-function  
setting  
You can change the eco-function setting.  
1
Display the “Navi Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
navigation settings on page 150.  
2
Touch [Eco Settings].  
The “Select Search method” screen appears.  
If you touch [Phone#], you can edit your  
home phone number.  
The “Eco Settings” screen appears.  
#
3
Touch each item.  
p [Phone#] is only available when you have  
already registered your home phone num-  
ber.  
4
Search for a location.  
= For details, refer to Chapter 6.  
After searching for a point, the map of the se-  
lected position is displayed.  
5
Touch [OK].  
Eco Score  
The location is registered, and then the “Set  
!
On (default):  
Home” screen appears.  
Displays “Eco Score”.  
Off:  
Hides “Eco Score”.  
!
6
Touch [OK].  
The registration is complete.  
= For details, refer to Checking the eco-friendly  
driving status on page 32.  
Eco Drive Level  
Correcting the current location  
!
On (default):  
After you arrive the destination, a message  
appears and a beep sounds if the level of  
“Eco Drive Level” have increased or de-  
creased.  
Touch the screen to adjust the current position  
and direction of the vehicle displayed on the  
map.  
!
Off:  
1
Display the “Navi Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
navigation settings on page 150.  
No message appears and no sound beeps  
when the vehicle reaches the destination.  
= For details, refer to Displaying Eco Drive  
Level guidance on page 33.  
2
Touch [Modify Current Location].  
Rapid Start Warning  
155  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
32  
Customizing preferences  
!
Off (default):  
4
Touch the item that you want to  
No message appears and no sound beeps  
change the setting.  
when the vehicle experiences a sudden  
start.  
!
On:  
A message appears and a sound beeps  
when the vehicle experiences a sudden  
start.  
= For details, refer to Sudden start alert on  
page 33.  
Clear Eco Record  
Fuel consumption data are cleared.  
#
If you touch , the previous screen re-  
turns.  
4
Touch [OK].  
The settings are complete.  
Setting the auto-zoom display  
This setting enables switching to an enlarged  
map around the point where your vehicle is  
approaching an intersection, entrance/exit of  
freeway or a junction.  
Displaying the screen for  
map settings  
1
Press the HOME button to display the  
“Top Menu” screen.  
1
Display the “Map Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
map settings on this page.  
2
Touch [Settings].  
2
Touch [Displayed Info].  
The “Displayed Information” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Close Up View].  
Each time you touch the key changes the set-  
ting.  
!
On (default):  
Switches to an enlarged map.  
Off:  
Does not switch to an enlarged map.  
The “Settings Menu” screen appears.  
Touch [Map Settings].  
!
3
Setting the detailed city map  
p The detailed city map and this setting are  
available for AVIC-Z130BT only.  
You can select whether to display the city map  
when in certain metropolitan city areas.  
p The city map is displayed when the map  
scale is 0.05 mile (50 meters) or less.  
The “Map Settings” screen appears.  
156  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
32  
1
2
Display the “Map Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
map settings on the previous page.  
3
Touch [City Map Barrier].  
Each time you touch the key switches between  
“On” and “Off”.  
!
On (default):  
Touch [Displayed Info].  
Displays the barrier graphic for city map.  
When the vehicle position or cursor enters  
the barrier graphic area, the graphic disap-  
pears and a normal map is displayed full  
screen.  
The “Displayed Information” screen appears.  
3
Touch [City Map].  
Each time you touch the key changes the set-  
ting.  
!
Off:  
!
On (default):  
Does not display the barrier graphic for city  
map. When the vehicle position or cursor  
enters the area where no city map data is  
available, a normal map is displayed full  
screen.  
Automatically switches to the city map  
when in a city map area.  
!
Off:  
Does not show the city map.  
p Even if you switch “City Map” to “On”,  
city map cannot be displayed in areas  
where there is no city map data.  
Displaying the traffic  
notification icon  
Selects whether to display or hide the traffic  
notification icons on the map when incidents  
occur on your route.  
Setting the barrier graphic  
for city map  
p The detailed city map and this setting are  
= For details, refer to Checking traffic informa-  
tion manually on page 54.  
available for AVIC-Z130BT only.  
On the city map screen, you can display a  
“barrier graphic” pattern where no city map  
data is available. This prevents a normal map  
of a different scale from being displayed at the  
same time, greatly enhancing the clarity of the  
city map on screen.  
1
Display the “Map Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
map settings on the previous page.  
2
Touch [Displayed Info].  
The “Displayed Information” screen appears.  
barrier graphic  
3
Touch [Show Traffic Incident].  
Each time you touch the key changes the set-  
ting.  
!
View (default):  
Displays the icons on the map.  
Hide:  
!
Hides the icons on the map.  
1
2
Display the “Map Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
map settings on the previous page.  
Touch [Displayed Info].  
The “Displayed Information” screen appears.  
157  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
32  
Customizing preferences  
3
Touch [Current Street Name].  
Displaying the Bluetooth  
connection icon  
Each time you touch the key changes the set-  
ting.  
Selects whether to display or hide the icon for  
current status of the phone connection via  
Bluetooth wireless technology.  
!
View (default):  
Displays the street name (or city name) on  
the map.  
!
Hide:  
Bluetooth connection icon  
Hides the street name (or city name) on the  
map.  
Setting the display of icons  
of favorite locations  
You can select whether to display the “Favor-  
ites” icon on the map.  
p “Favorites” icons are displayed when the  
map scale is 10 miles (20 kilometers) or  
less.  
= For details, refer to Editing the favorite loca-  
tion in the list on page 47.  
1
2
Display the “Map Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
map settings on page 156.  
Touch [Displayed Info].  
The “Displayed Information” screen appears.  
1
Display the “Map Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
map settings on page 156.  
3
Touch [Bluetooth Connected].  
Each time you touch the key changes the set-  
ting.  
2
Touch [Displayed Info].  
!
View (default):  
The “Displayed Information” screen appears.  
Displays the Bluetooth connection icon on  
the map.  
Hide:  
3
Touch [Favorites Icon].  
!
Each time you touch the key changes the set-  
ting.  
Hides the Bluetooth connection icon on the  
map.  
!
On (default):  
Displays the “Favorites” icon on the map.  
Off:  
!
Hides the “Favorites” icon on the map.  
Setting the current street  
name display  
Selects whether to display or hide the street  
name (or city name) that your vehicle is travel-  
ing along.  
Displaying the 3D landmarks  
p The 3D landmarks and this setting are  
available for AVIC-Z130BT only.  
1
Display the “Map Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
map settings on page 156.  
p 3D landmark only appears when the view  
mode is “3D View” and the map scale is  
set to 0.25 mile (200 m) or lower.  
You can select whether to display the 3D land-  
mark on the map.  
2
Touch [Displayed Info].  
The “Displayed Information” screen appears.  
158  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
32  
1
2
Display the “Map Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
map settings on page 156.  
Displaying the fuel  
consumption information  
Selects whether to display Eco-Meter, indicat-  
ing the fuel consumption information, on the  
map.  
Touch [Displayed Info].  
The “Displayed Information” screen appears.  
p Eco-Meter appears when “2D View” or  
“3D View” is selected.  
3
Touch [3D Land Mark].  
Each time you touch the key changes the set-  
ting.  
1
Display the “Map Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
map settings on page 156.  
!
On (default):  
Displays the 3D landmark on the map.  
Off:  
!
2
Touch [Displayed Info].  
Hides the 3D landmark on the map.  
The “Displayed Information” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Show Eco Meter].  
Displaying maneuvers  
Selects whether to display or hide maneuvers  
Each time you touch the key changes the set-  
ting.  
on the map.  
!
View (default):  
Displays Eco-Meter on the map.  
Hide:  
Maneuvers  
!
Hides Eco-Meter on the map.  
Displaying POI on the map  
Displays icons for the surrounding facilities  
(POI) on the map.  
p POI icons are not displayed when the map  
scale is 0.75 mile (1 kilometer) or more.  
1
2
Display the “Map Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
map settings on page 156.  
Displaying preinstalled POIs on  
the map  
Touch [Displayed Info].  
p You can select up to 10 items from the sub-  
The “Displayed Information” screen appears.  
categories or detailed categories.  
3
Touch [Show Maneuver].  
1
Display the “Map Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
map settings on page 156.  
Each time you touch the key changes the set-  
ting.  
!
View (default):  
Displays maneuvers on the map.  
Hide:  
Hides maneuvers on the map.  
2
Touch [Overlay POI].  
!
The “Overlay POI” screen appears.  
159  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
32  
Customizing preferences  
3
Touch [Display] to change the setting to  
If there are detailed categories within the sub-  
category, [Detail] is active. If you select the  
subcategory such, all detailed categories with-  
in the subcategory is selected and [Detail] be-  
comes inactive.  
“On”.  
#
If you touch [Detail], the detailed categories  
under the subcategory are displayed. Select a de-  
tailed category of your preference and touch  
[OK].  
p When only a few detailed categories are se-  
lected, a blue check mark will appear next  
to the selected subcategory.  
p If you do not want to display the POI icon  
on the map, touch [Display] to turn it  
“Off”. (Even if “Display” is turned “Off”,  
the POI selection setting is retained.)  
7
Touch [OK].  
The “Overlay POI (Main Category)” screen  
returns.  
If you want to select or deselect other items,  
repeat these steps as many as necessary.  
4
Touch [POI].  
The “Overlay POI (Main Category)” screen  
appears.  
8
To finish the selection, touch [OK] in  
5
Touch the main category you want.  
the “Overlay POI (Main Category)” screen.  
Displaying the customized POIs  
Creating a customized POI is possible by  
using the utility program AVIC FEEDS which is  
available separately, on your PC. (AVIC FEEDS  
will be available on our website.) Storing the  
customized POI properly and inserting the SD  
memory card enables the system to display  
the icons on the map screen.  
A list of subcategories under the selected  
main category appears.  
p Categories that are already selected will  
p You can select up to 10 items from the sub-  
categories or detailed categories.  
have a blue check mark.  
1
Insert an SD memory card into the SD  
6
Touch the subcategory to display.  
card slot.  
= For details of the operation, refer to Insert-  
ing and ejecting an SD memory card on  
page 16.  
2
3
Display the “Map Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
map settings on page 156.  
Touch [Overlay POI].  
A red check mark appears next to the selected  
category. To cancel the selection, touch the  
entry again.  
The “Overlay POI” screen appears.  
160  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
32  
4
Touch [Display] to change the setting to  
1
2
Display the “Map Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
map settings on page 156.  
“On”.  
Touch [Day/Night Display].  
Each time you touch the key changes the set-  
ting.  
!
Automatic (default):  
You can change the colors of a map be-  
tween daytime and nighttime according to  
whether the vehicle lights are on or off.  
Day:  
The map is always displayed with daytime  
colors.  
p If you do not want to display the POI icon  
!
on the map, touch [Display] to turn it  
“Off”. (Even if “Display” is turned “Off”,  
the POI selection setting is retained.)  
p To use this function with “Automatic”, the  
orange/white lead of the navigation system  
must be connected correctly.  
5
Touch [Custom POI].  
The list of POI categories appears.  
6 Touch the items you want to display.  
Changing the road color  
You can set the road color to bluish or reddish.  
1
Display the “Map Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
map settings on page 156.  
2
Touch [Road Color].  
Each time you touch the key changes the set-  
ting.  
7
To finish the selection, touch [OK].  
!
Blue (default):  
Changes to blue based road colors.  
Red:  
Changes to red based road colors.  
!
Changing the view mode  
Various types of screen displays can be se-  
lected for navigation guidance.  
= For details of the operation, refer to Switch-  
ing the view mode on page 30.  
Changing the setting of  
navigation interruption screen  
You can set whether to automatically switch to  
the navigation screen from the AV screen  
when your vehicle approaches a guidance  
point such as an intersection.  
Setting the map color change  
between day and night  
To improve the visibility of the map during the  
evening, you can set the timing for changing  
the combination of the map color.  
1
Display the “Map Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
map settings on page 156.  
161  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
32  
Customizing preferences  
= For details, refer to Displaying POI on the  
map on page 159.  
2
Touch [AV Guide Mode].  
Each time you touch the key changes the set-  
ting.  
!
!
!
: Volume*  
Displays the “Volume Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Setting the Volume  
for Guidance and Phone on page 165.  
: Contacts*  
Displays the “Contacts List” screen.  
= For details, refer to Calling a number in  
the phone book on page 62.  
!
On (default):  
Switches from the AV operation screen to  
the map screen.  
!
Off:  
Does not switch the screen.  
p This setting is effective only when “Close  
Up View” is set to “On”.  
: Whole Route Overview  
Displays the entire route (currently set) with  
the “Route Overview” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the route  
overview on page 43.  
Selecting the “Quick Access”  
menu  
!
: Traffic on Route  
Displays a list of traffic information on the  
route.  
= For details, refer to Checking traffic infor-  
mation on the route on page 52.  
: Traffic Events  
Displays a list of traffic events information.  
= For details, refer to Checking all traffic in-  
formation on page 51.  
Select items to display on the map screen. In  
the list displayed on screen, the items with red  
checks are displayed on the map screen.  
Touch the item you want to display and then  
touch [OK] when a red check appears. You  
can select up to five items.  
!
!
1
Display the “Map Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
map settings on page 156.  
: Day/Night Display  
Switches Day/Night Display setting.  
= For details, refer to Setting the map color  
change between day and night on the  
previous page.  
2
Touch [Quick Access Selection].  
The “Quick Access Selection” screen appears.  
3
Touch the item that you want to set in  
!
!
: Favorites Icon  
“Quick Access”.  
Switches Favorites Icon setting.  
= For details, refer to Setting the display of  
icons of favorite locations on page 158.  
: Position Fix  
When the vehicle position enters a different  
street parallel to the street you are traveling,  
the vehicle position returns to the street you  
are traveling.  
You can select the following items:  
p Settings marked with an asterisk (*) show  
that these are default or factory settings.  
!
: Registration*  
Register information on the location indi-  
cated by the cursor to “Favorites”.  
= For details, refer to Registering a location  
by scroll mode on page 47.  
: Vicinity Search*  
!
4
To finish the setting, touch [OK].  
Find POIs (Points Of Interest) in the vicinity  
of the cursor.  
= For details, refer to Searching for a nearby  
POI on page 38.  
: Overlay POI*  
Displays icons for surrounding facilities  
(POI) on the map.  
Displaying the screen for  
system settings  
!
1
Press the HOME button to display the  
“Top Menu” screen.  
162  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
32  
2
Touch [Settings].  
Selecting the language  
The “Settings Menu” screen appears.  
p This can also be operated using the “Short-  
cut Menu” screen.  
You can set the languages used on the pro-  
gram and voice guidance. Each language can  
be set separately.  
3
Touch [System Settings].  
1
Display the “System Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
system settings on the previous page.  
2
Touch [Regional Settings].  
The “Regional Settings” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Program Language].  
The language list is displayed.  
4
Touch the desired language.  
The “System Settings” screen appears.  
Touch the item that you want to  
After the language is selected, the previous  
screen returns.  
4
change the setting.  
5
Touch [Voice Language].  
The “Voice Language Selection” screen ap-  
pears.  
6
Touch the desired language.  
After the language is selected, the previous  
screen returns.  
7
Touch [OK] on the “Regional Settings”  
screen.  
#
If you touch , the previous screen returns.  
A message confirming whether to restart the  
navigation system appears.  
Customizing the regional settings  
8
Touch [OK].  
1
Display the “System Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
system settings on the previous page.  
The navigation system restarts.  
Setting the time difference  
2
Touch [Regional Settings].  
Adjusts the system’s clock. Set the time differ-  
ence (+, –) from the time originally set in your  
navigation system.  
The “Regional Settings” screen appears.  
1
Display the “System Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
system settings on the previous page.  
2
Touch [Regional Settings].  
The “Regional Settings” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Time].  
The “Time Settings” screen appears.  
163  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
32  
Customizing preferences  
4
To set the time difference, touch [+] or  
3
Touch [km / mile].  
[–].  
A message confirming whether to change the  
setting appears.  
4
Touch [Yes].  
Each time you touch the key changes the set-  
ting.  
!
!
!
mile (default):  
Shows distance in miles.  
Mile&Yard:  
Shows distance in miles and yards.  
km:  
Shows distance in kilometers.  
The time difference between the time origin-  
ally set in the navigation system (Pacific Stan-  
dard Time) and the current location of your  
vehicle is shown. If necessary, adjust the time  
difference. Touching [+] or [–] changes the  
time difference display in half-hour incre-  
ments.  
#
If you touch [No], the setting is canceled.  
Changing the virtual speed of the vehicle  
When calculating the expected time of arrival  
and the travel time to the destination, set the  
average speed for the freeway or ordinary  
roads using [+] and [–].  
The time difference can be set from “–4” to  
“+9” hours.  
5
Touch [Summer Time].  
1
Display the “System Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
system settings on page 162.  
Summer time setting is off by default. Touch  
[Summer Time] to change the setting if you  
are in the summer time period.  
2
Touch [Regional Settings].  
6
Touch [Time format].  
The “Regional Settings” screen appears.  
Each time you touch the key changes the set-  
ting.  
3
Touch [Average Speed].  
!
12H (default):  
Changes the display to 12-hour format with  
am/pm.  
The “Average Speed Settings” screen ap-  
pears.  
!
24H:  
4
Touch [+] or [–] to set the speed.  
Changes the display to 24-hour format.  
Changing the unit between km and miles  
This setting controls the unit of distance and  
speed displayed on your navigation system.  
1
Display the “System Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
system settings on page 162.  
p The estimated time of arrival may not be  
taken into account other parameters than  
this speed value.  
2
Touch [Regional Settings].  
The “Regional Settings” screen appears.  
5
Touch [OK].  
The settings are complete.  
164  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
32  
A beep sounds.  
Off:  
The beep sound is muted.  
Setting the Volume for  
Guidance and Phone  
The sound volume for the navigation can be  
set. You can separately set the volume of the  
route guidance and the beep sound.  
!
#
If you touch the key next to “VR Beep”, the set-  
ting is changed.  
!
!
On (default):  
Voice recognition beep is enabled.  
Off:  
1
Display the “System Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
system settings on page 162.  
Voice recognition beep is disabled.  
p This function is available for AVIC-Z130BT  
only.  
2
Touch [Volume].  
The “Volume Settings” screen appears.  
4
To finish the setting, touch [OK].  
3
Touch [+] or [–] to set their volume.  
Changing the preinstalled  
splash screen  
You can change the splash screen to the other  
images preinstalled in the navigation system.  
1
Display the “System Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
system settings on page 162.  
On this screen, you can operate the following  
items.  
2
Touch [Splash Screen].  
The “Select Splash Screen” screen appears.  
!
Guidance  
This setting controls the guidance volume  
of navigation.  
p When set to , guidance is output.  
When set to , no guidance is output.  
Phone Ringtone  
This setting controls the incoming ring tone  
volume.  
Phone Voice  
3
Touch the image to use as the splash  
screen from the list.  
The image is displayed on the screen.  
!
!
4
Touch [OK].  
The image is set as the splash screen, and the  
“System Settings” screen returns.  
This setting controls the incoming voice vo-  
lume.  
p “Phone Ringtone” and “Phone Voice” ad-  
justments are needed only when the cellu-  
lar phone featuring Bluetooth technology is  
connected.  
p Volume of the AV source is adjusted by the  
VOL (+/–) button or Multi-control.  
= For details, refer to Checking part names  
and functions on page 12.  
If you touch the key next to “Beep”, the setting  
Changing to the splash screen  
stored in the SD memory card  
You can change the splash screen to other  
images stored in the SD memory card. Copy  
your chosen image to the SD memory card,  
and select the image to import.  
p Splash screen images should be used with-  
in the following formats;  
!
!
BMP or JPEG files  
#
Allowable horizontal and vertical size  
are 2 592 pixels x 1 944 pixels or smaller  
Allowable data size is 6 MB or smaller  
is changed.  
!
On (default):  
!
165  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
32  
Customizing preferences  
p Proper compatibility with allowable files is  
not guaranteed.  
Setting for rear view camera  
The following two functions are available. The  
rear view camera feature requires a separately  
sold rear view camera (e.g. ND-BC4). (For de-  
tails, consult your dealer.)  
p Imported original images will be stored in  
the built-in memory, but the ability to save  
these images cannot be guaranteed com-  
pletely. If your original image data is de-  
leted, insert the SD memory card again  
and re-import the original image.  
p The maximum number of images, includ-  
ing the images in the built-in memory, that  
can be imported and displayed on the list is  
200.  
Rear view camera  
The navigation system features a function that  
automatically switches to the full-screen  
image of the rear view camera installed on  
your vehicle. When the shift lever is in the RE-  
VERSE (R) position, the screen automatically  
switches to full-screen rear view camera  
image.  
1
Create a folder named “Pictures” on the  
top-most directory of the SD memory card.  
Camera for Rear view mode  
2
Store the picture files in the “Pictures”  
Rear view can be displayed at all times (e.g.  
when monitoring an attached trailer, etc.) as a  
split screen where map information is partially  
displayed. Please be aware that with this set-  
ting, camera image is not resized to fit, and  
that a portion of what is seen by the camera is  
not viewable.  
folder.  
3
Insert an SD memory card into the SD  
card slot.  
= For details of the operation, refer to Insert-  
ing and ejecting an SD memory card on  
page 16.  
= For details, refer to Setting for rear view  
camera on this page.  
4
5
Display the “System Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
system settings on page 162.  
CAUTION  
Pioneer recommends the use of a camera which  
outputs mirror reversed images, otherwise the  
screen image may appear reversed.  
Touch [Splash Screen].  
The “Select Splash Screen” screen appears.  
6
Touch [Select from SD].  
p Immediately verify whether the display  
changes to a rear view camera image when  
the shift lever is moved to REVERSE (R)  
from another position.  
p When the screen changes to full-screen  
rear view camera image during normal  
driving, switch to the opposite setting in  
“Polarity”.  
The “Select Splash Screen” screen appears.  
7
Touch the image to use as the splash  
screen from the list.  
The image is displayed on the screen.  
8
Touch [OK].  
The image is set as the splash screen, and the  
“System Settings” screen returns.  
p Images imported from the SD memory card  
are added to the list on “Select Splash  
Screen”.  
1
Display the “System Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
system settings on page 162.  
2
Touch [Back Camera].  
The “Back Camera Settings” screen appears.  
166  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
32  
3
Touch [Camera].  
Setting the illumination color  
This changes the setting to “On”.  
p You can only switch to “Rear View” if this  
setting is “On”.  
The illumination color can be selected from 8  
different colors. Furthermore, the illumination  
color can be switched between these 8 colors  
in order.  
4
Touch [Polarity] to select an appropriate  
setting for polarity.  
Each time you touch [Polarity] switches be-  
tween the following polarity:  
Selecting the color from the preset  
colors  
!
Battery: When the polarity of the con-  
nected lead is positive while the shift lever  
is in the REVERSE (R) position  
1
Display the “System Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
system settings on page 162.  
!
GND: When the polarity of the connected  
lead is negative while the shift lever is in  
the REVERSE (R) position  
2
Touch [Illumi Color].  
The “Illumination Color” screen appears.  
3
Touch the color you want.  
Adjusting the response  
positions of the touch panel  
(touch panel calibration)  
If you feel that the touch panel keys on the  
screen deviate from the actual positions that  
respond to your touch, adjust the response po-  
sitions of the touch panel screen.  
p Do not use a sharp pointed tool such as a  
ballpoint pen or a mechanical pen, which  
could damage the screen.  
Available options:  
!
Colored keys: Selects the desired preset  
color  
1
Display the “System Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
system settings on page 162.  
!
Memory 1/Memory 2 : Colors registered in  
the memory  
= For details, refer to Creating a user-de-  
fined color and storing it to memory on  
the next page.  
Scan: Shifts between the eight default col-  
ors in sequence gradually.  
Eco: The colors change in the order of  
white, red, amber, yellow, green, and blue  
as the number of points in the “Eco Score”  
increases.  
2
Touch [Screen Calibration].  
A message confirming whether to start the ca-  
libration appears.  
!
!
3
Gently touch the center of + mark dis-  
played on the screen.  
The target indicates the order.  
After you touch all marks, the adjusted posi-  
tion data is saved.  
p The illumination lights in white when  
“Eco Score” is set to “Off” or when no  
route is set.  
p Do not turn off the engine while saving the  
adjusted position data.  
#
If you press the MODE button, the previous  
adjustment position returns.  
If you press and hold the MODE button, the  
adjustment is canceled.  
#
167  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
32  
Customizing preferences  
Creating a user-defined color and  
storing it to memory  
You can create a user-defined color and set it  
as the illumination color.  
Checking the version information  
1
Display the “System Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
system settings on page 162.  
1
Display the “System Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
system settings on page 162.  
2
Touch [Service Information].  
The “Service Information Screen” screen ap-  
pears.  
2
Touch [Illumi Color].  
3
Check the version information.  
The “Illumination Color” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Custom].  
Selecting the video for rear  
display  
You can choose either to show the same  
image as the front screen or to show the se-  
lected source on the rear display.  
The “Illumination Color” screen appears.  
p If [Scan] is set, [Custom] cannot be se-  
lected.  
4
Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the values for  
Red, Green and Blue to create a favorite  
color.  
1
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 70.  
2
Tap  
on the left edge of the screen.  
p The appearance of this key changes accord-  
ing to the current setting.  
p While the tuner is receiving an emergency  
announcement, traffic announcement, or  
news program, the current setting cannot  
be changed.  
Watch the illumination of hardware keys while  
adjusting the color.  
Each time you touch [+] or [–] increases or de-  
creases the value of the selected item. +31 to  
+00 is displayed as the value is increased or  
decreased.  
Each touch of  
lows:  
changes the settings as fol-  
!
Mirror AV: The video on the front screen of  
the navigation unit is output to the rear dis-  
play  
p An entry cannot be stored with all of the va-  
!
!
!
!
DISC: The video and sound of the DVDs are  
output to the rear display  
iPod: The video and sound of the iPod are  
output to the rear display  
AV1: The video and sound of AV1 are out-  
put to the rear display  
AV2: The video and sound of AV2 are out-  
put to the rear display  
lues set to “+00”.  
5
Touch [Memory 1] or [Memory 2] to  
store the illumination color.  
6
Touch [OK] to return to the previous  
screen.  
p When “Mirror AV” is selected, the following  
restrictions are applied to rear display.  
— When selecting “Rear View” in the map  
display, nothing is displayed.  
168  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
32  
— All sounds cannot be output for rear dis-  
play.  
2
Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the desired  
item.  
— When playing back video files on the ex-  
ternal storage device (USB, SD), the  
video image is not output.  
p When “DISC” is selected, the following re-  
striction is applied to rear display.  
— When a CD or MP3/WMA/AAC disc is  
set in the built-in DVD drive, only the  
sound is output.  
p When “iPod” is selected, the following re-  
striction is applied to rear display.  
— The video image and sound are output  
only when the corresponding setting on  
“AV1 Input” is “iPod”.  
p When “AV1” or “AV2” is selected, the fol-  
lowing restrictions are applied to rear dis-  
play.  
!
!
!
!
Brightness: Adjusts the black intensity.  
Contrast: Adjusts the contrast.  
Color: Adjusts the color saturation.  
Color Temp.: Adjusts the tone of color  
(which color is emphasized, red or blue).  
Dimmer: Adjusts the brightness of display.  
!
p Touching [Camera] switches to the picture  
adjustment screen for the rear view cam-  
era.  
p Touching [Source] while adjusting the rear  
view camera image returns you to the pre-  
vious screen.  
p The adjustments of “Brightness” and  
“Contrast” are stored separately when your  
vehicle’s headlights are off (daytime) and  
when your vehicle’s headlights are on  
(nighttime). These are switched automati-  
cally depending on whether the vehicle’s  
headlights are on or off.  
p The adjustments of “Dimmer” is stored se-  
parately when your vehicle’s headlights are  
off (daytime) and when your vehicle’s head-  
lights are on (nighttime). “Dimmer” is  
switched automatically only when the value  
of nighttime is lower than the value of day-  
time.  
— The video image and sound are output  
only when “AV1” or “AV2” has both  
video and sound.  
— The video image and sound are output  
only when the corresponding setting on  
“AV1 Input” or “AV2 Input” are  
“Video”.  
Adjusting the picture  
CAUTION  
For safety reasons, you cannot use some of these  
navigation functions while your vehicle is in mo-  
tion. To enable these functions, you must stop in  
a safe place and apply the parking brake. Refer to  
Important Information for the User (a separate  
manual).  
p You cannot adjust “Color” for the source  
without a video and navigation map display.  
p The setting contents can be memorized se-  
parately for the following screen and the  
video image.  
You can adjust the picture for each source and  
rear view camera.  
1
Press and hold the MODE button.  
The “Picture Adjustment” screen appears.  
!
Audio source  
169  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
32  
Customizing preferences  
— AM/FM/CD/ROM/iPod(Music)/SD  
(audio)/USB(audio)/Bluetooth  
audio/XM/SIRIUS/HD Radio/EXT1  
(audio), EXT2(audio)/source off  
screen/menu screens/others  
3
Touch [AV Settings].  
!
Video source  
— AV1 and iPod(Video)  
— DVD-V and DivX  
— SD(Video) and USB(Video)  
— AV2(Video) and EXT1(Video), EXT2  
(Video)  
The “AV System Settings” menu appears.  
Touch the item that you want to  
— Rear view camera image  
Map screen  
4
!
change the setting.  
p The picture adjustment may not be avail-  
able with some rear view cameras.  
p Because of the LCD screen characteristics,  
you may not be able to adjust the screen at  
low temperatures.  
AVIC-Z130BT  
3
Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the desired  
item.  
Each touch of [+] or [–] increases or decreases  
the level of the desired item.  
AVIC-X930BT, AVIC-X9310BT  
4
Touch  
.
The previous screen returns.  
Displaying the screen for  
AV system settings  
1
Press the HOME button to display the  
“Top Menu” screen.  
#
If you touch , the previous screen returns.  
2
Touch [Settings].  
Setting video input 1 (AV1)  
You can switch this setting according to the  
connected component.  
p This setting applies to mini-jack input.  
1
Display the “AV System Settings”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
AV system settings on this page.  
The “Settings Menu” screen appears.  
2
Touch [AV1 Input].  
Each touch of [AV1 Input] changes the set-  
ting as follows:  
170  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
32  
!
iPod: iPod connected with the USB Inter-  
face cable for iPod (CD-IU51V) (sold sepa-  
rately)  
Video: External video component  
Off: No video component is connected.  
!
Cinema (cinema)  
A picture is enlarged by the same propor-  
tion as “Full” or “Zoom” in the horizontal di-  
rection and by an intermediate proportion  
between “Full” and “Zoom” in the vertical  
direction; ideal for a cinema-sized picture  
(wide screen picture) where captions lie  
outside the frame.  
!
!
p Use “AV1 Input” when connecting CD-  
RM10 (sold separately) through the external  
video component.  
!
!
Zoom (zoom)  
A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the same pro-  
portion both vertically and horizontally;  
ideal for a cinema-sized picture (wide  
screen picture).  
Setting video input 2 (AV2)  
You can switch this setting according to the  
connected component.  
p This setting applies to RCA inputs  
(AUDIO INPUT and VIDEO INPUT) on the  
back of the system.  
Normal (normal)  
A 4:3 picture is displayed normally, giving  
you no sense of disparity since its propor-  
tions are the same as that of the normal  
picture.  
1
Display the “AV System Settings”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
p Different settings can be stored for each  
video source.  
p The same setting is automatically applied  
for the following grouping.  
AV system settings on the previous page.  
2
Touch [AV2 Input].  
!
!
!
DVD-V and DivX  
AV1 and AV2  
EXT1 and EXT2  
Each touch of [AV2 Input] changes the set-  
ting as follows:  
!
!
Off: No video component is connected.  
EXT: Pioneer external unit connected with  
the RCA video cable  
p When viewing videos, select an appropriate  
wide screen mode that matches its original  
aspect ratio to view it comfortably.  
p Remember that use of this system for com-  
mercial or public viewing purposes may  
constitute an infringement on the author’s  
rights protected by the Copyright Law.  
p The navigation map and the rear view cam-  
era picture is always viewed at “Full”.  
!
Video: External video component  
Changing the wide screen mode  
p You can only adjust “Wide Mode” when se-  
lecting an AV source with video.  
1
Display the “AV System Settings”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
Setting the rear output  
The navigation system’s rear output can be  
used for a full-range speaker or subwoofer  
connection. If you switch “Rear SP” to  
“Sub. W”, you can connect a rear speaker lead  
directly to a subwoofer without using an auxili-  
ary amp.  
AV system settings on the previous page.  
2
Touch [Wide Mode].  
Each touch of [Wide Mode] changes the set-  
ting as follows:  
!
Full (full)  
A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal  
direction only, enabling you to enjoy a 4:3  
TV picture (normal picture) without any  
omissions.  
Initially, the navigation system is set for a rear  
full-range speaker connection (“Full”).  
171  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
32  
Customizing preferences  
— When you use a cellular phone via  
Bluetooth technology (dialing, talking,  
incoming call).  
— When the voice recognition mode is ac-  
tivated.  
p Both rear speaker leads output and RCA  
rear output are switched simultaneously in  
this setting. (When you use the product  
without RCA rear output, this setting only  
applies to the rear speaker leads.)  
!
!
Tel/VR: The volume is muted or attenuated  
according to the following conditions.  
— When you use a cellular phone via  
Bluetooth technology (dialing, talking,  
incoming call).  
— When the voice recognition mode is ac-  
tivated.  
Off: The volume does not change.  
p “Rear SP” can be set only when the source  
is selected to “Off”.  
1
Display the “AV System Settings”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
AV system settings on page 170.  
2
Touch [Rear SP].  
AVIC-X930BT, AVIC-X9310BT  
!
Each touch of [Rear SP] changes the settings  
as follows:  
Guide/Tel: The volume is muted or attenu-  
ated according to the following conditions.  
— When the navigation outputs the gui-  
dance voice.  
— When you use a cellular phone via  
Bluetooth technology (dialing, talking,  
incoming call).  
Tel: The volume is muted or attenuated  
when you use a cellular phone via  
Bluetooth technology (dialing, talking, in-  
coming call).  
!
Full  
When no subwoofer is connected to the  
rear output, select “Full”.  
Sub. W  
!
When a subwoofer is connected to the rear  
output, select “Sub. W”.  
!
!
Switching the muting/  
attenuation timing  
You can mute the AV source volume or attenu-  
ate the output signal.  
p Even if this setting is “Off”, the navigation  
system will mute or attenuate the AV  
source volume when the mute signal is out-  
put via MUTE lead.  
Off: The volume does not change.  
p AV source volume returns to normal when  
the corresponding action ends.  
Switching the muting/  
attenuation level  
You can select the muting/attenuation level of  
“Mute”. This setting is also effective for a  
mute signal that has been received from the  
MUTE lead connected to the navigation unit.  
p This menu is not available when AV source  
is “Off”.  
1
Display the “AV System Settings”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
AV system settings on page 170.  
2
Touch [Mute].  
Each touch of [Mute] changes the settings as  
follows:  
AVIC-Z130BT  
1
Display the “AV System Settings”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
!
Guide/Tel/VR: The volume is muted or atte-  
nuated according to the following condi-  
tions.  
AV system settings on page 170.  
2
Touch [Mute Level].  
— When the navigation outputs the gui-  
dance voice.  
Each touch of [Mute Level] changes the set-  
tings as follows:  
172  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
32  
!
!
!
20dB: The volume becomes 1/10.  
10dB: The volume becomes 1/3.  
All: The volume becomes 0.  
— Switching the operation screen  
p Once the cataloging is completed, you can  
deactivate “VR Catalog Menu” until you  
update the content/data on iPod. If you up-  
date the iPod data, activate “VR Catalog  
Menu” again to transfer the music infor-  
mation and synchronize the music informa-  
tion for voice commands with the data on  
iPod.  
p When you select “All”, no audio adjust-  
ments are possible during the sound is  
turned off.  
p When you select “20dB” or “10dB”, no  
audio adjustments are possible during the  
sound is attenuated.  
p AV source volume returns to normal when  
the corresponding action ends.  
p Even when a mute signal has been received  
from MUTE lead connected to the naviga-  
tion unit, navigation voice guidance cannot  
be attenuated or muted.  
p After you select “Off” in “VR Catalog  
Mode”, the system doesn’t catalog the  
data on the iPod. In such case, the pre-  
viously cataloged data are available as  
voice commands.  
p Once you start the cataloging process, only  
a few basic voice commands can be used  
for iPod until the process has completely  
finished.  
Acquiring/Cataloging iPod  
music information  
p This function is available for AVIC-Z130BT  
p If unreadable characters are included in  
the data on your iPod, names or types may  
not be available as voice commands.  
only.  
Important Notice regarding Voice  
Control for iPods  
If you always set the language other than “US  
English” on “Voice Language”, this setting is  
unnecessary.  
Voice Control for iPods may be limited if cata-  
loging of iPod content is not completed. Cata-  
loging of iPod content only occurs when the  
system is in “AV Source & Contents” mode  
and the “iPod” is the selected and “AV  
Source” screen displayed. Cataloging of iPod  
content will not occur if the system is off, if  
any other “AV Source & Contents” is selected  
(aside from iPod), or if the system is in any  
other mode (aside from “AV Source & Con-  
tents” mode) such as “Destination Menu”,  
“Settings Menu”, “Phone Menu” or the map  
screen. If you wish to use Voice Control for all  
iPod content, it is recommended that you first  
connect your iPod, select “iPod” as the AV  
source, and keep the iPod screen displayed  
until cataloging is completed. Cataloging of  
iPod content should only take a few minutes,  
and will depend on the size of the content  
stored on your iPod. A message will be dis-  
played when cataloging is complete.  
Unless “VR Catalog Mode” is turned off, this  
navigation system tries to acquire the informa-  
tion needed to operate iPod with voice com-  
mands. It may take a short period of time to  
transfer the information. Change the setting  
according to your usage.  
The navigation system starts acquiring/catalo-  
ging music information (1) when the iPod is  
connected or when the system boots up while  
the iPod is connected and (2) when iPod is the  
selected and displayed AV Source, unless “VR  
Catalog Mode” is turned off.  
p This function is available when “Change  
Control Mode” is set to “Navi”.  
p If you do not use iPod, this setting is un-  
necessary.  
p During transfer, the following iPod opera-  
tions are not available.  
— Setting the shuffle play for music  
— Displaying the top category menu  
173  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
32  
Customizing preferences  
1
Display the “AV System Settings”  
p This feature is available when the selected  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
source is CD, ROM, DivX, or DVD-V.  
1
Display the “AV System Settings”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
AV system settings on page 170.  
2
3
Touch [VR Catalog Menu].  
AV system settings on page 170.  
Touch [On] or [Off] to activate or deacti-  
vate “VR Catalog Mode”.  
If you touch [Pause], the cataloging of iPod  
stops.  
2
Touch [DivX® VOD].  
#
The screen where you can choose to display a  
registration code or deregistration code is dis-  
played.  
If you want to restart the cataloging of iPod,  
touch [Restart].  
p If a registration code has not been acti-  
vated, the deregistration code is not dis-  
played.  
Displaying your DivX VOD  
registration code  
In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand)  
content on this navigation system, you first  
need to register the unit with your DivX VOD  
content provider. You do this by generating a  
DivX VOD registration code, which you submit  
to your provider.  
3
Touch [Deregistration Code].  
Your 8-digit deregistration code is displayed.  
p Make a note of the code as you will need it  
when you deregister with a DivX VOD  
provider.  
Displaying the screen for  
AV sound settings  
p This feature is available when the selected  
source is CD, ROM, DivX, or DVD-V.  
1
Display the “AV System Settings”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
1
Press the HOME button to display the  
“Top Menu” screen.  
2
Touch [Settings].  
AV system settings on page 170.  
2
Touch [DivX® VOD].  
The screen where you can choose to display a  
registration code or deregistration code is dis-  
played.  
p If a registration code has already been acti-  
vated, it cannot be displayed.  
3
Touch [Registration Code].  
The “Settings Menu” screen appears.  
Your 10-digit registration code is displayed.  
p Make a note of the code as you will need it  
when you register with a DivX VOD provider.  
Displaying your DivX VOD  
deregistration code  
A registration code registered with a deregis-  
tration code can be deleted.  
174  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
32  
3
Touch [AV Sound].  
3
Touch [a] or [b] to adjust front/rear  
speaker balance.  
Each time you touch [a] or [b], the front/rear  
speaker balance moves towards the front or  
the rear.  
“Front: 15” to “Rear: 15” is displayed as the  
front/rear speaker balance moves from front to  
rear.  
Set “Front:” and “Rear:” to “0” when using a  
two-speaker system.  
The “AV Sound Settings” screen appears.  
p You cannot make adjustments in the follow-  
ing situations:  
4
Touch [c] or [d] to adjust left/right  
speaker balance.  
!
!
AV source is “Off”.  
During muting/attenuation  
Each time you touch [c] or [d], the left/right  
speaker balance moves towards the left or the  
right.  
4
Touch the item that you want to  
change the setting.  
“Left: 15” to “Right: 15” is displayed as the  
left/right speaker balance moves from left to  
right.  
#
If you touch , the previous screen returns.  
Using balance adjustment  
You can select a fader/balance setting that  
provides an ideal listening environment in all  
occupied seats.  
Using the equalizer  
The equalizer lets you adjust equalization to  
match vehicle interior acoustic characteristics  
as desired.  
1
Display the “AV Sound Settings”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
Recalling equalizer curves  
There are seven stored equalizer curves that  
you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list  
of the equalizer curves:  
AV sound settings on the previous page.  
2
Touch [FAD/BAL].  
When “Sub. W” is selected in “Rear SP”,  
[Balance] will be displayed instead of  
[FAD/BAL] and front/rear speaker balance  
cannot be adjusted.  
= For details, refer to Setting the rear output  
on page 171.  
Equalizer curve  
S.Bass (Super Bass) is a curve in which only low-  
pitched sound is boosted.  
Powerful is a curve in which low-pitched and high-  
pitched sounds are boosted.  
Natural is a curve in which low-pitched and high-  
pitched sounds are slightly boosted.  
175  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
32  
Customizing preferences  
p If Auto EQ has been set to “On”, an image  
corresponding to each equalizer curve you  
selected appears.  
Equalizer curve  
Vocal is a curve in which the midrange, which is the  
human vocal range, is boosted.  
Flat is a flat curve in which nothing is boosted.  
Custom1 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre-  
ate. A separate custom curve can be created for each  
source.  
Custom2 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre-  
ate. If you select this curve, the effect is reflected all  
AV source.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Adjust-  
ing the equalizer curve automatically (Auto  
EQ) on the next page.  
p When “Flat” is selected, no supplement or  
correction is made to the sound. This is  
useful to check the effect of the equalizer  
curves by switching alternatively between  
“Flat” and a set equalizer curve.  
Customizing the equalizer curves  
p You cannot select “Custom1” and “Cus-  
tom2” when “Auto EQ” is “On”.  
You can adjust the currently selected equalizer  
curve setting as desired. Adjustments can be  
made with a 8-band graphic equalizer.  
p This function is not available when “Auto  
EQ” is “On”.  
= For details, refer to Using the auto-ad-  
justed equalizer on the next page.  
1
Display the “AV Sound Settings”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
= For details, refer to Using the auto-ad-  
justed equalizer on the next page.  
AV sound settings on page 174.  
The difference between “Custom1” and  
“Custom2”  
!
2
Touch [EQ].  
A separate “Custom1” curve can be cre-  
ated for each source. If you make adjust-  
ments when a curve “S.Bass (Super Bass)”,  
“Powerful”, “Natural”, “Vocal”, “Flat”, or  
“Custom1” is selected, the equalizer curve  
settings will be memorized in “Custom1”.  
A “Custom2” curve can be created com-  
mon to all sources. If you make adjust-  
ments when “Custom2” curve is selected,  
the “Custom2” curve will be updated.  
The “Custom1” curve is applied to each of  
the source selected, but you can apply the  
same curve to the following sources.  
— AM and FM  
!
!
3
Touch the equalizer you want.  
— EXT1 and EXT2  
— AV1 and AV2  
— CD, ROM, DVD-V, and DivX  
— SD and USB  
p The different curve can be memorized  
between iPod and USB.  
176  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
32  
1
Display the “AV Sound Settings”  
3
Touch the key next to “Auto EQ” to  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
turn the auto-adjusted equalizer on or off.  
4
Select the equalizer curve.  
AV sound settings on page 174.  
2
3
Touch [EQ].  
Adjusting the equalizer curve  
automatically (Auto EQ)  
By measuring the vehicle’s acoustics, the  
equalizer curve can be adjusted automatically  
to suit the interior of the vehicle.  
Touch one of the keys to select a curve  
that you want to use as the basis of custo-  
mizing.  
4
5
Touch [Customize].  
Touch the frequency that you want to  
WARNING  
adjust the level.  
A loud tone (noise) may be emitted from the  
speakers when measuring the vehicle’s acous-  
tics. Never perform the Auto EQ measurement  
while driving.  
CAUTION  
!
Thoroughly check the conditions before per-  
forming Auto EQ, as the speakers may be da-  
maged if this is performed under the following  
conditions:  
6
Touch [a] or [b] to adjust the level of  
— When the speakers are incorrectly con-  
nected. (For example, when a rear speaker  
is connected as a subwoofer output.)  
— When a speaker is connected to a power  
amp delivering output higher than the  
speaker’s maximum input power capabil-  
ity.  
If the microphone for acoustical measure-  
ment (sold separately) is not placed in an ap-  
propriate location, the measurement tone may  
become loud and measurement may take a  
long time, resulting in battery drainage. Be  
sure to place the microphone in the specified  
location.  
the equalizer band.  
Each time you touch [a] or [b], the level of  
the equalizer band increases or decreases.  
Using the auto-adjusted equalizer  
You can set the auto-adjusted equalizer to suit  
the vehicle’s acoustics. To use this function,  
the vehicle’s acoustics must be measured in  
advance.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Adjust-  
ing the equalizer curve automatically (Auto  
EQ) on this page.  
!
p To manually adjust the equalizer curve, set  
“Auto EQ” to “Off”.  
1
Display the “AV Sound Settings”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
AV sound settings on page 174.  
2
Touch [EQ].  
177  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
32  
Customizing preferences  
— Microphone for acoustical measure-  
ment (sold separately)  
— Low battery  
Before operating the Auto EQ function  
!
Perform Auto EQ in as quiet a place as pos-  
sible, with the vehicle engine and air condi-  
tioning switched off. Also, cut power to car  
phones or cellular phones in the vehicle, or  
remove them from the vehicle before per-  
forming Auto EQ. Sounds other than the  
measurement tone (surrounding sounds,  
engine sound, telephones ringing, etc.)  
may prevent correct measurement of the  
vehicle’s acoustics.  
Performing Auto EQ  
p Auto EQ changes the audio settings as fol-  
lows:  
!
“Auto EQ” on the “EQ Menu” screen is  
set to “On”.  
= For details, refer to Using the auto-ad-  
justed equalizer on the previous  
page.  
!
Be sure to perform Auto EQ using the mi-  
crophone for acoustical measurement  
(sold separately). Using another micro-  
phone may prevent measurement, or result  
in incorrect measurement of the vehicle’s  
acoustics.  
!
The fader/balance settings return to the  
center position.  
= For details, refer to Using balance ad-  
justment on page 175.  
!
!
The equalizer curve switches to “Flat”.  
= For details, refer to Using the equali-  
zer on page 175.  
The front and rear speakers will automa-  
tically be adjusted to a high pass filter  
setting.  
!
!
To perform Auto EQ, the front speakers  
must be connected.  
When this navigation system is connected  
to a power amp with input level control,  
Auto EQ may not be able to be performed if  
the power amp’s input level is set below  
the standard level.  
p Previous settings for Auto EQ will be over-  
written.  
!
!
When this navigation system is connected  
to a power amp with an LPF, turn the LPF  
off before performing Auto EQ. Also, set  
the cut-off frequency for the built-in LPF of  
an active subwoofer to the highest fre-  
quency.  
The distance has been calculated by com-  
puter to provide the optimum delay to en-  
sure accurate results. Do not change this  
value.  
p For AVIC-Z130BT users  
Do not press the h button to open or close  
the panel when you are using the micro-  
phone.  
1
Stop the vehicle in a place that is quiet,  
close all the doors, windows and sun roof,  
and then turn the engine off.  
If the engine is left running, engine noise may  
prevent correct Auto EQ.  
— The reflected sound within the vehicle is  
strong and delays occur.  
p If driving restrictions are detected during  
measurement, measurement is canceled.  
— The LPF on active subwoofers or exter-  
nal amps delay the lower sounds.  
If an error occurs during measurement, a  
message appears and measurement is  
canceled. Check the following before mea-  
suring the vehicle’s acoustics.  
— Front speakers (left/right)  
— Rear speakers (left/right)  
— Noise  
2
Fix the microphone for acoustical mea-  
surement (sold separately) in the center of  
the headrest of the driver’s seat, facing for-  
ward.  
The Auto EQ may differ depending on where  
you place the microphone. If desired, place  
the microphone on the front passenger seat  
and perform Auto EQ.  
!
178  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
32  
9
Touch [Start].  
A 10-second countdown starts.  
10 Exit the vehicle and keep the door  
closed until the countdown finishes.  
When the countdown is over, a measurement  
tone (noise) is emitted from the speakers and  
the Auto EQ measurement begins.  
11 Wait until the measurement is com-  
pleted.  
When Auto EQ is completed, a message is dis-  
played indicating that the measurement is  
completed.  
p If the vehicle’s acoustics cannot be mea-  
sured correctly, an error message will be  
displayed.  
p The measurement time varies depending  
on the type of vehicle.  
p To stop the measurement, touch [Stop].  
3
Turn the ignition switch to ON or ACC.  
If the vehicle’s air conditioner or heater is  
turned on, turn it off. Noise from the fan in the  
air conditioner or heater may prevent correct  
Auto EQ.  
4
Turn off the AV source.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 70.  
5
Set the video setting for the rear dis-  
12 Touch [OK].  
play to “Mirror AV”.  
13 Store the microphone carefully in the  
glove compartment or another safe place.  
If the microphone is subjected to direct sun-  
light for an extended period of time, high tem-  
peratures may cause distortion, color change  
or malfunction.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Select-  
ing the video for rear display on page 168.  
6
Display the “AV System Settings”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
AV system settings on page 170.  
7
Touch [Auto EQ Meas.].  
Using sonic center control  
Sound that is suited for the listening position  
can easily be created with this function.  
The “Auto EQ Measurement” screen ap-  
pears.  
8
Plug the microphone into the mini-jack  
1
Display the “AV Sound Settings”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
connector.  
USB and mini-jack connector  
AV sound settings on page 174.  
2
3
Touch [Sonic Center Control].  
Touch [c] or [d] to select a listening po-  
sition.  
p The larger the value of the range: “Left7” to  
“Right7” setting, the greater the delay of  
the speaker output.  
Microphone for acoustical measurement (sold separately)  
179  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
32  
Customizing preferences  
p When “Left” is set, the left speaker output  
is delayed. When “Right” is set, the right  
speaker output is delayed.  
4
Touch [Reverse] or [Normal] to select  
the phase of subwoofer output.  
5
Touch [+] or [–] next to “Level” to adjust  
the output level.  
“+6” to “–24” is displayed as the level is in-  
creased or decreased.  
Adjusting loudness  
Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the  
low- and high-sound ranges at low volume.  
6
Touch [c] or [d] next to  
“Frequency(Hz)” to select cut-off fre-  
quency.  
1
Display the “AV Sound Settings”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
Each time you touch [c] or [d], cut-off fre-  
quencies are selected in the following order:  
50Hz — 63Hz — 80Hz — 100Hz — 125Hz  
Only frequencies lower than those in the se-  
lected range are output from the subwoofer.  
AV sound settings on page 174.  
2
Touch [Loudness].  
Each time you touch [Loudness], the level is  
selected in the following order:  
Off — Low — Mid — High  
Using the high pass filter  
When you cut lower sounds from the subwoo-  
fer output frequency, activate HPF (high pass  
filter). Only frequencies higher than those in  
the selected range are output from the front or  
rear speakers.  
Using subwoofer output  
The navigation system is equipped with a sub-  
woofer output mechanism, which can be  
turned on or off.  
p This function is not available when “Sub  
Woofer” is “Off”.  
1
Display the “AV Sound Settings”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
1
Display the “AV Sound Settings”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
AV sound settings on page 174.  
2
Touch [HPF].  
AV sound settings on page 174.  
Touch [Sub Woofer].  
Touch [On].  
Each time you touch [HPF] selects cut-off fre-  
quencies in the following order:  
Off — 50Hz — 63Hz — 80Hz — 100Hz —  
125Hz  
2
3
The subwoofer output is turned on.  
Adjusting source levels  
SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust  
the volume level of each source to prevent ra-  
dical changes in volume when switching be-  
tween sources.  
p Settings are based on the FM tuner volume  
level, which remains unchanged.  
p You cannot select [SLA] when the FM tuner  
is selected as the AV source.  
#
If you touch [Off], the subwoofer output is  
turned off.  
180  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
32  
1
Compare the FM tuner volume level  
2
Insert an SD memory card into the SD  
with the level of the source you wish to ad-  
just.  
card slot.  
= For details of the operation, refer to Insert-  
ing and ejecting an SD memory card on  
page 16.  
2
Display the “AV Sound Settings”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
3
Press the HOME button to display the  
AV sound settings on page 174.  
“Top Menu” screen.  
3
4
Touch [SLA].  
4
Touch [Settings].  
The “Settings Menu” screen appears.  
Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the source vo-  
lume.  
5
Touch [Setting Replicator].  
“+8dB” to “–8dB” is displayed as the source  
volume is increased or decreased.  
The following AV sources are set to the same  
source level adjustment volume automatically.  
A message confirming whether to update the  
settings appears.  
6
Touch [Yes].  
Update starts.  
!
!
!
!
CD, ROM, and DivX  
SD and USB  
AV1 and AV2  
EXT1 and EXT2  
After the settings are updated, a message con-  
firming whether to restart the navigation sys-  
tem appears.  
p The different source volume level can be set  
7
Touch [OK].  
between iPod and USB.  
The navigation system restarts.  
Enhancing bass (Bass Booster)  
You can enhance bass sounds that are often  
muted by driving noise.  
Turning off the screen  
By turning off the backlight of the LCD screen,  
you can turn off the screen display without  
turning off the voice guidance.  
1
Display the “AV Sound Settings”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
1
Press the HOME button to display the  
AV sound settings on page 174.  
“Top Menu” screen.  
2
3
Touch [Bass Booster].  
2
Touch [Settings].  
The “Settings Menu” screen appears.  
Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the range from  
0 to 6.  
3
Touch [Screen Off].  
The screen is turned off.  
p Touch anywhere on the screen to turn it  
back on.  
Replicating the settings  
You can import settings you have made on the  
utility program AVIC FEEDS which is available  
separately to the navigation system.  
1
Use AVIC FEEDS to replicate the set-  
tings and store them on an SD memory  
card.  
181  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
33  
Operating your navigation system with voice  
p This function is available for AVIC-Z130BT  
1 Switch the screen to map screen or AV op-  
eration screen.  
only.  
j
To Ensure Safe Driving  
2 Press the  
button to activate voice oper-  
ations.  
CAUTION  
For your safety, avoid viewing the screen in the  
voice operation as much as possible while  
driving.  
j
3 Speak a command into the microphone  
after the beep.  
When the command is recognized, the na-  
vigation system displays next options on  
the screen, and pronounces it in some  
cases.  
If you use voice operation, select “US English”  
or “US English (Samantha):TTS” in “Voice  
Language” of “Regional Settings”. If you se-  
lect other languages, voice operation will not  
be available.  
j
4 Repeat previous step as necessary.  
j
5 The requested operation will be carried out.  
Basics of the voice operation  
Your Pioneer navigation system uses the latest  
in voice recognition technology. You can use  
voice commands to operate many of its func-  
tions. This chapter describes where you can  
use voice commands, and also what com-  
mands the system accepts.  
p The voice operation may not be operable for a  
minute after the navigation system has booted  
up.  
p The voice operation will be activated 30 sec-  
onds after the map screen is displayed.  
If the  
button does not respond, display  
You can use voice commands to operate the  
following functions:  
the disclaimer screen and then touch [OK].  
The map screen is displayed.  
!
!
!
!
!
Searching for a location by address  
Setting the route to the selected POI  
Hands-free phoning  
Switching the AV source  
Operating the iPod  
Starting the voice operation  
%
Press the  
button when the map  
screen or the AV operation screen is dis-  
played.  
p This function is not available while catalo-  
ging of iPod is in progress.  
The voice operation screen appears.  
Flow of the voice operation  
You can start the voice operation any time  
even when the map screen is displayed or AV  
is operating. (Some operations are not avail-  
able.) The basic steps of the voice operations  
are as follows.  
1
2
3
4
182  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Operating your navigation system with voice  
33  
1 Voice help menu:  
4
Say “Find an address”.  
Displays a list of commands for the voice  
operation.  
A message prompting the next operation is  
given.  
2 Voice operation condition indicator:  
5
Say the state name that you want to  
When  
is indicated, the navigation sys-  
set to your destination.  
tem can recognize your voice commands.  
:
Touch to listen to the brief operating in-  
struction.  
3
4
6
Say the city name that you want to set  
to your destination.  
:
7
Say the street name that you want to  
Touch to cancel the voice operation.  
You can cancel the voice operation feature  
at any time by saying “Cancel”. After you  
cancel voice operations, the display returns  
to the screen displayed before the voice op-  
eration screen appeared.  
set to your destination.  
8
Say the house number that you want  
to set to your destination.  
Your navigation system sets the route to your  
destination, and the map of your surroundings  
appears.  
#
If you say “Just go there” , the navigation sys-  
How to use the voice operation  
Searching for a location by address  
tem sets the route to the representative location  
of the city or the street.  
In this example, you want to search for a loca-  
tion by address and set it as your destination.  
p When the list of candidates with number  
appears, say the number that you want to  
select.  
Search for POI in vicinity  
In this example, you want to search for a POI  
and set it as your destination.  
p When the list of candidates with number  
appears, say the number that you want to  
select.  
When you select the entry next to “1”, say  
“Number 1”.  
p If there are multiple items that correspond  
to the name you gave, the list screen ap-  
pears. In this case, touch the item you want  
to select from the list.  
When you select the entry next to “1”, say  
“Number 1”.  
p If there are multiple items that correspond  
to the name you gave, the list screen ap-  
pears. In this case, touch the item you want  
to select from the list.  
1
Press the MODE button to display the  
map screen or the AV operation screen.  
1
Press the MODE button to display the  
2
Press the button to activate voice  
map screen or the AV operation screen.  
operations.  
A list of commands for the voice operation ap-  
pears. After a message, the beep indicates  
that the system is ready to accept your voice  
command. Say a command after this beep.  
2
Press the button to activate voice  
operations.  
A list of commands for the voice operation ap-  
pears. After a message, the beep indicates  
that the system is ready to accept your voice  
command. Say a command after this beep.  
3
Say “I need directions”.  
A message prompting you to select a search  
by address or by POI appears.  
3
Say “I need directions”.  
A message prompting you to select a search  
by address or by POI appears.  
183  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
33  
Operating your navigation system with voice  
4
Say “Point of interest”.  
2
Press the  
button to activate voice  
The list of POI categories appears.  
operations.  
5
Say the category that you want to set  
3
Say “Change Source” to display the AV  
to your destination.  
source selection screen.  
The list of candidates with number appears.  
4
Say “iPod” on the selection screen to  
6
Say the number that you want to  
switch the AV source to iPod.  
select.  
p Touching the item on the screen also en-  
Your navigation system sets the route to your  
destination, and the map of your surroundings  
appears.  
ables you to select the desired AV source.  
5
Press the  
button to activate voice  
operations.  
Calling the entry on the phone book  
6
Say “Play the album Pioneer” to play-  
back the album name “Pioneer”.  
If the command is recognized properly, play-  
back starts from the first song of “Pioneer”.  
A method for dialing the entry named “Nancy”  
is described here along with an operational ex-  
ample.  
1
Press the MODE button to display the  
map screen or the AV operation screen.  
2
Press the  
button to activate voice  
operations.  
3
Say “Call Nancy” to make a call.  
A message confirming whether to dial appear-  
s.  
4
Say “Yes”.  
Dialing starts.  
Operating iPod by voice  
You can play music using voice operation from  
the iPod connected to the navigation system.  
p To use the content/data on the iPod for  
voice operation, transfer the data to this  
system first.  
= For details, refer to Acquiring/Cataloging  
iPod music information on page 173.  
Examples of voice operation of the iPod are  
shown below. (A method for playing the album  
title named “Pioneer” is described here, along  
with an operational example.)  
1
Press the MODE button to display the  
map screen or the AV operation screen.  
184  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
Operating your navigation system with voice  
33  
Available basic voice commands  
The navigation system can also recognize the words in the following list.  
p
Terms written in italics are voice commands.  
Basic commands  
Voice commands and operations  
Back d The previous screen returns.  
Cancel d Cancels the voice operation.  
Help d Outputs the brief operating instruction by voice.  
Next page, Previous page d Switches the page.  
Last page, First page d Switches to the last or first page.  
Voice operation for the iPod  
For <Artist name>, <Album name>, <Playlist name>, <Genre name> shown on the following chart, say the  
name stored in the iPod.  
p
Playback of iPod movies is not available using voice commands.  
Voice commands and operations  
Shuffle play d Plays all songs randomly.  
Resume d Resumes the song or the video currently playing.  
Pause d Pauses the song or the video currently playing.  
Next song d Plays the next song.  
Previous song d Plays the previous song or returns to the beginning of the song currently playing.  
Play songs d Starts playback from the top of “Songs”.  
Play artists d Displays the artist list d Say the artist name that you want to play.  
Play the artist <Artist name> d Starts playback from the top of the selected artist.  
Play albums d Displays the album list d Say the album title that you want to play.  
Play the album <Album name> d Starts playback from the top of the selected album.  
Play playlists d Displays the playlist d Say the playlist that you want to play.  
Play the playlist <Playlist name> d Starts playback from the top of the selected playlist.  
Play genres d Displays the genre list d Say the genre that you want to play.  
Play the genre <Genre name> d Starts playback from the top of the selected genre.  
Browse artists d Displays the artist list together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. d Say desired  
voice commands.  
Browse the artist <Artist name> d Displays the album list of the selected artist together with sub-screen to con-  
tinue the voice operation. d Say desired voice commands.  
Browse albums d Displays the album list together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. d Say the de-  
sired voice commands.  
Browse the album <Album name> d Displays the song list of the selected album together with sub-screen to con-  
tinue the voice operation. d Say desired voice commands.  
185  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
33  
Operating your navigation system with voice  
Voice commands and operations  
Browse playlists d Displays the playlist together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. d Say the desired  
voice commands.  
Browse the playlist <Playlist name> d Displays the song list of the selected playlist together with sub-screen to  
continue the voice operation. d Say desired voice commands.  
Browse genre d Displays the genre list together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. d Say the desired  
voice commands.  
Browse the genre <Genre name> d Displays the song list of the selected genre list together with sub-screen to con-  
tinue the voice operation. d Say desired voice commands.  
Play more music artist d Plays the songs related to the currently playing artist.  
Play more music album d Plays the songs related to the currently playing album.  
Play more music genre d Plays the songs related to the currently playing genre.  
Next page, Previous page d Displays the previous or next page of the selection list. (*1)  
First page, Last page d Displays the first or last page of the the selection list. (*1)  
(*1) Voice commands are available only when the selection list is displayed.  
Voice operation for AV source (other than iPod)  
AV source selection  
Voice commands and operations  
Change Source to DISC d Switches the AV source to Disc.  
Change Source to Tuner d Switches the AV source to Tuner.  
Change Source to XM Satellite Radio d Switches the AV source to XM.  
Change Source to SIRIUS Satellite Radio d Switches the AV source to SIRIUS.  
Change Source to SD d Switches the AV source to SD.  
Change Source to USB d Switches the AV source to USB.  
Change Source to iPod d Switches the AV source to iPod.  
Change Source to Bluetooth Audio d Switches the AV source to Audio (Bluetooth audio).  
Built-in DVD drive, external storage device (USB, SD)  
Voice commands and operations  
Shuffle play d Plays all songs randomly.  
Pause d Pauses the track or file currently playing.  
Resume d Resumes the track or file currently playing.  
Next song d Plays the next track or file.  
Previous song d Plays the previous track or file, or returns to the beginning of the track or file currently playing.  
186  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Operating your navigation system with voice  
Voice commands related to hands-free phoning  
33  
p
You can make a phone call by voice dialing if the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technology is being  
paired with the navigation system.  
p
p
For <entry’s name> shown on the following chart, say the name of the entry stored in “Contacts”.  
For <phone number> shown on the following chart, say the desired phone number.  
Voice commands and operations  
Call <entry’s name> d Makes a call to the entry (*2).  
Call <entry’s name> general d Displays the message confirming whether to dial d Say Yes d Dials the general  
phone number of the entry (*3).  
Call <entry’s name> mobile d Displays the message confirming whether to dial d Say Yes d Dials the cellular  
phone number of the entry (*3).  
Call <entry’s name> home d Displays the message confirming whether to dial d Say Yes d Dials the home  
phone number of the entry (*3).  
Call <entry’s name> work d Displays the message confirming whether to dial d Say Yes d Dials the office phone  
number of the entry (*3).  
Call <entry’s name> other d Displays the message confirming whether to dial d Say Yes d Dials the other phone  
number of the entry (*3).  
Call <phone number> d Displays the message confirming whether to dial d Say Yes d Dials the phone number.  
Make a call d Say the phone number you want to call d Displays the message confirming whether to dial d Say  
Yes d The system starts dialing to the number.  
Make a call d Say the name of entry stored on “Contacts” you want to call d Displays the message confirming  
whether to dial d Say Yes d The system starts dialing to the number (*2).  
List outgoing calls d Display the list of recent outgoing calls (“Dialed Calls”) to select the number and call (*4).  
List recent calls d Incoming calls d Display the list of recently received calls (“Received Calls”) to select the num-  
ber and call (*4).  
List recent calls d Outgoing calls d Display the list of recent outgoing calls (“Dialed Calls”) to select the number  
and call (*4).  
List recent incoming calls d Display the list of recently received calls (“Received Calls”) to select the number and  
call (*4).  
Find the nearest d Displays the category list d Say the category that you want to set to your destination d Displays  
the list of candidates with number d Show me details for <the number that you want to select> d Call d Dialing  
starts.  
(*2) If the entry has multiple phone number data, selection list may appear. In such case, say the type of phone  
number.  
(*3) If there is no corresponding type on the entry, the system may suggest you other phone numbers of the entry. In  
such case, say the type of phone number.  
(*4) Touching the item on the screen also enables you to select the desired list.  
187  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
33  
Operating your navigation system with voice  
Tips for the voice operation  
For your voice commands to be correctly re-  
cognized and interpreted, ensure that condi-  
tions are suitable for recognition.  
Close the vehicle windows  
Please note that wind through the vehicle win-  
dow or miscellaneous noise from outside the  
vehicle can interfere with voice operation.  
Position the microphone carefully  
For optimum pick-up, the microphone should  
be fixed at a suitable distance directly in front  
of the driver.  
Pause before giving a command  
Speaking too soon may cause the recognition  
to fail.  
Pronounce your commands carefully  
Speak slowly, deliberately, and clearly.  
188  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Other functions  
34  
p If you want to change the password cur-  
rently set, enter the current password and  
then enter the new one.  
Setting the anti-theft function  
You can set a password for the navigation sys-  
tem. If the back-up lead is cut after the pass-  
word is set, the navigation system prompts for  
the password at the time of next boot up.  
Entering the password  
On the password input screen, you must enter  
the current password. If you enter an incorrect  
password three times, the screen is locked  
and operations using touch panel keys are dis-  
abled.  
Setting the password  
1
Press the HOME button to display the  
“Top Menu” screen.  
2
Touch [Settings].  
1
Enter the password.  
The “Settings Menu” screen appears.  
p This can also be operated using the “Short-  
cut Menu” screen.  
2
Touch [OK].  
If you enter the correct password, the naviga-  
tion system will be unlocked.  
3
Touch Area1, followed by Area2, and  
then touch and hold Area3.  
Deleting the password  
Area1  
Area2  
Area3  
The current password can be deleted.  
1
Press the HOME button to display the  
“Top Menu” screen.  
2
3
Touch [Settings] on the “Top Menu”.  
Touch Area1, followed by Area2, and  
then touch and hold Area3.  
4
Touch [Clear password].  
4
Touch [Set Password].  
The password setting screen appears.  
The password setting screen appears.  
p When the AVIC-X930BTor AVIC-X9310BT is  
being installed and a password has not  
been set up, the password setting screen is  
displayed when the front panel is detached  
and re-attached.  
5
6
7
Enter the current password.  
Touch [OK].  
Touch [Yes].  
The message for deletion appears and then  
the current password is deleted.  
5
Enter the password you want to set.  
p 5 to 16 characters can be entered for a  
password.  
Forgotten password  
Contact the nearest authorized Pioneer Ser-  
vice Station.  
6
7
Touch [OK].  
Reenter the password to confirm the  
setting.  
8
Touch [OK].  
Password protection is applied.  
189  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
34  
Other functions  
2
Touch [Restore Factory Settings].  
Returning the navigation  
system to the default or  
factory settings  
You can return settings or recorded content to  
the default or factory settings. There are some  
methods to clear user data, and the situations  
and the cleared content are different for each  
method. For information regarding the content  
that is cleared by each method, see the list  
presented later.  
The message confirming whether to restore  
the settings appears.  
3
Touch [Yes].  
Returning the navigation  
system to the initial state  
You can return settings or recorded content to  
the default or factory settings.  
p Be sure to read “Setting items to be deleted”  
before you perform this operation.  
= For details, refer to Setting items to be  
deleted on the next page.  
Method 1: Remove the vehicle battery  
This transforms the system into the same  
state as when the navigation system is unin-  
stalled.  
1
Park your vehicle in a safe place and  
apply the parking brake.  
Method 2: Touch [Restore Factory  
Settings]  
= For details, refer to Restoring the default set-  
ting on this page.  
2
Turn the ignition switch off and back  
on.  
The navigation system restarts, and the splash  
screen appears.  
Method 3: Touch [Clear user information]  
on the “Select Items to Reset” screen  
= For details, refer to Returning the navigation  
system to the initial state on this page.  
3
Press and hold the MODE button and  
the TRK (m) button while the splash  
screen appears.  
p For users of AVIC-Z130BT, press the MODE  
button and the TRK (c) button.  
The “Select Items to Reset” screen appears.  
Method 4: Touch [Reset] on the “Select  
Items to Reset” screen  
= For details, refer to Returning the navigation  
system to the initial state on this page.  
4
Touch [Clear user information] or  
[Reset].  
Restoring the default setting  
Resets various settings registered to the navi-  
gation system and restores them to the default  
or factory settings.  
p Be sure to read “Setting items to be deleted”  
before you perform this operation.  
= For details, refer to Setting items to be  
deleted on the next page.  
The message confirming whether to erase the  
data appears.  
1
Display the “System Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for  
system settings on page 162.  
5
Touch [Yes].  
The recorded contents are cleared.  
190  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Other functions  
34  
Setting items to be deleted  
The items to be deleted vary depending on the reset method. The items listed in the following table re-  
turn to the default or factory settings. Any items not listed below will be retained.  
— : The setting will be retained.  
1: The setting will be cleared and returned to the default or factory settings.  
p
Bold indicates functions or command names.  
!
!
!
!
Method 1: Remove the vehicle battery  
Method 2: Touch [Restore Factory Settings]  
Method 3: Touch [Clear user information] on the “Select Items to Reset” screen  
Method 4: Touch [Reset] on the “Select Items to Reset” screen  
Navigation functions  
View mode and scale setting on  
Method 1  
Method 2  
Method 3  
Method 4  
—
—
—
1
—
—
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
the map  
Map function  
Direction of the map  
Last cursor position on the map  
screen  
Current route  
—
—
Guidance state of the current  
route  
—
Route setting  
Others  
Vehicle position information  
Options  
—
—
—
—
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Keyboard  
Learnt data used in Learning  
1
—
1
1
Route  
Point registered in Favorites  
History  
—
—
—
—
—
—
1
—
—
—
1
1
1
1
1
—
1
1
1
1
1
—
—
1
1
—
—
1
—
1
1
Destination  
View Mode  
Map Settings  
Other settings  
3D Calibration Status  
Drive Log Settings  
Demo Mode  
—
—
1
Navi Settings  
Set Home  
—
—
—
—
—
1
Modify Current Location  
Other settings  
Program Language, Voice  
Language  
—
—
1
1
Time  
—
1
—
—
1
1
—
1
1
—
1
System Settings  
Back Camera  
Other settings  
—
191  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
34  
Other functions  
Navigation functions  
Method 1  
Method 2  
Method 3  
Method 4  
Bluetooth Set-  
All settings (*1)  
tings  
—
1
1
1
Phone Menu  
All settings (*1)  
—
—
1
1
1
Other functions  
Anti-theft password  
—
—
—
(*1) All stored data of 5 users is deleted.  
AV functions  
Method 1  
Method 2  
Method 3  
Method 4  
Volume  
1
—
—
—
Wide Mode, Mute, VR Cata-  
log Menu  
1
—
1
1
AV Settings  
Other settings  
All settings  
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
AV Sound  
CD, ROM, DVD-V,  
DivX, FM, AM,  
Audio (Bluetooth  
audio)  
All settings (*2)  
1
—
—
—
SD, USB  
All settings (*2)  
Picture Adjustment  
Tilt  
1
1
1
—
—
—
1
1
—
—
—
—
Other functions  
(*2) All settings including the setting on the “Function” menu are deleted.  
192  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Troubleshooting  
If you have problems operating your navigation system, refer to this section. The most common  
problems are listed below, along with likely causes and solutions. If a solution to your problem  
cannot be found here, contact your dealer or the nearest authorized Pioneer service facility.  
Problems with the navigation screen  
Symptom  
Cause  
Action (Reference)  
The power doesn’t turn on. The Leads and connectors are incor-  
navigation system doesn’t oper- rectly connected.  
Confirm once more that all connections are  
correct.  
ate.  
The fuse is blown.  
Rectify the reason for the fuse blowing, then  
replace the fuse. Be very sure to install a cor-  
rect fuse with the same rating.  
Noise and other factors are causing Park your vehicle in a safe place, and turn off  
the built-in microprocessor to oper- the engine. Turn the ignition key back to off  
ate incorrectly.  
(ACC OFF). Then start the engine again, and  
turn the power to the navigation system back  
on.  
You cannot position your vehicle The GPS antenna is in an unsuitable The quality of signals from the GPS satellites  
on the map without a significant location.  
positioning error.  
is poor, causing reduced positioning accu-  
racy. Check the GPS signal reception and the  
position of the GPS antenna if necessary.  
Obstacles are blocking signals from The quality of signals from the GPS satellites  
the satellites.  
is poor, causing reduced positioning accu-  
racy. Check the GPS signal reception and the  
position of the GPS antenna if necessary, or  
continue driving until reception improves.  
Keep the antenna clean.  
The position of satellites relative to The quality of signals from the GPS satellites  
your vehicle is inadequate.  
is poor, causing reduced positioning accu-  
racy. Continue driving until reception im-  
proves.  
Signals from the GPS satellites have The quality of signals from the GPS satellites  
been modified to reduce accuracy. is poor, causing reduced positioning accu-  
(GPS satellites are operated by the racy. Wait until reception improves.  
US Department of Defense, and the  
US government reserves the right to  
distort positioning data for military  
reasons. This may lead to greater  
positioning errors.)  
If a vehicle phone or cellular phone The quality of signals from the GPS satellites  
is used near the GPS antenna, GPS is poor, causing reduced positioning accu-  
reception may be lost temporarily.  
racy. When using a cellular phone, keep the  
antenna of the cellular phone away from the  
GPS antenna.  
193  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Symptom  
Cause  
Action (Reference)  
You cannot position your vehicle Something covers the GPS antenna. Do not cover the GPS antenna with spray  
on the map without a significant  
positioning error.  
paint or vehicle wax, because this may block  
the reception of GPS signals. Snow buildup  
can also degrade the signals.  
Signals from the vehicle’s speed  
Check that the cables are properly connected.  
pulse are not being picked up prop- If necessary, consult the dealer that installed  
erly.  
the system.  
The navigation system may not be  
mounted securely in your vehicle.  
Check that the navigation system is securely  
mounted and, if necessary, consult the dealer  
that installed the system.  
The navigation system is installed  
with an extreme angle exceeding  
the installation angle limitations.  
Confirm the installation angle. (The naviga-  
tion system must be installed within the al-  
lowed installation angle. For details, refer to  
Installation Manual.)  
Indication of the position of your ve- Check whether or not the reverse gear signal  
hicle is misaligned after a U-turn or input lead (violet) is connected properly. (The  
reversing.  
navigation system works properly without the  
lead connected, but positioning accuracy will  
be adversely affected.)  
“Eco Graph” is not available.  
The navigation system is unable to Drive about 10 km on a road without obstruc-  
obtain past average fuel mileage tions. Then park your vehicle in a safe place,  
data, so “Eco Graph” cannot be dis- turn off the navigation system and turn the  
played.  
power to the navigation system back on.  
The map color does not switch “Day/Night Display” is set to  
automatically between daytime “Day”.  
and nighttime.  
Check “Day/Night Display” setting and  
make sure “Automatic” is selected. (Page  
161)  
The orange/white lead is not con-  
nected.  
Check the connection.  
The screen is too bright.  
The display is very dim.  
Picture quality adjustment of the  
display is not correct.  
Adjust the picture quality. (Page 169)  
The vehicle’s light is turned ON, and Read about “Day/Night Display” setting  
“Automatic” is selected on “Day/  
and, if desired, select “Day”. (Page 161)  
Night Display”.  
Picture quality adjustment of the  
display is not correct.  
Adjust the picture quality. (Page 169)  
No sounds of AV source are pro- The volume level is low.  
Adjust the volume level.  
Turn the attenuator or mute off.  
Check the connection.  
duced.  
The attenuator or mute is on.  
The volume level will not rise.  
A speaker lead is disconnected.  
The volume of navigation gui-  
VOL (+/–) button or Multi-control is Turn the volume up or down using “Volume”  
dance and beeps cannot be ad- used to adjust the volume.  
justed.  
on the “System Settings” menu. (Page 165)  
The person on the other end of The voice from the person on the  
Use the following methods to reduce the  
the phone call cannot hear the other end of the phone call is output echo:  
conversation due to an echo.  
from the speakers and then picked —Lower the volume on the receiver  
up by the microphone again, creat- —Have both parties pause slightly before  
ing an echo. speaking  
194  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Symptom  
Cause  
Action (Reference)  
There’s no picture.  
The parking brake cord is not con-  
nected.  
Connect the parking brake cord, and apply  
the parking brake.  
The parking brake is not applied.  
Connect the parking brake cord, and apply  
the parking brake.  
The backlight of the LCD panel is  
turned off.  
Turn on the backlight. (Page 181)  
Rear display picture disappears. The source disc being listened to in Before ejecting the disc, switch the source.  
the navigation system has been  
ejected.  
This problem may occur when certain con-  
nection methods are used.  
There is a problem with the rear dis- Check the rear display and its connection.  
play, for example a faulty wiring con-  
nection.  
An AV source that cannot output to Select an appropriate AV source.  
the rear display is selected.  
Nothing is displayed and the  
touch panel keys cannot be  
used.  
The setting for the rear view camera Select the appropriate setting for the rear  
is incorrect.  
view camera.  
The shift lever was placed in [R]  
Select the correct polarity setting for “Back  
when the rear view camera was not Camera”. (Page 166)  
connected.  
There is no response when the The touch panel keys deviate from  
touch panel keys are touched, or the actual positions that respond to  
Perform touch panel calibration. (Page 167)  
a different key responds.  
your touch for some reason.  
The external storage device  
(USB, SD) cannot be used.  
The USB storage device has been  
removed immediately after plugging the engine. Turn the ignition key back to off  
Park your vehicle in a safe place, and turn off  
it.  
(ACC OFF). Then start the engine again, and  
turn the power to the navigation system back  
on.  
Problems in the AV screen  
Symptom  
Cause  
Action (Reference)  
CD or DVD playback is not pos- The disc is inserted upside down.  
Insert the disc with the label upward.  
Clean the disc.  
sible.  
The disc is dirty.  
The disc is cracked or otherwise da- Insert a normal, round disc.  
maged.  
The files on the disc are an irregular Check the file format.  
file format.  
The disc format cannot be played  
back.  
Replace the disc.  
The loaded disc is a type this system Check what type of disc it is. (Page 208)  
cannot play.  
The screen is covered by a cau- The parking brake lead is not con-  
Connect the parking brake lead correctly, and  
apply the parking brake.  
tion message and the video can- nected or applied.  
not be shown.  
The parking brake interlock is acti- Park your vehicle in a safe place and apply  
vated.  
the parking brake.  
195  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Symptom  
Cause  
Action (Reference)  
No video output from connected “AV1 Input” or “AV2 Input” setting Correct the settings. (Page 147)  
equipment.  
is incorrect.  
No video output from connected  
iPod.  
The connection of the USB interface Connect both the USB plug and the RCA  
cable for iPod is incorrect.  
cable side. (If only one of these connection  
has been made, the iPod will not work prop-  
erly.) (Page 20)  
The audio or video skips.  
The navigation system is not firmly Secure the navigation system firmly.  
secured.  
No sounds are produced.  
Cables are not connected correctly. Connect the cables correctly.  
The volume level will not rise.  
The system is performing still, slow There is no sound during still, slow motion, or  
motion, or frame-by-frame playback frame-by-frame playback with DVD-Video.  
with DVD-Video.  
The system is paused or performing, For the media other than music CD (CD-DA),  
fast reverse or forward during the  
disc playback.  
there is no sound on fast reverse or forward.  
The icon 9 is displayed, and op- The operation is not compatible  
eration is not possible. with the video configuration.  
This operation is not possible. (For example,  
the DVD playing does not feature that angle,  
audio system, subtitle language, etc.)  
The picture stops (pauses) and The reading of data is impossible  
the navigation system cannot be during disc playback.  
operated.  
Stop playback once, and start playback again.  
The picture is stretched, with in- The aspect setting is incorrect for  
Select the appropriate setting for that image.  
(Page 171, Page 106)  
correct aspect ratio.  
the display.  
A parental lock message is dis- Parental lock is on.  
played and DVD playback is not  
possible.  
Turn parental lock off or change the level.  
(Page 106)  
Parental lock for DVD playback The code number is incorrect.  
cannot be canceled.  
Input the correct code number. (Page 106)  
Playback is not with the audio  
language and subtitle language dialog or subtitles in the language  
settings selected in “DVD/  
DivX® Setup”.  
The DVD playing does not feature  
Switching to a selected language is not possi-  
ble if the language selected in “DVD/DivX®  
Setup” is not recorded on the disc. (Page  
105)  
selected in “DVD/DivX® Setup”.  
The picture is extremely unclear/ The disc features a signal to prohibit Since the navigation system is compatible  
distorted and dark during play- copying. (Some discs may have  
with the copy guard analog copy protect sys-  
tem, the picture may suffer from horizontal  
stripes or other imperfections when a disc  
with that kind of protection signal is viewed  
on some displays. This does not mean the na-  
vigation system is malfunctioning.  
back.  
this.)  
iPod cannot be operated.  
The iPod is frozen.  
! Reconnect the iPod with the USB interface  
cable for iPod.  
! Update the iPod software version.  
An error has occurred.  
! Reconnect the iPod with the USB interface  
cable for iPod.  
! Park your vehicle in a safe place, and turn  
off the engine. Turn the ignition key back to  
off (ACC OFF). Then start the engine again,  
and turn the power to the navigation system  
back on.  
! Update the iPod software version.  
196  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Problems with the phone screen  
Symptom  
Cause  
Action (Reference)  
Dialing is not possible because Your phone is out of range for ser-  
the touch panel keys for dialing vice.  
are inactive.  
Retry after re-entering the range for service.  
The connection between the cellular Perform the connection process.  
phone and the navigation system  
cannot be established now.  
If the screen becomes frozen...  
Park your vehicle in a safe place, and turn off  
the engine. Turn the ignition key back to off  
(ACC OFF). Then start the engine again, and  
turn the power to the navigation system back  
on.  
197  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Messages and how to react to them  
The following messages may be displayed by your navigation system. Refer to the table below to  
identify the problem, then take the suggested corrective action.  
There are occasions when you may see error messages other than those shown here. In such a  
case, follow the instructions given on the display.  
Messages for navigation functions  
Message  
Cause  
Action (Reference)  
Route calculation was not  
possible.  
Route calculation has failed be-  
cause of a malfunction in map data, ! Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if this mes-  
! Change the destination.  
software, or hardware.  
sage persists.  
Route calculation not possi-  
ble: destination is too far.  
The destination is too far.  
Set a destination closer to the starting point.  
Route calculation not possi-  
ble: destination is too close.  
The destination is too close.  
Set a destination farther from the starting  
point.  
Route calculation not possi-  
The destination, waypoint(s), or  
! Set a destination and waypoint(s) on roads.  
ble: navigation cannot be pro- starting point are in an area where ! Reset the destination after you drive the ve-  
vided around destination or  
starting point.  
no road exists (e.g. a mountain) and hicle to any road.  
the route calculation is impossible.  
Route to destination cannot  
be calculated.  
The destination or waypoint(s) are in Change the destination.  
an isolated island, etc. without a  
ferry and the route calculation is im-  
possible. If there is no road con-  
nected to your starting point or  
destination, this message will ap-  
pear.  
Failed to make the route pro- In rare cases, a route calculation  
! Retry.  
file.  
error may occur.  
! Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if this mes-  
sage persists.  
No picture folder. Save jpeg  
file to /Pictures/ folder  
Cannot load the image because  
“Pictures” folder is not found in the (Page 165)  
Use appropriate data and store it correctly.  
inserted external storage device.  
“Pictures” folder exists on the SD  
memory card but there is no load-  
able data in the folder.  
Use appropriate data and store it correctly.  
(Page 165)  
Data Read error.  
The file is corrupt  
Failed to read the data for some rea- Use appropriate data and store it correctly.  
son. (Page 165)  
The data is damaged or an attempt Use appropriate data and store it correctly.  
was made to set an image file that (Page 165)  
was not made to specifications as  
the splash screen.  
198  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Message  
Cause  
Action (Reference)  
Connection failed.  
The cellular phone’s Bluetooth wire- Activate the target phone’s Bluetooth wire-  
less technology is turned off.  
less technology.  
The cellular phone is paired (con-  
nected) with another device.  
Cancel the pairing (connection) and retry.  
Rejection has been received from  
the cellular phone.  
Operate the target phone and accept the con-  
nection request from the navigation system.  
(Furthermore, check the connection settings  
on your cellular phone.)  
The target cellular phone cannot be Check whether your cellular phone is acti-  
found.  
vated and, whether the distance to your cellu-  
lar phone is not too far.  
Could not find any available  
phone.  
No available phone exists in the sur- ! Activate the target phone’s Bluetooth wire-  
roundings when the system  
less technology.  
searches for connectable cellular  
! Check whether your cellular phone is acti-  
phones featuring Bluetooth wireless vated and, whether the distance to your cellu-  
technology. lar phone is not too far.  
Registration failed.  
The cellular phone’s Bluetooth wire- Keep turning the target phone’s Bluetooth  
less technology is turned off during wireless technology on during the registra-  
the registration step.  
tion.  
Rejection by the cellular phone has Operate the target phone and accept the re-  
received.  
gistration request from the navigation system.  
(Furthermore, check the connection settings  
on your cellular phone.)  
Registration step has failed for  
some reason.  
Retry the registration and if the registration  
still fails, try registering using your cellular  
phone.  
199  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Messages for audio functions  
When problems occur with AV source playback, an error message appears on the display. Refer  
to the table below to identify the problem, then take the suggested corrective action. If the error  
persists, record the error message and contact your dealer or your nearest Pioneer service center.  
The messages in “( )” will appear on the rear display.  
Built-in DVD drive  
Message  
Cause  
Action (Reference)  
Reading error  
Dirty  
Clean the disc.  
(ERROR-02-XX)  
Scratched disc  
Replace the disc.  
The disc is loaded upside down.  
Check that the disc is loaded correctly.  
Playback error. Please remove There is an electrical or mechanical ! Replace the disc.  
the disc.  
error.  
! Set the ACC to off and then set it to on  
again.  
Region code cannot be  
The disc does not have the same re- Replace the DVD-Video with one bearing the  
matched (DIFFERENT REGION gion number as the navigation sys- correct region number.  
DISC)  
tem.  
Unreadable disc  
This type of disc cannot be played  
by the navigation system.  
Replace the disc with one the navigation sys-  
tem can play. (Page 211, Page 228)  
Playback error due to irregu- The temperature of the navigation  
Wait until the unit’s temperature returns to  
lar temperature. Please re-  
move the disc. (THERMAL  
PROTECTION IN MOTION)  
system is out of the normal operat- within normal operating limits.  
ing range.  
Tracks that cannot be played Files that are protected by digital  
The protected files are skipped.  
back will be skipped (FILE  
rights management (DRM).  
SKIPPED)  
Cannot play back all tracks  
(PROTECTED DISC)  
All the files on the inserted disc are Replace the disc.  
secured by DRM.  
Flash write error. Unable to  
write to flash memory. (CAN  
NOT SAVE DATA)  
The playback history for VOD con-  
tents cannot be saved for some rea- ! If the message appears frequently, consult  
son.  
! Retry.  
your dealer.  
Your device is not authorized The device does not match the de-  
Check whether this device has been regis-  
to play this protected DivX  
vice registered with the VOD provi- tered with the VOD provider.  
video. (YOUR DEVICE IS NOT der. VOD content cannot be played  
AUTHORIZED TO PLAY THIS  
back.  
DivX PROTECTED VIDEO)  
Video resolution not sup-  
High definition (HD) DivX video can- Create playable one and retry.  
ported. (VIDEO RESOLUTION not be played.  
NOT SUPPORTED)  
SD/USB/iPod  
Message  
Cause  
Action (Reference)  
Tracks that cannot be played Files that are protected by digital  
The protected files are skipped.  
back will be skipped  
rights management (DRM).  
This type of file cannot be played by Replace it with the playable file. (Page 211,  
this unit.  
Page 228)  
200  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Message  
Cause  
Action (Reference)  
Cannot play back all tracks  
All the files on the inserted external Store playable files.  
storage device are secured by DRM.  
All of the files cannot be played by  
this unit.  
Replace it with the playable file. (Page 211,  
Page 228)  
USB flash drive was discon-  
The USB connector or USB cable is Confirm that the USB connector or USB  
nected for device protection. short-circuited.  
Do not connect this USB flash  
cable is not caught in something or da-  
maged.  
drive to the unit. To restart  
USB, restart the unit.  
The connected USB storage device Disconnect the USB storage device and do  
consumes more than 1 A (maximum not use it. Turn the ignition switch to off, then  
allowable current).  
back ACC to on or turn the ignition switch on  
and then connect the compliant USB storage  
device.  
The USB interface cable for iPod is Confirm that USB interface cable for iPod or  
short-circuited.  
USB cable is not caught in something or da-  
maged.  
Authorization failure. iPod is The iPod is not compatible with this Use an iPod of a compatible version.  
not connected.  
navigation system.  
Communication failure  
! Disconnect the cable from iPod. Once iPod  
main menu is displayed, connect the cable  
again.  
! If the message appears frequently, consult  
your dealer.  
201  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
pulse. So you connect the speed pulse without  
fail to get the accuracy of positioning.  
p The position of the speed detection circuit  
vary depending on the vehicle model. For  
details, consult your authorized Pioneer  
dealer or an installation professional.  
p Some types of vehicles may not output a  
speed signal while driving at just a few kilo-  
meters per hour. In such a case, the current  
location of your vehicle may not be dis-  
played correctly while in traffic congestion  
or in a parking lot.  
Positioning technology  
Positioning by GPS  
The Global Positioning System (GPS) uses a  
network of satellites orbiting the Earth. Each  
of the satellites, which orbit at a height of  
68 900 000 feet (21 000 km), continually broad-  
casts radio signals giving time and position in-  
formation. This ensures that signals from at  
least three can be picked up from any open  
area on the ground’s surface.  
The accuracy of the GPS information depends  
on how good the reception is. When the sig-  
nals are strong and reception is good, GPS  
can determine latitude, longitude and altitude  
for accurate positioning in three dimensions.  
But if signal quality is poor, only two dimen-  
sions, latitude and longitude, can be obtained  
and positioning errors are somewhat greater.  
How do GPS and dead  
reckoning work together?  
For maximum accuracy, your navigation sys-  
tem continually compares GPS data with your  
estimated position as calculated from the data  
of built-in sensor. However, if only the data  
from the built-in sensor is available for a long  
period, positioning errors are gradually com-  
pounded until the estimated position becomes  
unreliable. For this reason, whenever GPS sig-  
nals are available, they are matched with the  
data of the built-in sensor and used to correct  
it for improved accuracy.  
p If you use chains on your wheels for winter  
driving or put on the spare wheel, errors  
may suddenly increase because of differ-  
ence in wheel diameter. Initialize the sensor  
status and it may recover the accuracy to  
normal condition.  
Positioning by dead reckoning  
The built-in sensor in the navigation system  
also calculates your position. The current loca-  
tion is measured by detecting driving distance  
with the speed pulse, the turning direction  
with the gyro sensor and inclination of the  
road with the G sensor.  
= For details, refer to Clearing status on  
page 151.  
The built-in sensor can even calculate  
changes of altitude, and correct the discrepan-  
cies in the distance traveled caused by driving  
along winding roads or up slopes.  
If you use this navigation system with connect-  
ing the speed pulse, the system will become  
more accurate than no connection of speed  
202  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Map matching  
When positioning by GPS is  
impossible  
As mentioned, the positioning systems used  
by this navigation system are susceptible to  
certain errors. Their calculations may, on occa-  
sion, place you in a location on the map where  
no road exists. In this situation, the processing  
system understands that vehicles travel only  
on roads, and can correct your position by ad-  
justing it to a nearby road. This is called map  
matching.  
!
GPS positioning is disabled if signals can-  
not be received from more than two GPS  
satellites.  
!
In some driving conditions, signals from  
GPS satellites may not reach your vehicle.  
In this case, it is impossible for the system  
to use GPS positioning.  
In tunnels or en-  
closed parking  
garages  
Under elevated  
roads or similar  
structures  
With map matching  
When driving  
among high build-  
ings  
When driving through  
a dense forest or tall  
trees  
!
!
If a car phone or cellular phone is used  
near the GPS antenna, GPS reception may  
be lost temporarily.  
Do not cover the GPS antenna with spray  
paint or car wax, because this may block  
the reception of GPS signals. Snow buildup  
can also degrade the signals, so keep the  
antenna clear.  
Without map matching  
Handling large errors  
Positioning errors are kept to a minimum by  
combining GPS, dead reckoning and map  
matching. However, in some situations, these  
functions may not work properly, and the error  
may become bigger.  
p If a GPS signal has not been received for a  
long time, your vehicle’s actual position  
and the current position mark on the map  
may diverge considerably or may not be up-  
dated. In such case, once GPS reception is  
restored, accuracy will be recovered.  
203  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
!
If you drive in zigzags.  
Conditions likely to cause  
noticeable positioning errors  
For various reasons, such as the state of the  
road you are traveling on and the reception  
status of the GPS signal, the actual position of  
your vehicle may differ from the position dis-  
played on the map screen.  
If the road has a series of hairpin bends.  
!
!
If you make a slight turn.  
If there is a parallel road.  
!
If there is a loop or similar road configura-  
tion.  
!
!
If there is another road very nearby, such  
as in the case of an elevated freeway.  
!
!
If you take a ferry.  
If you take a recently opened road that is  
not on the map.  
If you are driving on a long, straight road or  
a gently curving road.  
204  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
!
!
If you are on a steep mountain road with  
many height changes.  
!
!
If trees or other obstacles block the GPS  
signals for a considerable period.  
If you drive very slowly, or in a start-and-  
stop manner, as in a traffic congestion.  
If you enter or exit a multi-storey parking lot  
or similar structure using a spiral ramp.  
If your vehicle is turned on a turntable or si-  
milar structure.  
!
If you join the road after driving around a  
large parking lot.  
!
!
When you drive around a traffic circle.  
!
If your vehicle’s wheels spin, such as on a  
gravel road or in snow.  
When starting driving immediately after  
starting the engine.  
!
If you put on chains, or change your tires  
for ones with a different size.  
205  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
current heading. In such cases, you are in-  
structed to turn around, so please turn  
around safely by following the actual traffic  
rules.  
In some cases, a route may begin on the  
opposite side of a railway or river from your  
actual current location. If this happens,  
drive towards your destination for a while,  
and try route calculation again.  
When there is a traffic congestion ahead, a  
detour route may not be suggested if driv-  
ing through the traffic congestion would  
still be better than taking the detour.  
There may be instances when the starting  
point, the waypoint and the destination  
point are not on the highlighted route.  
The number of traffic circle exits displayed  
on the screen may differ from the actual  
number of roads.  
Route setting information  
Route search specifications  
Your navigation system sets a route to your  
destination by applying certain built-in rules to  
the map data. This section provides some use-  
ful information about how a route is set.  
!
!
CAUTION  
When a route is calculated, the route and voice  
guidance for the route are automatically set.  
Also, for day or time traffic regulations, only infor-  
mation about traffic regulations applicable at the  
time when the route was calculated is consid-  
ered. One-way streets and street closures may  
not be taken into consideration. For example, if a  
street is open during the morning only, but you  
arrive later, it would be against the traffic regula-  
tions so you cannot drive along the set route.  
When driving, please follow the actual traffic  
signs. Also, the system may not know some traf-  
fic regulations.  
!
!
Route highlighting  
!
Once set, the route is highlighted in bright  
color on the map.  
!
The calculated route is one example of the  
route to your destination decided by the na-  
vigation system while taking the type of  
streets or traffic regulations into account. It  
is not necessarily an optimum route. (In  
some cases, you may not be able to set the  
streets you want to take. If you need to take  
a certain street, set a waypoint on that  
street.)  
If the destination is too far, there may be in-  
stances where the route cannot be set. (If  
you want to set a long-distance route going  
across several areas, set waypoints along  
the way.)  
During voice guidance, turns and intersec-  
tions from the freeway are announced.  
However, if you pass intersections, turns,  
and other guidance points in rapid succes-  
sion, some may delay or not be announced.  
It is possible that guidance may direct you  
off a freeway and then back on again.  
In some cases, the route may require you  
to travel in the opposite direction to your  
!
The immediate vicinity of your starting  
point and destination may not be high-  
lighted, and neither will areas with particu-  
larly complex road layouts. Consequently,  
the route may appear to be cut off on the  
display, but voice guidance will continue.  
Auto reroute function  
!
If you deviate from the set route, the system  
will re-calculate the route from that point  
so that you remain on track to the destina-  
tion.  
This function may not work under certain  
conditions.  
!
!
!
Handling and care of discs  
Some basic precautions are necessary when  
handling your discs.  
!
!
206  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
Playback of discs may not be possible be-  
cause of disc characteristics, disc format,  
recorded application, playback environ-  
ment, storage conditions and so on.  
Road shocks may interrupt disc playback.  
Read the precautions for discs before  
using them.  
Built-in drive and care  
!
Use only conventional, fully circular discs.  
Do not use shaped discs.  
!
!
!
!
Do not use cracked, chipped, warped, or  
otherwise damaged discs as they may da-  
mage the built-in drive.  
When using discs that can be printed on  
label surfaces, check the instructions and  
the warnings of the discs. Depending on  
the discs, inserting and ejecting may not  
be possible. Using such discs may result in  
damage to this equipment.  
Ambient conditions for playing  
a disc  
!
At extremely high temperatures, a tempera-  
ture cutout protects this product by switch-  
ing it off automatically.  
!
Despite our careful design of the product,  
small scratches that do not affect actual  
operation may appear on the disc surface  
as a result of mechanical wear, ambient  
conditions for use or handling of the disc.  
This is not a sign of the malfunction of this  
product. Consider it to be normal wear and  
tear.  
!
Do not touch the recorded surface of the  
discs.  
!
!
Store discs in their cases when not in use.  
Avoid leaving discs in excessively hot envir-  
onments including under direct sunlight.  
Do not attach labels, write on or apply che-  
micals to the surface of the discs.  
Do not attach commercially available labels  
or other materials to the discs.  
— The discs may warp making the disc un-  
playable.  
— The labels may come off during play-  
back and prevent ejection of the discs,  
which may result in damage to the  
equipment.  
!
!
Playable discs  
DVD-Video and CD  
DVD and CD discs that display the logos  
shown below generally can be played on this  
built-in DVD drive.  
DVD-Video  
!
!
To clean a disc, wipe it with a soft cloth,  
moving outward from the center.  
CD  
Condensation may temporarily impair the  
built-in drive’s performance. Leave it to ad-  
just to the warmer temperature for about  
one hour. Also, wipe any damp discs with a  
soft cloth.  
207  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
p
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo  
Licensing Corporation.  
p It is not possible to play DVD-Audio discs.  
This DVD drive may not be able to play all  
discs bearing the marks shown above.  
AVCHD recorded discs  
Detailed information for  
playable media  
Compatibility  
This unit is not compatible with discs recorded  
in AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High Defi-  
nition) format. Do not insert AVCHD discs. If  
inserted, the disc may not be ejected.  
Common notes about disc compatibility  
!
!
!
!
Certain functions of this product may not  
be available for some discs.  
Compatibility with all discs is not guaran-  
teed.  
It is not possible to playback DVD-ROM/  
DVD-RAM discs.  
Playback of discs may become impossible  
with direct exposure to sunlight, high tem-  
peratures, or depending on the storage  
conditions in the vehicle.  
Playing DualDisc  
!
DualDiscs are two-sided discs that have a  
recordable CD for audio on one side and a  
recordable DVD for video on the other.  
Playback of the DVD side is possible with  
this navigation system. However, since the  
CD side of DualDiscs is not physically com-  
patible with the general CD standard, it  
may not be possible to play the CD side  
with this navigation system.  
!
!
!
Frequent loading and ejecting of a  
DualDisc may result in scratches to the  
disc.  
Serious scratches can lead to playback pro-  
blems on this navigation system. In some  
cases, a DualDisc may become stuck in  
the disc-loading slot and will not eject. To  
prevent this, we recommend you refrain  
from using DualDisc with this navigation  
system.  
DVD-Video discs  
!
DVD-Video discs that have incompatible re-  
gion numbers cannot be played on this  
DVD drive. The region number of the player  
can be found on this product’s chassis.  
DVD-R/DVD-RW/DVD-R DL (Dual  
Layer) discs  
!
!
!
!
Unfinalized discs which have been re-  
corded with the Video format (video mode)  
cannot be played back.  
Discs which have been recorded with the  
Video Recording format (VR mode) cannot  
be played back.  
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) discs which have  
been recorded with Layer Jump recording  
cannot be played back.  
For detailed information about recording  
mode, please contact the manufacturer of  
media, recorders, or writing software.  
!
Please refer to the manufacturer for more  
detailed information about DualDiscs.  
Dolby Digital  
This product will down-mix Dolby Digital sig-  
nals internally and the sound will be output in  
stereo.  
p Manufactured under license from Dolby  
Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D  
symbol are trademarks of Dolby  
Laboratories.  
208  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
tion, playback environment, storage  
conditions, and so on.  
CD-R/CD-RW discs  
!
!
Unfinalized discs cannot be played back.  
It may not be possible to playback CD-R/  
CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD re-  
corder or a personal computer because of  
disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on  
the disc, or dirt, scratches or condensation  
on the lens of the built-in drive.  
USB storage device compatibility  
= For details about USB storage device com-  
patibility with this navigation system, refer  
to Specifications on page 228.  
!
!
Protocol: bulk  
You cannot connect a USB storage device  
to this navigation system via a USB hub.  
!
Playback of discs recorded on a personal  
computer may not be possible, depending  
on the recording device, writing software,  
their settings, and other environmental fac-  
tors.  
!
!
Partitioned USB storage device is not com-  
patible with this navigation system.  
Firmly secure the USB storage device when  
driving. Do not let the USB storage device  
fall onto the floor, where it may become  
jammed under the brake or gas pedal.  
There may be a slight delay when starting  
playback of audio files encoded with image  
data.  
Some USB storage devices connected to  
this navigation system may generate noise  
on the radio.  
Do not connect anything other than the  
USB storage device.  
!
!
Please record with the correct format. (For  
details, please contact manufacturer of  
media, recorders, or writing software.)  
Titles and other text information recorded  
on a CD-R/CD-RW disc may not be dis-  
played by this product (in the case of audio  
data (CD-DA)).  
!
!
!
!
Read the precautions with CD-R/CD-RW  
discs before using them.  
Common notes about the external  
storage device (USB, SD)  
The sequence of audio files on USB sto-  
rage device  
For USB storage device, the sequence is differ-  
ent from that of USB storage device.  
!
Do not leave the external storage device  
(USB, SD) in any location with high tem-  
peratures.  
!
Depending on the kind of the external sto-  
rage device (USB, SD) you use, this naviga-  
tion system may not recognize the storage  
device or files may not be played back prop-  
erly.  
SD memory card and SDHC memory card  
= For details about SD memory card compat-  
ibility with this navigation system, refer to  
Specifications on page 228.  
!
The text information of some audio and  
video files may not be correctly displayed.  
File extensions must be used properly.  
There may be a slight delay when starting  
playback of files on an external storage de-  
vice (USB, SD) with complex folder hierar-  
chies.  
Operations may vary depending on the  
kind of an external storage device (USB,  
SD).  
Handling guidelines and  
supplemental information  
!
!
!
This system is not compatible with Multi  
Media Card (MMC).  
!
Copyright protected files cannot be played  
back.  
!
!
It may not be possible to play some music  
files from SD or USB because of file char-  
acteristics, file format, recorded applica-  
209  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
The character code for the subtitle file  
should comply with ISO-8859-1. Using char-  
acters other than ISO-8859-1 may cause the  
characters to be displayed incorrectly.  
The subtitles may not be displayed correctly  
if the displayed characters in the subtitle  
file include control code.  
For materials that use a high transfer rate,  
the subtitles and video may not be comple-  
tely synchronized.  
Notes specific to DivX files  
!
Only DivX files downloaded from DivX part-  
ner sites are guaranteed for proper opera-  
tion. Unauthorized DivX files may not  
operate properly.  
!
!
!
!
!
DRM rental files cannot be operated until  
playing back is started.  
The navigation system corresponds to a  
DivX file display of up to 1 590 minutes 43  
seconds. Search operations beyond this  
time limit are prohibited.  
If multiple subtitles are programed to dis-  
play within a very short time frame, such as  
0.1 seconds, the subtitles may not be dis-  
played at the correct time.  
!
DivX VOD file playback requires supplying  
the ID code of this navigation system to the  
DivX VOD provider. Regarding the ID code,  
refer to Displaying your DivX VOD registra-  
tion code on page 174.  
!
!
Plays all versions of DivX video (including  
DivX 6) with standard playback of DivX  
media files.  
For more details about DivX, visit the follow-  
ing site:  
http://www.divx.com/  
DivX subtitle files  
!
Srt format subtitle files with the extension  
“.srt” can be used.  
!
Only one subtitle file can be used for each  
DivX file. Multiple subtitle files cannot be  
associated.  
!
Subtitle files that are named with the same  
character string as the DivX file before the  
extension are associated with the DivX file.  
The character strings before the extension  
must be exactly the same. However, if there  
is only one DivX file and one subtitle file in  
a single folder, the files are associated even  
if the file names are not the same.  
The subtitle file must be stored in the same  
folder as the DivX file.  
Up to 255 subtitle files may be used. Any  
more subtitle files will not be recognized.  
Up to 64 characters can be used for the  
name of the subtitle file, including the ex-  
tension. If more than 64 characters are  
used for the file name, the subtitle file may  
not be recognized.  
!
!
!
210  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Media compatibility chart  
General  
DVD-R/-RW/-R  
DL  
USB storage de-  
vice  
Media  
CD-R/-RW  
SD memory card  
ISO9660 level 1,  
ISO9660 level 2,  
Romeo, Joliet  
and UDF 1.02  
ISO9660 level 1,  
ISO9660 level 2,  
Romeo and Joliet  
File system  
FAT16/FAT32  
Maximum number of  
folders  
700  
300  
Maximum number of  
files  
999  
3 500  
2 500  
MP3, WMA, AAC, WAV, AVI, WMV,  
MPEG-4  
Playable file types  
MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX  
Note:  
Maximum playback time of audio file stored in the external storage device (USB, SD): 7.5 h (450 minutes)  
MP3 compatibility  
DVD-R/-RW/-R  
DL  
USB storage de-  
vice  
Media  
CD-R/-RW  
SD memory card  
File extension  
Bit rate  
.mp3  
8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR  
16 kHz to 48 kHz (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz  
for emphasis)  
Sampling frequency  
8 kHz to 48 kHz  
ID3 tag  
ID3 tag Ver. 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3  
ID3 tag Ver. 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4  
Notes:  
!
!
Ver. 2.x of ID3 tag is given priority when both Ver. 1.x and Ver. 2.x exist.  
The navigation system is not compatible with the following:  
MP3i (MP3 interactive), mp3 PRO, m3u playlist  
211  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
WMA compatibility  
DVD-R/-RW/-R  
DL  
USB storage de-  
vice  
Media  
CD-R/-RW  
.wma  
SD memory card  
File extension  
Bit rate  
5 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR  
8 kHz to 48 kHz  
Sampling frequency  
Note:  
The navigation system is not compatible with the following:  
™
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional, Lossless, Voice  
WAV compatibility  
DVD-R/-RW/-R  
DL  
USB storage de-  
vice  
Media  
CD-R/-RW  
SD memory card  
File extension  
Format  
.wav  
Linear PCM (LPCM), IMA-ADPCM  
WAV files on the CD-R/-RW, DVD-R/-RW/-R  
DL cannot be played.  
LPCM: 16 kHz to 48 kHz  
IMA-ADPCM: 22.05 kHz and 44.1 kHz  
Sampling frequency  
LPCM: 8 bits and 16 bits  
MS ADPCM: 4 bits  
Quantization bits  
Note:  
The sampling frequency shown in the display may be rounded.  
AAC compatibility  
DVD-R/-RW/-R  
DL  
USB storage de-  
vice  
Media  
CD-R/-RW  
SD memory card  
File extension  
Bit rate  
.m4a  
8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR)  
8 kHz to 44.1 kHz  
Sampling frequency  
Note:  
8 kHz to 48 kHz  
The navigation system plays back AAC files encoded by iTunes.  
212  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
DivX compatibility  
DVD-R/-RW/-R  
DL  
USB storage de-  
vice  
Media  
CD-R/-RW  
SD memory card  
File extension  
Profile (DivX version)  
.avi/.divx  
Home Theater Ver. 3.11/Ver. 4.x/Ver. 5.x/  
Ver. 6.x  
Compatible audio codec MP3, Dolby Digital  
DivX files on the external storage device  
(USB, SD) cannot be played.  
Bit rate (MP3)  
8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR  
Sampling frequency  
(MP3)  
16 kHz to 48 kHz (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz  
for emphasis)  
Maximum image size  
Maximum file size  
Notes:  
720 pixels × 576 pixels  
4 GB  
!
The navigation system is not compatible with the following:  
DivX Ultra format, DivX files without video data, DivX files encoded with LPCM (Linear PCM) audio codec  
Depending on the file information composition, such as the number of audio streams, there may be a slight  
delay in the start of playback on discs.  
!
!
!
!
If a file contains more than 4 GB, playback stops before the end.  
Some special operations may be prohibited because of the composition of DivX files.  
Files with high transfer rates may not be played back correctly. The standard transfer rate is 4 Mbps for CDs and  
10.08 Mbps for DVDs.  
213  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Video files compatibility (USB, SD)  
File extension  
Format  
.avi  
.mp4, .m4v  
MPEG-4  
.wmv  
WMV  
WMV  
MPEG-4  
MPEG-4  
H.264  
H.264  
Compatible video codec  
MPEG-4  
Linear PCM  
(LPCM), IMA-  
ADPCM  
Compatible audio codec  
AAC  
AAC  
WMA  
MP3  
Bit rate:  
768 kbps  
Frame rate:  
30 fps  
Bit rate:  
768 kbps  
Frame rate:  
30 fps  
Bit rate:  
384 kbps  
Frame rate:  
30 fps  
Bit rate:  
384 kbps  
Frame rate:  
30 fps  
Recommended  
video specifica-  
tions  
Image size: QVGA  
(320 pixels x 240  
pixels)  
Image size:  
WQVGA  
(400 pixels x 240  
pixels)  
Bit rate:  
768 kbps  
Frame rate:  
30 fps  
Bit rate: 2 Mbps Bit rate: 2 Mbps Bit rate: 1 Mbps  
Frame rate:  
30 fps  
Frame rate:  
30 fps  
Frame rate:  
30 fps  
Maximum bit rate:  
Maximum file size  
Bit rate:  
576 kbps  
Frame rate:  
30 fps  
Bit rate:  
576 kbps  
Frame rate:  
30 fps  
Image size: VGA  
(640 pixels x 480  
pixels)  
Bit rate: 1 Mbps Bit rate: 1 Mbps  
Frame rate:  
30 fps  
Frame rate:  
30 fps  
2 GB  
Maximum playback time  
150 minutes  
Common notes  
cording to the width of each character, and  
of the display area.  
Folder selection sequence or other opera-  
tions may be altered, depending on the en-  
coding or writing software.  
Regardless of the length of blank section  
between the songs of original recording,  
compressed audio discs play with a short  
pause between songs.  
!
The navigation system may not operate cor-  
rectly, depending on the application used  
to encode WMA files.  
!
!
!
Depending on the version of Windows  
Media Player used to encode WMA files,  
™
album names and other text information  
may not be correctly displayed.  
!
There may be a slight delay when starting  
playback of audio files encoded with image  
data.  
!
!
The navigation system is not compatible  
with packet write data transfer.  
This navigation system can recognize up to  
32 characters, beginning with the first char-  
acter, including extension for the file and  
folder name. Depending on the display  
area, the navigation system may try to dis-  
play them with a reduced font size. How-  
ever, the maximum number of the  
characters that you can display varies ac-  
214  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
second. Bluetooth was launched by a special  
interest group (SIG) comprising Ericsson Inc.,  
Intel Corp., Nokia Corp., Toshiba and IBM in  
1998, and it is currently developed by nearly  
2 000 companies worldwide.  
Example of a hierarchy  
The following figure is an example of the tier  
structure in the disc. The numbers in the fig-  
ure indicate the order in which folder numbers  
are assigned and the order to be played back.  
: Folder  
!
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are re-  
gistered trademarks owned by Bluetooth  
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by  
Pioneer Corporation is under license. Other  
trademarks and trade names are those of  
their respective owners.  
: File  
1
2
3
About the SAT RADIO  
READY Logo  
4
5
6
Level 1  
Level 2 Level 3 Level 4  
The SAT RADIO READY logo indicates that the  
Satellite Radio Tuner for Pioneer (i. e., XM  
tuner and Sirius satellite tuner which are sold  
separately) can be controlled by this naviga-  
tion system. Please inquire with your dealer or  
nearest authorized Pioneer service station re-  
garding the satellite radio tuner that can be  
connected to this navigation system.  
Notes  
!
!
This product assigns folder numbers. The user  
cannot assign folder numbers.  
If there is a folder that does not contain any  
playable file, the folder itself will display in the  
folder list but you cannot check any files in  
the folder. (A blank list will appear.) Also,  
these folders will be skipped without display-  
ing the folder number.  
Note:  
The system will use direct satellite-to-receiver  
broadcasting technology to provide listeners  
in their cars and at home with crystal-clear  
sound seamlessly from coast to coast. Satel-  
lite radio will create and package over 100  
channels of digital- quality music, news,  
sports, talk and children’s programming.  
“SAT Radio”, the SAT Radio logo and all re-  
lated marks are trademarks of Sirius Satellite  
Radio inc., and XM Satellite Radio Inc.  
Bluetooth  
Bluetooth is a short-range wireless radio con-  
nectivity technology that is developed as a  
cable replacement for cellular phones, hand-  
held PCs and other devices. Bluetooth oper-  
ates in 2.4 GHz frequency range and transmits  
voice and data at speeds up to 1 megabit per  
215  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
™
HD Radio Technology  
WMA/WMV  
!
AVIC-Z130BT  
HD Radio Technology manufactured under  
license from iBiquity Digital Corporation.  
Windows Media is either a registered trade-  
mark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in  
the United States and/or other countries.  
p This product includes technology owned by  
Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used  
or distributed without a license from  
™
U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio and  
the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos are pro-  
prietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.  
AVIC-X930BT, AVIC-X9310BT  
!
Microsoft Licensing, Inc.  
™
™
HD Radio , HD Radio Ready and HD  
Radio Ready logos are proprietary trade-  
marks of iBiquity Digital Corporation.  
DivX  
SD and SDHC logo  
DivX is a compressed digital video format cre-  
ated by the DivX video codec from DivX, Inc.  
This unit can play DivX video files recorded on  
CD-R/RW/ROM and DVD-R/RW/ROM discs.  
Keeping the same terminology as DVD video,  
individual DivX video files are called “Titles”.  
When naming files/titles on a CD-R/RW or a  
DVD-R/RW disc prior to burning, keep in mind  
that by default they will be played in alphabeti-  
cal order.  
SD Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.  
p DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos  
are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used  
under license.  
SDHC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.  
microSD Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.  
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital  
video format created by DivX, Inc. This is an of-  
ficial DivX Certified device that plays DivX  
video. Visit www.divx.com for more informa-  
tion and software tools to convert your files  
into DivX video.  
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This  
DivX Certified® device must be registered in  
order to play purchased DivX Video-on-De-  
mand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registra-  
tion code, locate the DivX VOD section in  
Displaying your DivX VOD registration code. Go  
to vod.divx.com for more information on how  
to complete your registration.  
microSDHC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C,  
LLC.  
= For details, refer to Displaying your DivX  
VOD registration code on page 174.  
216  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
AAC  
the developer to meet Apple performance  
standards.  
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and  
refers to an audio compression technology  
standard used with MPEG-2 and MPEG-4. Sev-  
eral applications can be used to encode AAC  
files, but file formats and extensions differ de-  
pending on the application which is used to  
encode. This unit plays back AAC files en-  
coded by iTunes.  
Apple is not responsible for the operation of  
this device or its compliance with safety and  
regulatory standards.  
Please note that the use of this accessory with  
iPod or iPhone may affect wireless perfor-  
mance.  
iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and  
iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., regis-  
tered in the U.S. and other countries.  
Detailed information  
regarding connected iPod  
devices  
iTunes  
iTunes is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered  
in the U.S. and other countries.  
CAUTION  
!
Pioneer accepts no responsibility for data lost  
from an iPod, even if that data is lost while  
using the navigation system. Please back up  
your iPod data regularly.  
Using App-based  
Connected Contents  
IMPORTANT  
!
Do not leave the iPod in direct sunlight for ex-  
tended amounts of time. Extended exposure  
to direct sunlight can result in iPod malfunc-  
tion due to the resulting high temperature.  
Do not leave the iPod in any location with  
high temperatures.  
Firmly secure the iPod when driving. Do not  
let the iPod fall onto the floor, where it may be-  
come jammed under the brake or gas pedal.  
Requirements to access app-based connected  
content services such as Pandora internet radio  
and Aha Radio using the Pioneer navigation sys-  
tem:  
!
!
!
Apple iPhone (first generation), iPhone 3G,  
iPhone 3GS, or iPhone 4 with firmware version  
3.0 or later.  
!
Latest version of the Pioneer compatible con-  
nected content application(s) for the iPhone,  
available from the service provider, down-  
loaded to your iPhone device.  
For details, refer to the iPod manuals.  
!
!
A current account with the content service  
provider.  
iPhone Data Plan.  
iPod and iPhone  
Note: if the Data Plan for your iPhone does  
not provide for unlimited data usage, addi-  
tional charges from your carrier may apply for  
accessing App-based Connected Contents via  
3G and/or EDGE networks.  
!
!
Connection to the Internet via 3G, EDGE or  
WiFi network.  
Optional Pioneer adapter cable connecting  
your iPhone to the Pioneer navigation system.  
“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean  
that an electronic accessory has been de-  
signed to connect specifically to iPod or  
iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by  
217  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Limitations:  
may not operate normally and could be da-  
maged.  
The LCD screen is exposed in order to in-  
crease its visibility within the vehicle.  
Please do not press strongly on it as this  
may damage it.  
Do not push the LCD screen with excessive  
force as this may scratch it.  
Never touch the LCD screen with anything  
besides your finger when operating the  
touch panel functions. The LCD screen can  
scratch easily.  
!
Access to app-based connected contents will  
depend on the availability of cellular and/or  
WiFi network coverage for the purpose of al-  
lowing your iPhone to connect to the Internet.  
Service availability may be geographically lim-  
ited to the U.S. Consult the connected content  
service provider for additional information.  
Ability of the Pioneer navigation system to ac-  
cess connected contents is subject to change  
without notice and could be affected by any of  
the following: compatibility issues with future  
firmware versions of iPhone; compatibility is-  
sues with future versions of the connected  
content application(s) for the iPhone; changes  
to or discontinuation of the connected Con-  
tent application(s) or service by its provider.  
!
!
!
!
!
Liquid crystal display (LCD) screen  
!
If the LCD screen is near the vent of an air  
conditioner, make sure that air from the air  
conditioner is not blowing on it. Heat from  
the heater may break the LCD screen, and  
cool air from the cooler may cause moist-  
ure to form inside the navigation unit, re-  
sulting in possible damage.  
Pandora  
Pandora is a registered trademark of Pandora  
Media, Inc.  
!
Small black dots or white dots (bright dots)  
may appear on the LCD screen. These are  
due to the characteristics of the LCD  
screen and do not indicate a malfunction.  
The LCD screen will be difficult to see if it is  
exposed to direct sunlight.  
When using a cellular phone, keep the an-  
tenna of the cellular phone away from the  
LCD screen to prevent disruption of the  
video in the form of disturbances such as  
spots or colored stripes.  
Aha Radio  
Aha, Aha Radio and the Aha and Aha Radio  
logos are either the trademarks or the regis-  
tered trademarks of Harman International In-  
dustries, Incorporated.  
!
!
Using the LCD screen correctly  
Handling the LCD screen  
!
When the LCD screen is subjected to direct  
sunlight for a long period of time, it will be-  
come very hot, resulting in possible da-  
mage to the LCD screen. When not using  
this navigation system, avoid exposing it to  
direct sunlight as much as possible.  
The LCD screen should be used within the  
temperature ranges shown in Specifica-  
tions.  
Maintaining the LCD screen  
!
When removing dust from the LCD screen  
or cleaning it, first turn the system power  
off, then wipe with a soft dry cloth.  
!
When wiping the LCD screen, take care not  
to scratch the surface. Do not use harsh or  
abrasive chemical cleaners.  
!
!
Do not use the LCD screen at temperatures  
higher or lower than the operating tem-  
perature range, because the LCD screen  
218  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
LED (light-emitting diode)  
backlight  
A light emitting diode is used inside the dis-  
play to illuminate the LCD screen.  
!
At low temperatures, using the LED back-  
light may increase image lag and degrade  
the image quality because of the character-  
istics of the LCD screen. Image quality will  
improve with an increase in temperature.  
The product lifetime of the LED backlight is  
more than 10 000 hours. However, it may  
decrease if used in high temperatures.  
If the LED backlight reaches the end of its  
product lifetime, the screen will become  
dimmer and the image will no longer be  
visible. In that case, please consult your  
dealer or the nearest authorized Pioneer  
Service Station.  
!
!
219  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Display information  
Destination Menu  
Phone Menu  
Page  
Page  
61  
Address  
Return Home  
POI  
35  
Dial Pad  
37  
Call Home  
62  
Contacts  
62  
Gas Station  
Bank  
Contacts Transfer  
Received Calls  
Dialed Calls  
Missed Calls  
65  
63  
37  
Coffee  
Hotel  
63  
63  
Spell Name  
Near Me  
37  
38  
Near Destination  
Around City  
AVIC FEEDS  
Favorites  
38  
38  
40  
39, 47  
40, 50  
46  
History  
Cancel Route  
Traffic  
51  
Coordinates  
Route Overview  
40  
43  
220  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Settings Menu  
Navi Settings menu  
Page  
150  
162  
170  
174  
156  
66  
Page  
150  
151  
152  
154  
154  
154  
155  
155  
Navi Settings  
System Settings  
AV Settings  
Connection Status  
3D Calibration Status  
Gas Mileage  
AV Sound  
Drive Log Settings  
Demo Mode  
Map Settings  
Bluetooth Settings  
Setting Replicator  
Set Home  
181  
Modify Current Location  
Eco Settings  
221  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
System Settings menu  
Map Settings menu  
Page  
Page  
Regional Settings  
Displayed Info  
Close Up View  
City Map  
Program Language, Voice Lan-  
guage  
163  
156  
156  
157  
157  
158  
158  
158  
158  
159  
159  
162  
159  
30  
Time  
km / mile  
163  
164  
164  
165  
165  
166  
167  
167  
168  
190  
City Map Barrier  
Show Traffic Incident  
Bluetooth Connected  
Current Street Name  
Favorites Icon  
Average Speed  
Volume  
Splash Screen  
Back Camera  
3D Land Mark  
Screen Calibration  
Illumi Color  
Show Maneuver  
Show Eco Meter  
Quick Access Selection  
Overlay POI  
Service Information  
Restore Factory Settings  
View Mode  
Day/Night Display  
AV Guide Mode  
Road Color  
161  
161  
161  
222  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Bluetooth Settings menu  
AV System Settings menu  
Page  
59  
Page  
170  
171  
171  
177  
172  
172  
171  
174  
173  
Connection  
AV1 Input  
Registration  
Device Name  
Password  
56  
AV2 Input  
66  
Wide Mode  
Auto EQ Meas.  
Mute  
66  
Bluetooth On/Off  
Echo Cancel  
67  
67  
Mute Level  
Rear SP  
DivX® VOD  
VR Catalog Menu  
Page  
67  
Auto Answer Preference  
Refuse All Calls  
67  
Clear Memory  
68  
Firmware update  
68  
223  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
AV Sound Settings menu  
Page  
FAD/BAL (Balance)  
EQ  
175  
175  
180  
180  
180  
180  
181  
179  
Loudness  
Sub Woofer  
HPF  
SLA  
Bass Booster  
Sonic Center Control  
224  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Glossary  
DivX  
DivX is a popular media technology created by  
DivX, Inc. DivX media files contain highly com-  
pressed video with high visual quality that  
maintains a relatively small file size. DivX files  
can also include advanced media features like  
menus, subtitles, and alternate audio tracks.  
Many DivX media files are available for down-  
load online, and you can create your own  
using your personal content and easy-to-use  
tools from DivX.com.  
AAC  
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and  
refers to an audio compression technology  
standard used with MPEG-2 and MPEG-4.  
Aspect ratio  
This is the width-to-height ratio of a TV screen.  
A regular display has an aspect ratio of 4:3.  
Wide screen displays have an aspect ratio of  
16:9, providing a bigger picture for exceptional  
presence and atmosphere.  
DivX Certified  
DivX Certified products are officially tested by  
the creators of DivX and guaranteed to play all  
versions of DivX video, including DivX 6.  
Bit rate  
This expresses data volume per second, or bps  
units (bits per second). The higher the rate,  
the more information is available to reproduce  
the sound. Using the same encoding method  
(such as MP3), the higher the rate, the better  
the sound.  
Favorites  
A frequently visited location (such as your  
workplace or a relative’s home) that you can  
register to allow easy routing.  
Built-in sensor  
The built-in sensor that enables the system to  
estimate your vehicle’s position.  
GPS  
Global Positioning System. A network of satel-  
lites that provides navigation signals for a vari-  
ety of purposes.  
CD-DA  
This stands for a general music CD (commer-  
cial-release audio CD). In this manual, this  
word is sometime used for a distinction be-  
tween data CDs (which include compressed  
audio files) and general music CDs.  
Guidance point  
These are important landmarks along your  
route, generally intersections. The next gui-  
dance point along your route is indicated on  
the map by the yellow flag icon.  
Chapter  
Home location  
Your registered home location.  
Titles of DVD-Video are in turn divided into  
chapters which are numbered in the same  
way as the chapters of a book. With discs fea-  
turing chapters, you can quickly find a desired  
scene with chapter search.  
ID3 tag  
This is a method of embedding track-related  
information in an MP3 file. This embedded in-  
formation can include the track title, the ar-  
tist’s name, the album title, the music genre,  
the year of production, comments and other  
data. The contents can be freely edited using  
software with ID3 tag editing functions.  
Although the tags are restricted by the num-  
ber of characters, the information can be  
viewed when the track is played back.  
Current location  
The present location of your vehicle; your cur-  
rent location is shown on the map by a red tri-  
angle mark.  
Destination  
A location you choose as the end point of your  
journey.  
225  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
ISO 9660 format  
Multi-audio (Multilingual dialog)  
Some videos feature dialog recorded in multi-  
ple languages or audio recorded in multiple  
tracks. For example, dialog in up to eight lan-  
guages can be recorded on a single DVD-Vi-  
deo, letting you choose the language as  
desired.  
This is the international standard for the for-  
mat logic of DVD/CD-ROM folders and files.  
For the ISO9660 format, there are regulations  
for the following two levels:  
!
Level 1:  
The file name is in 8.3 format (the name  
consists of up to eight characters, half-byte  
English capital letters, half-byte numerals  
and the “_” sign, with a file-extension of  
three characters).  
Multi-session  
Multi-session is a recording method that al-  
lows additional data to be recorded later.  
When recording data on a CD-ROM, CD-R or  
CD-RW, etc., all data from beginning to end is  
treated as a single unit or session. Multi-ses-  
sion is a method of recording more than two  
sessions in one disc.  
!
!
Level 2:  
The file name can have up to 31 characters  
(including the separation mark “.” and a file  
extension). Each folder contains less than  
eight hierarchies.  
Extended formats  
Joliet:  
Multi-subtitle  
For example, subtitles in up to 32 languages  
can be recorded on a single DVD-Video, letting  
you choose as desired.  
File names can have up to 64 characters.  
Romeo:  
File names can have up to 128 characters.  
Packet write  
JPEG  
This is a general term for a method of writing  
individual files to a CD-R, etc. whenever re-  
quired, just as is done with files on floppy or  
hard disks.  
This stands for Joint Photographic Experts  
Group, and is an international still image com-  
pression standard.  
MP3  
Parental lock  
MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an  
audio compression standard established by a  
working group (MPEG) of the ISO (Interna-  
tional Organization for Standardization). MP3  
is able to compress audio data to about 1/10th  
the size of a conventional disc.  
Some DVD-Video discs with violent or adult-or-  
iented scenes feature parental lock which pre-  
vents children from viewing such scenes. With  
this kind of disc, if you set the unit’s parental  
lock level, playback of scenes inappropriate for  
children will be disabled, or these scenes will  
be skipped.  
MPEG  
This stands for Moving Pictures Experts  
Group, and is an international video image  
compression standard.  
Phone book  
An address book on user’s phone is collec-  
tively referred to as “Phone book”. Depending  
on the cellular phone, the phone book may be  
called a name such as “Contacts”, “Business  
card” or something else.  
Multi-angle  
With regular TV programs, although multiple  
cameras are used to simultaneously shoot  
scenes, only images from one camera at a  
time are transmitted to your TV. Some DVDs  
feature scenes shot from multiple angles, let-  
ting you choose your viewing angle as desired.  
Point Of Interest (POI)  
Any of a range of locations stored in the data,  
such as railway stations, shops, restaurants,  
and amusement parks.  
226  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Region number  
Waypoint  
DVD players and DVD discs feature region  
numbers indicating the area in which they  
were purchased. Playback of a DVD is not pos-  
sible unless it features the same region num-  
ber as the DVD player.  
A location that you choose to visit before your  
destination; a journey can be built up from  
multiple waypoints and the destination.  
WMA  
™
WMA is short for Windows Media Audio and  
refers to an audio compression technology  
that is developed by Microsoft Corporation.  
WMA data can be encoded by using Windows  
Media Player version 7 or later.  
Route setting  
The process of determining the ideal route to a  
specific location; route setting is done auto-  
matically by the system when you specify a  
destination.  
Set route  
The route marked out by the system to your  
destination. It is highlighted in bright color on  
the map.  
Title  
DVD-Video discs have a high data capacity, en-  
abling recording of multiple videos on a single  
disc. If, for example, one disc contains three  
separate videos, they are divided into title 1,  
title 2 and title 3. This lets you enjoy the conve-  
nience of title search and other functions.  
Track log  
Your navigation system logs routes that you al-  
ready passed through if the track logger is ac-  
tivated. This recorded route is called a “track  
log”. It is handy when you want to check a  
route traveled or if returning along a complex  
route.  
VBR  
VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally  
speaking, CBR (constant bit rate) is more  
widely used. But by flexibly adjusting the bit  
rate according to the needs of audio compres-  
sion, it is possible to produce compression-  
priority data.  
Voice guidance  
The giving of directions by navigation voice  
while in guidance.  
227  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Display  
Screen size/aspect ratio:  
Specifications  
General  
AVIC-Z130BT .................... 7 inch wide/16:9  
AVIC-X930BT .................... 6.1 inch wide/16:9  
AVIC-X9310BT ................. 6.1 inch wide/16:9  
Effective display area:  
AVIC-Z130BT .................... 157 mm × 83 mm  
AVIC-X930BT .................... 137 mm × 72 mm  
AVIC-X9310BT ................. 137 mm × 72 mm  
Pixels ............................................. 384 000 (800 × 480)  
Display method ........................ TFT Active matrix driving  
Backlight ..................................... LED  
Color system .............................. NTSC compatible  
Tolerable temperature range:  
Rated power source ............... 14.4 V DC  
(allowable voltage range:  
10.8 V to 15.1 V DC)  
Grounding system ................... Negative type  
Maximum current consumption  
........................................... 10.0 A  
Dimensions (W × H × D):  
AVIC-Z130BT  
Chassis ..................... 178 mm × 100 mm ×  
165 mm  
(7–3/8 in. × 3-7/8 in. ×  
6-1/2 in.)  
Power on ............................ +14 °F to +140 °F  
Power off ............................ –4 °F to +176 °F  
Angle adjustment  
Nose ........................... 170 mm × 96 mm × 20 mm  
(6-3/4 in. × 3-3/4 in. ×  
3/4 in.)  
AVIC-Z130BT .................... 0° to 22°  
AVIC-X930BT .................... 0°  
AVIC-X9310BT ................. 0°  
AVIC-X930BT, AVIC-X9310BT  
Chassis ..................... 178 mm × 100 mm ×  
165 mm  
Audio  
(7 in. × 3-7/8 in. × 6-1/2 in.)  
Nose ........................... 170 mm × 96 mm × 12 mm  
(6-3/4 in. × 3-3/4 in. ×  
Maximum power output ....... 50 W × 4  
50 W × 2 ch/4 W + 70 W ×  
1 ch/2 W (for subwoofer)  
1/2 in.)  
Weight:  
Continuous power output ... 22 W × 4 (50 Hz to 15 kHz,  
5 %THD, 4 W LOAD, Both  
Channels Driven)  
Load impedance ...................... 4 W (4 W to 8 W [2 W for 1 ch]  
allowable)  
AVIC-Z130BT .................... 2.27 kg (5.0 lbs)  
AVIC-X930BT .................... 1.98 kg (4.4 lbs)  
AVIC-X9310BT ................. 1.98 kg (4.4 lbs)  
NAND flash memory ............. 4 GB  
Preout output level (max):  
AVIC-Z130BT .................... 4.0 V  
AVIC-X930BT .................... 2.2 V  
AVIC-X9310BT ................. 2.2 V  
Preout impedance:  
Navigation  
GPS receiver:  
System ................................ L1, C/Acode GPS  
SPS (Standard Positioning  
Service)  
AVIC-Z130BT .................... 100 W  
AVIC-X930BT .................... 1 kW  
AVIC-X9310BT ................. 1 kW  
Equalizer (8-Band Graphic Equalizer):  
Frequency .......................... 40 Hz/80 Hz/200 Hz/400 Hz/  
1 kHz/2.5 kHz/8 kHz/10 kHz  
Gain ...................................... 12 dB  
Loudness contour:  
Reception system .......... 32-channel multi-channel  
reception system  
Reception frequency .... 1 575.42 MHz  
Sensitivity .......................... –140 dBm (typ)  
Position update frequency  
........................................... Approx. once per second  
GPS antenna:  
Antenna ............................. Micro strip flat antenna/  
right-handed helical polari-  
zation  
Antenna cable ................. 3.55 m (11 ft. 7 in.)  
Dimensions (W × H × D)  
Low ....................................... +3.5 dB (100 Hz), +3 dB  
(10 kHz)  
Mid ....................................... +10 dB (100 Hz), +6.5 dB  
(10 kHz)  
High ..................................... +11 dB (100 Hz), +11 dB  
(10 kHz)  
........................................... 33 mm × 15 mm × 36 mm  
(1-1/4 in. × 4/7 in. ×  
(volume: –30 dB)  
1-3/8 in.)  
HPF:  
Weight ................................ 73.7 g (0.2 lbs)  
Frequency .......................... 50 Hz/63 Hz/80 Hz/100 Hz/  
125 Hz  
Slope .................................... –12 dB/oct  
228  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Subwoofer:  
SD (AVIC-Z130BT)  
SD memory card, SDHC memory card  
Compatible physical format  
Frequency .......................... 50 Hz/63 Hz/80 Hz/100 Hz/  
125 Hz  
Slope .................................... –18 dB/oct  
Gain ...................................... –24/+6 dB  
Phase .................................. Normal/Reverse  
........................................... Version 2.00  
File system ........................ FAT16, FAT32  
Decoding format ............ MP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE/  
H.264/MPEG4/WMV  
Bass boost:  
Gain ...................................... 0 dB to +12 dB  
SD (AVIC-X930BT and AVIC-X9310BT)  
microSD card, microSDHC card  
Compatible physical format  
DVD Drive  
System .......................................... DVD-Video, CD, MP3, WMA,  
AAC, DivX system  
........................................... Version 2.00  
File system ........................ FAT16, FAT32  
Decoding format ............ MP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE/  
H.264/MPEG4/WMV  
Usable discs .............................. DVD-Video, DVD-R(DL),  
DVD-RW, CD-ROM, CD-DA,  
CD-R/RW  
Region number ........................ 1  
Signal format:  
Bluetooth  
Sampling frequency ..... 44.1 kHz/48 kHz/96 kHz  
Number of quantization bits  
........................................... 16 bit/20 bit/24 bit; linear  
Frequency response ............... 5 Hz to 44 000 Hz (with DVD,  
at sampling frequency  
Version .......................................... Bluetooth 2.0+EDR  
Output power ............................ +4 dBm Max.  
(Power class 2)  
FM tuner  
AVIC-Z130BT  
96 kHz)  
Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 97 dB (1 kHz) (IEC-A net-  
work)  
Frequency range ............ 87.9 MHz to 107.9 MHz  
Usable sensitivity ........... 9 dBf (0.8 µV/75 W, mono,  
S/N: 30 dB)  
Signal-to-noise ratio ..... 80 dB (digital broadcasting)  
(IEC-A network)  
72 dB (analog broadcasting)  
(IEC-A network)  
Distortion ........................... 0.3 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz,  
stereo)  
(CD: 96 dB (1 kHz) (IEC-A  
network))  
Dynamic range ......................... 95 dB (1 kHz) (CD: 94 dB  
(1 kHz))  
Distortion ..................................... 0.008 % (1 kHz)  
Output level:  
Video .................................... 1.0 Vp-p/75 W ( 0.2 V)  
Audio ................................... 1.0 V (1 kHz, 0 dB)  
Number of channels .............. 2 (stereo)  
MP3 decoding format ........... MPEG-1 & 2 Audio Layer 3  
WMA decoding format ......... Ver.9.0 L3  
AAC decoding format ............ MPEG-4 AAC (only encoded  
by iTunes):  
0.1 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz,  
mono)  
Frequency response ..... 30 Hz to 15 000 Hz ( 3 dB)  
Stereo separation .......... 45 dB (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz)  
AVIC-X930BT, AVIC-X9310BT  
Frequency range ............ 87.9 MHz to 107.9 MHz  
Usable sensitivity ........... 9 dBf (0.8 µV/75 W, mono,  
S/N: 30 dB)  
.m4a  
DivX decoding format ............ Home Theater Ver.3.11,  
Ver.4.X, Ver.5.X, Ver.6.X :  
Signal-to-noise ratio ..... 72 dB (IEC-A network)  
Distortion ........................... 0.3 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz,  
stereo)  
.avi, .divx  
USB  
0.1 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz,  
USB standard spec. ............... USB 2.0 High Speed  
Max current supply ................. 1 A  
File system .................................. FAT16, FAT32  
USB class .................................... Mass storage class  
Decoding format ...................... MP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE/  
H.264/MPEG4/WMV  
mono)  
Frequency response ..... 30 Hz to 15 000 Hz ( 3 dB)  
Stereo separation .......... 45 dB (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz)  
AM tuner  
AVIC-Z130BT  
Frequency range ............ 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz  
(10 kHz)  
Usable sensitivity ........... 25 µV (S/N: 20 dB)  
229  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Signal-to-noise ratio ..... 80 dB (digital broadcasting)  
(IEC-A network)  
62 dB (analog broadcasting)  
(IEC-A network)  
AVIC-X930BT, AVIC-X9310BT  
Frequency range ............ 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz  
(10 kHz)  
Usable sensitivity ........... 25 µV (S/N: 20 dB)  
Signal-to-noise ratio ..... 62 dB (IEC-A network)  
Traffic tuner (AVIC-Z130BT)  
Rated power source ............... 13.8 V DC  
(allowable voltage range:  
10.0 V to 14.5 V DC)  
Grounding system ................... Negative type  
Maximum current consumption  
........................................... 60 mA  
Dimensions (W × H × D) ... 68 mm × 49 mm × 19 mm  
(2-5/8 in. × 1-7/8 in. ×  
3/4 in.)  
Weight .......................................... 180 g (0.397 lbs)  
CEA2006 Specifications  
Power output ............................. 14 W RMS × 4 Channels  
(4 W and ≦ 1 % THD+N)  
S/N ratio ....................................... 91 dBA (reference: 1 W into  
4 W)  
Note  
Specifications and design are subject to possible  
modifications without notice due to im-  
provements.  
230  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
231  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PIONEER CORPORATION  
1-1, Shin-ogura, Saiwai-ku, Kawasaki-shi,  
Kanagawa 212-0031, JAPAN  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.  
P.O. Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A.  
TEL: (800) 421-1404  
PIONEER EUROPE NV  
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium/Belgique  
TEL: (0) 3/570.05.11  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.  
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936  
TEL: 65-6472-7555  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.  
5 Arco Lane, Heatherton, Victoria, 3202, Australia  
TEL: (03) 9586-6300  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.  
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada  
TEL: 1-877-283-5901  
TEL: 905-479-4411  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V.  
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso  
Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000  
TEL: 55-9178-4270  
先鋒股份有限公司  
總公司 : 台北市中山北路二段44號13樓  
電話 : (02) 2521-3588  
先鋒電子（香港）有限公司  
香港九龍尖沙咀海港城世界商業中心9樓901-6室  
電話 : (0852) 2848-6488  
Published by Pioneer Corporation.  
Copyright © 2011 by Pioneer Corporation.  
All rights reserved.  
<KMZZX> <11A00000>  
<CRB3610-A> UC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Pelco Video Game Keyboard KBD960 User Manual
Planar Car Video System pjt155r User Manual
Plantronics Headphones W440 M User Manual
Poulan Blower BP400 User Manual
Power Acoustik Car Video System PDR 654 PDR 654T User Manual
Powermate Portable Generator PM400911 User Manual
Premier Mounts TV Mount Rotary series User Manual
ProForm Treadmill 831247453 User Manual
Pro Optic Camera Accessories PROFH User Manual
PYLE Audio Car Video System PLVWR8000 User Manual